All posts by Erik K. Johnson

I help podcasters transform their information into engaging entertainment by refining the art of podcasting.
Podcast

Putting Your Why In Your Podcast Content – PTC 361

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

In this episode, you get the first session from my most recent Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Here, we help you discover why we podcast. Then, we help you incorporate that “why” into your podcast content.

I had a client tell me, “If we are able to generate leads, that is awesome. If we are helping change people’s lives, and they are reaching out to us, that would be a success. Becoming a resource is the goal.”

SUCCESS

What does success look like to you? Have you determined your passion?

Your podcast allows you to leave your mark on the world. You can spread your message and make an impact if that is your desire.

Before you can reach that goal, you need to define that goal.

Making money with your podcast isn’t enough. You need to develop a deeper desire. A deep, meaningful goal will motivate you to get in the studio every week and record an episode.

If you haven’t defined that meaningful purpose, finding the motivation to sustain a consistent podcast will be difficult.

During this episode, we will help you find your “why”. 

Then, we will help you incorporate that “why” into your podcast content.

It is important to provide your audience with a little of your story and the reason you create your content in each episode. This allows your audience relationship develop. Your listener gets to know who you are.

RELATIONSHIPS

On each episode, include a bit of your why and your story. This is how your listeners get to know, like and trust you. This is how relationships are built.

Next week, we will talk about reviewing your episode to reach your goals and get better.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Your Podcast Strategy – PTC 360

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How is your podcast strategy? Do you even have one?

Lots of podcasters struggle with finding constructive, intentional ways to get the word out about their show. The marketing stuff can get tricky.

Many podcasters I talk with would be happy to have enough downloads to get 2 or 4 coaching clients paying a fee. How do you bring a few listeners through the funnel?

Let’s look at your whole strategy today on this episode.

BOOTCAMP

Before we jump into it, I want to invite you to a powerful event I am holding where I will help you build your podcast monetization strategy. We actually get stuff done in this day-long bootcamp.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is full of fluff. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sales pitch.

You now have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It’s actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

HOW IT WORKS

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. I’ll show you why most podcasts don’t make money, so you can avoid those pitfalls.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you a better way during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, and we will pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is an all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for this 6-hour bootcamp and your workbook. More importantly, you walk away with your monetization strategy for your show.

Right now, you can enroll for $197. Enroll now and secure your spot.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s sweeten the deal for you a little more. If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, you will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you’ll need before the bootcamp begins.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

BEGIN YOUR STRATEGY

As you build relationships with your content, start with the end in mind. This is where your strategy begins.

What do you want your listener to take away from this episode?

Decide what emotions do you want to stir?

What do you want your listener to do when the episode is over?

When you know those goals, your content will be easy to create.

On your podcast, stir emotion by talking about the “why” to your solution. Agitate the hopes, needs, fears and dreams of your listener.

Then, give your listener a little of your “what”. Let them engage with your coaching, courses or other offerings for the “how”.

MONETIZATION STRATEGY

Then, you need to determine your revenue goal.

You make money with your podcast, not from your podcast.

The podcast doesn’t generate any income. Ads are a lot of work with very little return.

To monetize your show, leverage the attention you have built to drive your business. How does the podcast fit into your overall marketing plan?

Start with the goal.

Your podcast is the top of your funnel. This is where you build the relationship with your prospective client.

So, what do you want them to do when the show is over?

Have one clear, concise call-to-action. Get them started on their journey with you.

This could be a free download, strategy call, webinar, or ask me anything session. Give them something in return for their name and email address.

Nurture the relationship, serve them well and move them through the sales journey.

MARKETING STRATEGY

When it comes to marketing, begin again with the end goal in mind. Intentionally build the marketing plan for your business.

I was looking at the calendar the other day and realized we are 8 weeks from New Year’s Eve.

The new year always brings new goal and a renewed energy to what we are doing.

Unfortunately, studies show that 60%-80% of people give up on their resolutions by the middle of February.

You’re probably saying, “Erik, we just finished Halloween! What’s all this resolution stuff?”

Well, I believe most people give up on their resolutions, because they don’t have a clear plan to achieve their goals.

Lose weight. Start my own business. Grow my podcast audience. Spend more time with my kids.

Those are all great. But, they are not specific and are not connected to a plan.

Now is the time to start planning. Create your strategy to reach those goals.

Spend the next 2 months getting things in place to execute your plan when the resolution kicks in.

A plan is something like go to the gym 3 times a week, appear on 2 other podcasts a week or have one-on-one time with each kid once a week.

That’s a plan.

If you build your strategy now, you will have a much better chance of reaching your goals.

On top of that, who says it needs to be January 1st to start working on a new goal?

Get after it.

AUDIENCE STRATEGY

In radio, we had a saying. Frequency to the target.

The first time a prospect hears your marketing message, it goes in one ear and out the other.

The second time, the message might start to sink in.

The third time, it might ring a bell in their memory.

When your prospect hears your message the fourth, fifth and sixth time, he might begin to remember it.

Therefore, you need to deliver your message to your prospect six or eight times prior to the moment he is making a buying decision.

You cannot try a marketing tactic once and decide if it works. It requires frequency to the target.

Don’t expect your audience to grow overnight. Your prospective listeners need to hear about your show multiple times before they will push play.

How many times have you said, “Oh yeah, I’ve been meaning to listen to that podcast.”

It’s like snowfall. Mother Nature doesn’t make it snow for 3 minutes and then think, “Well, that didn’t work.”

It takes millions of little flakes over time to create a 5 foot drift.

As you work to grow your audience, be consistent.

Pick three marketing strategies. This could be other podcasts, appearing on summits and stages, social media, YouTube, partners, guest blogging or various other ways.

Select three that you enjoy and can do consistently.

Then, spend 30 minutes each day taking action on those vehicles to get in front of new potential listenes.

Over time, your audience grows.

YOUR PLAN

Are you frustrated because your podcast makes no money?

So many podcasters come to me struggling to find a path to riches.

It is possible to monetize your podcast. However, you need to understand that it takes three things to make that happen.

  1. Something to sell
  2. A strategy to sell it using your podcast
  3. Patience

If you have those three things, you have a much better chance to use your podcast to build and grow a business.

If you are willing to put in the time and effort, good things will happen.

GET SPECIFIC

One of the most common questions from podcasters is, “How do I monetize my podcast?”

I’ve tried it all.

When I first started, I put everything I knew about building great shows into a comprehensive course. It was a masterpiece.

Then reality cracked me upside the head.

Nobody wants a comprehensive course. They want a focused solution to their problem.

To monetize your show, you must …

  • Have something to sell
  • Ask for the sale
  • Serve first
  • Find your listener’s true pain
  • Explain their transformation with your solution
  • Build rappport

As you develop something to sell, find what works for you. It should be something that …

  • You enjoy
  • People want (different than need)
  • You can deliver
  • Can scale

TAKE ACTION

Those are the steps. If you would like my help crafting your monetization strategy, join me for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp.

Join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It’s actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, You will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you’ll need before the bootcamp begins.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

Podcast

Answers To Your Podcast Questions – PTC 359

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

I did a Facebook Live “Ask Me Anything” the other day on the Podcast Talent Coach Facebook Page. On it, you got answers to your podcast questions.

We talked about everything from selling and monetizing your show to using text messaging as a way to interact with your listeners.

I thought I would share those answers with you today.

BOOTCAMP

Before we jump into it, I want to invite you to a powerful event I am holding where I will help you build your podcast monetization strategy. We actually get stuff done in this day-long bootcamp.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is full of fluff. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sales pitch.

You now have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It’s actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. I’ll show you why most podcasts don’t make money, so you can avoid those pitfalls.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you a better way during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, and we will pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is an all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for this 6-hour bootcamp and your workbook. More importantly, you walk away with your monetization strategy for your show.

Right now, you can enroll for $197. Enroll now and secure your spot.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s sweeten the deal for you a little more. If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, You will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you’ll need before the bootcamp begins.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

QUESTIONS

My biggest challenge is growing the audience. What’s the best way? – David

How do I maximize the content while minimizing the time & effort? – Anne

I’d love to know if you have any thoughts on SMS text marketing? I think I’d be able to get more engagement if my busy moms could simply text me a question about a product or service instead of sending in a voicemail or sending an email. Do you have any recommendations for a service provider to work with? – Laura

How do I direct people to more than the freebie. – Karen

How do you know your worth? I’m not good at selling. – Mike

Offer things without making it sound like an ad. Hard to make yourself likable while selling something. – Cheryl

How does the podcast fit into the whole marketing plan? – Bruce

GET ANSWERS – ASK ME ANYTHING

I will be doing more “ask me anything” sessions on the Podcast Talent Coach Facebook page. If you are not following me there yet, head to PodcastTalentCoach.com/Facebook.

I would love to have you join us and get your questions answers to your podcast questions.

BOOTCAMP

Come join us for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. It is a powerful event that will help you build your podcast monetization strategy.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is a big sales pitch. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sale.

You have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy.

During this event, you will discover 9 different ways to monetize your show. Then, we will build your specific way to generate revenue that is perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your show.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you 9 better ways during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, so you can pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is a 6-hour, all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for the 6-hour bootcamp, your workbook and your monetization strategy for your show.

You can get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

Podcast

How To Build Know, Like & Trust – PTC 358

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

To grow your audience and monetize your podcast, you need to build relationships. People do business with those they know, like and trust. That is the definition of relationship.

Today, I want to show you how stories help you build those relationships.

BOOTCAMP

Before we jump into it, I want to invite you to a powerful event that will help you build your podcast monetization strategy.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is a big sales pitch. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sale.

You have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will put you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your show.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. I’ll show you why most podcasts don’t make money, so you can avoid those pitfalls.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you a better way during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, so you can pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is a 6-hour, all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp will be $197 for the 6-hour bootcamp, your workbook and your monetization strategy for your show.

Right now, you can enroll for $97 if you act fast. This fast action deal is good until Tuesday, October 19th at Midnight. Enroll now at a great deal and secure your spot. After Tuesday, the price goes to $197 and I’ll start promoting it heavily.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s sweeten the deal for you a little more. If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, I will give you my Powerful Podcast Interviews course as my gift.

Powerful interviews are a great way to grow your audience and monetize your show. This course shows you how to leverage your interviews to engage your audience.

In this course, we talk about why we interview, the essential elements of creating unique interviews, the powerful interview questions and how to ask those questions in a way that will engage both your guest and audience. You get it as my gift with your enrollment.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp. Save when you register by Tuesday.

FRIENDSHIPS THROUGH TRUST

Now, let’s talk about how you build trust and use it to grow your show and business. 

People do business with those they know, like and trust. That is the definition of relationship. This is where friendship begins.

Think about your best friend. How much do you know about that person?

Do you know where they grew up? How about where they went to school? Do you know what they like to eat or something about their unique interests? There are things they haven’t told anyone but you.

That’s how friendships are formed. You probably weren’t there when they were growing up in their gradeschool neighborhood. But, they told you all about it.

Their embarrasing high school stories may not have included you. But, they told you all about it.

The stories go on and on. Your best friend tells you everything. You weren’t there to experience all of the events, but you heard about them.

That is the power of story. Friends share with friends.

Friendships are built by revealing things about yourself. When you reveal things, you show trust. The more you share stories with your listener, the more you build relationships.

ELEMENTS OF STORY

Powerful stories have 4 elements.

The first is your Provocative Point. My radio coach would always ask, “What do you want the audience to laugh at, marvel at or better understand?” That is your Provocative Point.

This is the goal of your story. Make your audience feel something.

Next, you need an Intriguing introduction. This should include your Provocative Point. Tell people where we are going. Nobody wants to get on a bus when they don’t know where it is headed.

When you start with your Provocative Point, your listeners can enjoy the journey. They can enjoy the details.

That is the third element … your Vivid details. When you include vivid details, your story become more believable. Your story stirs emotion. You transport your listener to your specific time and place. The details create images in the theater of the mind.

Finally, end your story with a Powerful Conclusion. Put a period at the end of your story. This should be a quick restatement of your Intriguing Introduction, just like a great speech.

STORY EXAMPLES

Let’s review an example of how story works in your podcast.

Mike Van Pelt is one of my clients. He gave me permission to share these examples from his True Man Podcast. You can find his amazing show at www.TrueManPodcast.com.

His podcast is designed for men who feel stuck in some aspect of their life.

Do you feel you’ve lost control of your goals or the ability to move in a new direction? Do you feel like you are navigating life’s journey on your own when you could really use a guide and a roadmap? That is what the True Man Podcast is all about.

These stories come from Episode 16 The Comeback. This episode is all about writing your comeback story.

When you tell stories, put your listener in the moment. Stir emotions and make them feel something.

STORY ONE

In the first story, Mike talks about his story. He talks about discovering what it means to be a parent. However, he doesn’t put me in the moment.

This story is not very specific. There are not many details. Give it a listen.

(first story)

There are a lot of generalities in this story. He didn’t put me in the moment.

Mike needs to tell me when he decided it was time to go back to school. Put me in that conversation.

Mike tells me he was talking to his kids about the importance of school. He comes to the realization that he was being hipocritical. Put me in that moment.

Where were you? What were you doing? Mike stirs some great emotions. He tells me about being embarrassed. When does the pivot happen?

I want Mike to get to the point where he says, “Then one day I discovered …” or “That’s when … happened.”

Where is the pivot in the story where we see the transformation happen? Put me in that one place and time.

STORY TWO

The second story gets a little closer. Mike talks with his co-host Paul about the starting a men’s group. Here is story two.

(second story)

This story gets a little closer. They meet Friday mornings. The meetings are in Paul’s office. It is 7a. It is Mike and group of guys.

In this story, I am starting to be present in the room. Use those vivid details.

What does the office look like? Where is the pivot point in that story? The story is a little closer to a great story, but not quite where we need to be.

STORY THREE

The third story is much better. This is a story about a specific retreat.

In this story, we are very specific with the details. As you listen to this story, notice how vivid the details become.

As Mike tells the story, you are put right there in the moment. You can see the surroundings. You can feel the emotion of what he is going through. Take a listen to the specific details in this story.

(third story)

I love the specifics in this story. Mike uses all of the senses.

And, check out the details.

They go up to Virginia a couple years ago.

It was very powerful to be around 300-400 guys and spend the weekend in the mountains.

They got to enjoy a focus on God.

It was Saturday morning.

Michael Thompson walked in on Saturday morning.

He was going to play 3 songs.

The second song was by Josh Groban.

These details are very specific. It is one specific point in time.

The first story was very generic. It could have been anywhere at any time.

In this third story, we are talking about one specific Saturday morning, up in the mountains, when he experiences one specific song.

This is what I’m talking about when I talk about putting me in one moment in time. That’s what brings the stories to life and makes them powerful.

Details and senses make the story real and believable. It also builds that relationship with your audience by revealing things about yourself. Mike is building trust with his audience by trusting them with his vulnerability.

PROVOCATIVE POINT

At the end Mike says, “That song took me out. I was almost on my knees. Because I didn’t know that God loved me that intimately. And I didn’t know I could love him back that intimately.”

This statement is the provocative point. It is what Mike wants the listener to better understand. This is where the story should start.

He could have started the story with, “There was one day when I finally realized that I could love God so intimately.” With this intriguing introduction, we know where we are going.

The intriguing introduction could be followed by the story of being at a retreat one Saturday morning. We were up in the mountains with 327 other men.

This is like seeing the trailer for the movie. We know the premise of the story. Now, we get to enjoy the details.

Use stories in your podcast, and you will begin building powerful friendships with your listeners. This is how you build know, like and trust to monetize your podcast.

JOIN US

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, come join us for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp will be $197 for the 6-hour bootcamp, your workbook and your monetization strategy for your show.

Right now, you can enroll for $97 if you act fast. This fast action deal is good until Tuesday, October 19th at Midnight. Enroll now at a great deal and secure your spot. After Tuesday, the price goes to $197 when I’ll start promoting it.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

I’d love to see you there to help you build your strategy. Get in today. We’ll see you there.

Podcast

Podcast Notes vs Script – PTC 357

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

This week I received a great email from a listener regarding your show prep. How do you balance your time when it comes to podcast notes versus using a script to record your show?

There are benefits to both. Today, I want to show you how to prepare with respect to where you are on your podcast journey.

LET’S CHAT

Before we get into it, I would love to invite you to have a free podcast strategy call with me. If you are struggling to grow your audience or monetize your show and you would like help building a strategy, take advantage of a free podcast strategy session with me.

You can apply for a spot at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply.

Many people think these calls are just sales calls in disguise like many of the webinars you attend. The guru promises to teach you a ton. All you walk away with is a sales pitch.

This call is not that.

HOW IT WORKS

Here is how it works. You and I get on a Zoom call. We start by getting clear on your goals. Where do you want to be a year from now to happy with the results?

Then, we determine where you are now. With that, we have the path. Now we need to figure out how to travel that path.

We talk about what you’ve tried in the past. What has worked and what didn’t work? What did you enjoy and what frustrated you?

After we look at the past, we brainstorm the future. We kick around a few ideas to see what excites you. I have seem many things over my 3 decades in radio and podcasting. Ideas are my thing.

We then narrow down the ideas to one path that will work for you. This is an idea that excites you that I have seen work.

At this point, you have your strategy. If you would like my help implementing your strategy, we can talk about how that would look. On the other hand, if you don’t need the accountability, we leave the call as friends.

That’s it. No arm-twisting. Just two podcast fans talking ideas.

If you would like to build your strategy, you need to apply. I can’t possibly talk with everyone. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply.

THE QUESTION ABOUT A SCRIPT

The question this week comes from Taj. He writes …

Thanks for your podcasts. I benefit a lot from them.

One question I have is about scripting. How much do you script your podcast? Is it word for word or do you just have bullet points. You sound very engaging and deliver it as if having an engaging conversational chat with me (or other listeners).

Scripting word for word takes me a long time, but does mean I am tighter and get to the point quicker.

When I work off bullet points, I am able to speak and be natural and inject my personality, but I end up being more wordy. However, I need less time to prepare.

So how do you script or advise I script so I am natural but also not too wordy and take less time producing episodes.

Really appreciate your work.

Kind regards,

Taj

NOTES VS SCRIPT

Script vs. outline really depends where you are in your experience.

Being in radio for over 30 years, I’ve been able to hone my skills to be able to read a script and make it sound natural. It takes a lot of practice to do that.

Have you ever seen a play where the actors are just natural? The conversation feel authentic, even though they are reciting a script.

On the other hand, when we watch a high school performance or a production with rookie actors, the conversation is very stiff and unnatural. The words are pronounced with too much diction. There are no uhs or ums. Once speaker stops before the other speaker begins to talk.

The major difference between veteran and rookie actors is the way they approach the words on the paper. We speak much differently than we read and write.

A good actor can take a script and transform it into natural speech by adding in the little nuances that make it sound real.

When this happens, there are natural, vocal nuances that make it sound like speech rather than reciting text. There are breaths. The actor will start a sentence and then start over, just like you would in real life.

There are uhs and ums and half sentences. The actors aren’t perfect, because we aren’t perfect in everyday conversations.

If you script your show, you need to be a seasoned performer.

BEGINNERS

Beginning podcasters should begin using a detailed outline. This should not be scripted, but should include more detail than a general outline.

In this outline, include the big points you’d like to make. Build your standard outline as you would for any speech.

Then, go back to each point, and be sure to include details and stories that are important to the content. The more detail you can add, the less you will need to think in the moment.

If I were doing a detailed outline for this episode, I may include that sentence … The more detail you add, the less you need to think in the moment.

Details make your stories real and believable. If you are telling a story on your episode … and you should on every episode … put the details on the outline.

Day, time, setting, all 5 senses and names are all important details for any story. They should be on your outline.

When you script your episode as a beginner, it becomes difficult to sound natural. Without the experience, you sound like you’re reading it.

INTERMEDIATE

If you are a podcaster who has been doing the show for awhile, or you’ve been a public speaker who can be extemporaneous, you can work from an outline.

As with any public speaker, this takes time to develop as well.

When you’re working from a basic outline, the content should be information you know really, really well. I can speak without notes on the power of storytelling on a podcast, because I’ve been teaching it for decades.

If you are in that place with your content, you can probably work from a basic outline. You know the content. The outline is simply to keep you on track.

ADVANCED

If you’ve been doing your show for a long time, you can work from a script and be able to sound natural.

I typically write a blog post that I will use as my show notes. It is typically much shorter than it would be if my episode was transcribed.

As I record the episode, I use that blog post as my notes as I record. While recording, I make sure I don’t fall into reading the script. I use the post as a framework for my presentation.

When I first started using this method, I would highlight the key points as if it were an outline. I look at the blog post, find my next thought and then stop looking at it and just talk. This prevents me from reading text.

As I mentioned, the script needs to have the natural element of speech. Include the ums and uhs. Keep the half thoughts are restarts. That is what makes your show sound natural.

If you edit out every um and restart, you sanitize your show. Your episode is too clean and doesn’t sound natural. This is like a house in a movie that doesn’t look like anyone has ever lived in it.

It takes practice and takes time.

YOUR PODCAST SCRIPT

When it comes to your show, try various methods to see what works best for you. You might find that an outline that has much more detail works best for you. You might find that you can work from a script.

As you try the various methods, you will find that you try to move to the next and it feels uncomfortable. It is ok to revert back to the previous method.

Whichever method you use, it will take practice to perfect.

EFFICIENCY

Now, let’s talk about your time. There are benefits and drawback to each when it comes to show prep and show notes.

Creating an outline takes much less time than creating a script or blog post. On the other hand, a blog post is much more rich when it comes to search engines.

Your show notes do not need to be long text. Consider why your listeners would ever come to your show notes.

Listeners may visit your show notes for a website you mentioned or a link. They might want specific resources you talked about on the show.

Does any of that require a long blog post? Of course not. It requires an outline with some detail.

The blog post helps people find you when they are searching the internet. If that is important to you, create a blog post. Just keep in mind that most people discover a new podcast through word-of-mouth.

The outline method will help keep your prep time short and be more natural. The more detail will keep you focused and help you be a little less “wordy”.

As long as your presentation is engaging with personality, I don’t think people will think you are too wordy. Entertain and you’ll be fine.

Being aware of getting too wordy will naturally help you tighten it up.

Give the detailed outline a try and work from there.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

7 Steps To Podcast Monetization – PTC 356

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You know I am a big fan of “don’t make it harder than it needs to be”. This is true when it comes to podcast monetization. The shortest distance between two points is a straight line. Stop adding in all of the unnecessary steps and tools.

PODCAST RELATIONSHIPS

Imagine being able to have a conversation with your ideal customers on a weekly basis.

On top of that, those ideal clients request that conversation every week. How great would that be?

A podcast makes that conversation possible.

A podcast provides you a huge opportunity to demonstrate your authority to your prospects and invite them to become clients.

If you structure the show properly, your podcast can be an amazing marketing tool to drive your business and grow your revenue. You build trust every week.

When I have conversations with podcasters, they often tell me they want to make money with their show. I then listen to an episode.

There are usually one of two big issues when it comes to monetization. First, the podcaster has nothing to sell. Second, if they have something to sell, they don’t ask for the sale.

If you want to monetize your podcast, you need to make the offer often. Build your audience, so you can make offers to many people at the same time.

SPONSORSHIPS

Many people want a big audience so they can get sponsors.

This is the worst move you can make for three big reasons.

First, people are fleeing traditional media to escape the ads. Why would you want to clutter up your show?

Second, it takes a huge audience to attract a sponsor. The number is usually over 5,000 downloads per episode. Only about 7% of all podcast hit that number.

Finally, it takes a ton of work to land a sponsor and you only get paid once. You would cry if you calculated the dollar per hour rate you’re getting paid for that sponsorship.

Instead, market your own stuff on your show. Get paid every time something sells for podcast monetization. If not, at least create an affiliate relationship so you get paid on sales and not one, flat sponsorship fee.

7 STEPS TO MONETIZATION

There are seven monetization steps to use your podcast to grow your business:

  1. Launch your podcast talking about content that you love
  2. Have something to offer and sell that is a solution to the problem of your audience
  3. Build an audience to which you can make that offer
  4. Demonstrate your solution on your podcast
  5. Give them a free resource to get them started that allows you to capture their email address
  6. Nurture the relationship through your podcast and email
  7. Make the offer

MONETIZATION CONTENT

When it comes to step number 4 Demonstrate Your Solution on Your Podcast, there are seven ways you can show your prospects how you are perfect for them.

1. Demonstrate Your Authority

Simply share your solution on your podcast. Explain how you became an expert in your space. Follow the information with a strong, single call-to-action. This is a great way to get your listener to begin their journey in your funnel and become a client.

2. Demonstrate Your Coaching

Share a bit of a coaching session as an episode. This will show your listeners the transformation you offer your clients. Demonstrate how your coaching can help her as well. Then, tell her how to sign up to get a discovery/strategy call with you or get your coaching.

3. Demonstrate Your Products

Your podcast can be like a weekly webinar. However, your ideal clients actually subscribe to it. They come to hear you speak every week. Give them a sample of your courses, books, templates, etc.. Create excitement and intrigue. Then, tell them where to buy it.

4. Network With Others

Swap interviews with other podcasters to grow your audience. Help each other get exposed to a new listners. This is like a joint venture for your content. Podcast listeners listen to podcasts. Therefore, go get on more podcasts. Bring people to your show and start the process.

5. Listener Coaching Examples

This is similar to demonstrating your coaching, but shorter. Create an interactive show using listener audio or questions. Demonstrate your coaching without using actual sessions. Just answer questions and solve problems. Then, tell listeners how to sign up to get a discovery/strategy call with you or get your coaching.

6. Attract Media Interviews

Get media to view you as an available expert in your field. Offer your services for their stories and reports. This will allow you to get in front of new, potential listeners and grow your audience. Your podcast demonstrates your interviewing ability. Reporters will trust that you can hold your own during an interview. Ask the reporter to share your podcast information to the new audience.

7. Listeners Share Your Content

Word-of-mouth is the number one way people discover new podcasts. If you want your audience to grow, make your content easy to share. This is free marketing when your listeners share your great content and expose you to new, prospective listeners (and clients).

CONSISTENCY

Your business won’t grow until you take action. Pick one of these ideas and get started today. Then, stick with it. Consistency helps your podcast and business grow.

If you would like help launching and developing your very own podcast strategy, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply for your FREE, no strings attached strategy call with me.

This isn’t a sales call in disguise. You and I talk about your goals and develop a strategy to achieve those goals. If I have something I think might help you, we can talk about it. However, we need to get to know each other first.

Let’s chat. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and schedule your call.

Podcast

The Power of Being Vulnerable – PTC 355

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

It is scary to put yourself out there and be vulnerable. But, it is also powerful. When you are working to build engagement with your audience, you need to be a bit vulnerable. That’s what makes you lovable.

BOOTCAMP

Before we jump into it, I want to give you a little update on the project I’m working on.

Last week I mentioned that I am putting together a workshop where I will take your hand and walk you through every step of the way to your goals.

You’ve given me a ton of great feedback, and I really appreciate it. So much feedback that I’m still going through all of it to determine exactly what you need and what the workshop will do for you.

It will take me another week or two to get it all put together. I can’t thank you enough for all of the responses to the survey.

This workshop will be something where we actually get work done. I don’t want to create just another empty webinar like you find everywhere else. I want to create a full day event that will help you get the work done. That’s why it’s a workshop. We will actually do the work together.

Once all of the feedback is reviewed, I’ll put it all together for you. Thanks for being patient. It is coming.

Now, let’s talk about building engagement, being vulnerable and attracting your ideal clients so you can make more money with your podcast.

THE PROFIT

You’ve heard the saying. People do business with those they know, like and trust.

I was watching an episode of Streets of Dreams with Marcus Lemonis the other night. You might know him from the CNBC television show The Profit.

On the episode, Marcus was researching the diamond district in New York City. It is a one-block stretch of 47th Streen in Manhattan between Fifth and Sixth Avenues. This block is one of the primary centers of the global diamond industry.

As Marcus was talking pricing with the jewelers, he asked about appraisal. How do you know the diamond is actually worth the asking price?

The jeweler said, “You just have to trust me.”

Now, this bracelet Marcus was buying had an asking price of $30k or $35k. This guy just wanted Marcus to trust him.

Even as they looked through that little magnifying glass at the perfection of the diamond, the jeweler told Marcus that most people have no idea what they are looking at. They have no idea how to price a diamond. You need a trained eye.

The same is true when you get your car serviced. You just need to trust the mechanic when he tells you that your car needs new brakes or the seal on your header is cracked. I have no idea what good and bad brakes look like.

THE TRUST

The sale is all about the trust. Your potential client needs to trust that you are telling the truth. However, they also need to trust that your solution will work for them, that they can actually do it and that it delivers the results you promise.

Many people want to learn the art of the close. Closing the deal is only about 10% of the sales process. Building rapport is the majority of the journey.

Trust is the primary reason you need to build rapport with your potential clients. They need to believe what you are telling them.

If you are simply talking about the features of your stuff and how much it costs, you’ve already lost your prospect.

Build a relationship with your future client before you ever discuss your solution.

To build that friendship, you need to be open and honest. You need to be vulnerable.

Trust your guest with some of your stories and flaws. Put yourself out there.

When you do, the Law of Reciprocity will kick in. The Law of Reciprocity basically states that when people receive something from someone else, the receiver feels compelled to return the favor.

If you are vulnerable and trust your prospect by using your stories and flaws, they will feel compelled to trust you in return. It isn’t that quick. The trust grows over time.

MANIPULATION

Some people think using the Law of Reciprocity is just simply manipulating their prospective clients. It is the opposite.

Think of your past relationships. Did you instantly tell the other person all of your secrets the first time you met them? Of course not.

As they told you a few things, you told them a few things. Over time, you learned just how much you could trust that other person.

There is a “right” time to be vulnerable and reveal things in a relationship. That time comes when the trust level is high enough. The give and take builds each time you share something and they share in return. Being vulnerable builds trust.

Now, are you manipulating the other person? Of course not. You are simply building a relationship.

Putting yourself out there is a great way to grow your relationships and attract more of your perfect clients.

GLIMMER LEARNING

Today, I’ve invited a special guest on the show to talk about your presentation and putting yourself out there. How can you be authentic and engaging with your audience and prospective clients?

Lisa Hannigan is the Founder of Glimmer Learning LLC, a company specializing in virtual engagement training and coaching for speakers. She helps them increase the impact of their message and maximize results.

Lisa is a certified Master Trainer and Virtual Facilitator. She offers her almost two decades of experience, along with tools and techniques to her clients and teaches them how to deliver high-impact, engaging presentations that inspire and connect every time they speak.

You can find all of Lisa’s info at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/glimmer.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Why You Podcast – PTC 354

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Understanding why you create your podcast is critical to your success. Without a powerful why, it becomes very difficult to do the work necessary to reach your goals.

There are two big reasons you need a powerful why. Today, I want to help you find that.

Before we begin, I would love to know what you are struggling with. Can you take 3 minutes and tell me about your podcast journey? You will find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/feedback.

I am working to make sure this podcast gives you the content you need to reach your goals. There are challenges you are facing and hurdles you are trying to overcome. This podcast is designed to help you with that. But, I need to know where those struggles are.

A workshop is also in the works where I will take your hand and walk you through every step of the way to your goals. I just need to know about your dreams.

If you could answer 9 quick questions to ensure you are getting the content you need, head to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/feedback. It will help shape the content you get each and every week. It would also mean the world to me.

EXTERNAL

There are two big reasons you need a powerful why. One is external and one is internal.

Simon Sinek wrote an incredible book called “Start With Why: How great leaders inspire everyone to take action.” It is one of my favorite business books, and I highly recommend it.

In the book, Sinek says, “People don’t buy what you do; they buy why you do it. And what you do simply proves what you believe.”

Everybody wants to get behind a great cause or person or champion or underdog. It is all about the why.

This podcast exists, because I love coaching. Coaching of all sorts.

My first coaching opportunity came when I was in high school. I coached youth bowlers.

My dad started me bowling when I was littler than I can remember. Probably 5- or 6-years-old.

I was so young when I started that the bowling center didn’t have shoes that fit me. I bowled in my socks.

When I was 12, I started bowling competitively in leagues and tournaments. In my freshman year of high school, my dad and I won a national tournament.

That is when I became a youth coach. Coaches in my league trained me to help young bowlers get into the sport. It was great. I loved seeing the excitement on their faces when they would succeed. That set me on the path to coaching.

It also set me on the path to being on the bowling team in college. But that is a different story.

Since those bowling days, I’ve coached our fraternity floor hockey team. I began coaching radio talent in 1995 with my first radio program director job.

The local hockey organization asked me to be a high school hockey coach when my son hadn’t turned one yet. He is now playing for a 20-and-under team in Minnesota.

MY PODCAST WHY

In 2009, I began listening to podcasts. The creativity and diversity with the format was captivating. I loved it.

The more I listened, the more I realized that these hosts could benefit so much by learning a few of the things we used everyday in radio. How to attract an audience, how to create marketing campaigns, and ways to create fans were just a few of the ideas.

That’s when I took my decades of radio experience, the passion I have for coaching and all I learned earning my masters of business administration and wrapped it into one.

I love coaching. Seeing podcasters succeed drives me everyday. When a podcaster discovers something that takes their podcast to a whole new level, I get incredibly energized. It’s magic.

That is my external why. People see that passion and they come to work with me.

What is your external why? Do your listeners see that on your show? Can they feel that in the products or services you offer?

Your audience will come for your why. What you do simply supports that why.

INTERNAL

My son playing in Minnesota brings me to my internal why. It is the second piece to your why puzzle.

My son is a senior in high school. This past weekend, we took him to Minnesota and dropped him off with his billet family.

Kids that play junior hockey tend to live with families that help and support the team. He and another player live with a wonderful family so they can both play hockey.

We chat with them quite often. It’s not the same as being there full time, but it is close. My wife and I will drive up to see the home opener in a few weeks.

And that’s why I do this. I can load up the laptop and drive to Minnesota anytime I’d like to see him play. The location freedom is important to me.

Being able to see my son in Minnesota or my daugther who is attending college out East whenever we would like is the reason why I created this business.

They say enjoy the time your kids are at home, because the time flies by. I always knew that was true. I didn’t realize how true until I pulled away from the college campus dropping off my daughter last fall. Leaving my son at his billet’s house brought it all back again.

That is why I love what I do. It allows me to live the life that I love. I get to coach people and lead them to their success. At the same time, I can do it anywhere, anytime while spending that time with the ones that mean the world to me.

In his book, Simon Sinek says, “Working hard for something we don’t care about is called stress: Working hard for something we love is called passion.”

Where is your passion? Why do you do what you do?

YOUR WHY

Many people say they want to own their own business, because they want to call the shots or vacation whenever they want.

Is that really your why? Is it the control over the work or is it something deeper?

Why do you want the freedom? Could there be something more important that you will achieve by experiencing success with this journey?

Calling the shots isn’t a why strong enough to make you put in the crazy hours it takes to make a business a success. Vacation whenever you’d like won’t inspire you to do the work necessary to grow when you only have 28 downloads. Or 36. Or 52.

There are never enough downloads. When you hit 100, you’ll want 1,000. After 1,000, you will set your sights on 5,000. There isn’t a finish line.

Inspiration comes from something deeper. It is your son playing hockey 6 hours away from home. A true why comes from your daughter alone trying to find her way at college 1,200 miles away and you can’t hug her. Inspiration comes from your mom in a hospital bed 3 states away and you want the freedom to be there anytime you want.

What’s your why? What’s your real why?

Find that and you’re ready to start your journey toward success.

STRUGGLES

If you could answer 9 quick questions to ensure you are getting the content you need, head to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/feedback. It will help shape the content you get each and every week. It would also mean the world to me.

Also, come back next week. We’ll talk about the workshop to help you reach your goals. I’m putting the finishing touches on it this week. It’s exciting. I can’t wait to tell you all about it.

In the meantime, if you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Leveraging Video – PTC 353

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Now that you have your podcast up and running, it’s time to leverage video.

I’m sure you’ve heard YouTube is the second biggest search engine. But, there are so many other places you can use your video.

If you want help editing your video and repurposing it as a podcast, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing. You can see my services that will do all of this for you, including posting all of it. 

This can give you time to find more clients and do what you love. There are 3 different package options. Find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

YOUTUBE

Record your podcast on video. Then, strip the audio for the podcast.

Post that video on YouTube to increase your online presence. You can do this with little extra work. You’re still recording the show just once. Then you are repurposing the content.

Remember to add an introduction to the episode. Video benefits from the description and visual. Most people find those videos by search as well.

Once they land on your video, they know what it’s about.

Your podcast is different. They click play. You need to set up the content inside the episode and welcome your listeners right from the start.

The intro of your show should be like your elevator pitch. Tell people exactly what the show is all about. Make them feel welcome.

FACEBOOK

Another great place to repurpose your content is Facebook and social media.

You don’t need to share the entire episode. Share a highlight video and direct people back to your show.

This will help you grow your audience. Social media loves video. Be seen.

MEMBERSHIP SITE

You could take your videos and put them inside a membership site arranged by topic. This could be a great way to monetize your show.

Now, you’re probably saying, “Erik, why would people pay for my videos if they can get them all for free?”

They pay for convenience. When you curate the episode and make them easy to find, people pay to save time. Your membership can help them do that.

You will need to add other benefits to the membership to make it exciting. But the convenience of your organized content is valuable.

POWER OF VIDEO

Video allows people to see you and connect with your personality. A picture is worth a thousand words.

So, do you still need a podcast?

Absolutely.

Podcasts are portable. Your audience can consume your podcast in places where it isn’t convenient to watch a video. Places like driving or running or taking a shower. Give them options.

There are also a lot fewer podcasts than YouTube channels. According to YouTube, there are around 37 million YouTube channels. There are only about 2 million podcasts.

Would you rather be one in 37 million or one in 2 million? Be both.

Podcasting is also growing at an amazing rate. There were only 1 million podcasts about a year ago.

Better yet, listening has increased 58% in the past 3 years. The audience is huge.

Using both video and audio allows you to reach your listeners where they are in the format option they desire.

VIDEO PROBLEMS

Now, many people get nervous being on video. That is why I invited Rich Oceguera on the show today.

Rich Oceguera is a best selling author, award-winning entrepreneur and host of the UNMUTE Yourself Show.

Rich has BA in Television Production and has trained extensively in mindset, mindfulness and ontological practices, which he combines with modern neuroscience tools to give his clients a unique edge in their space.

Learn more at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mindset.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

The Power Of Public Relations – PTC 352

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are a variety of ways to bring listeners to your podcast and clients to your business. However, many people confuse marketing, advertising, promotion and public relations.

There is a difference between the four. Yes, you need to use all four. However, understanding the difference is critical.

MARKETING

When I got my masters in business administration at the University of Nebraska, we took a marketing class. As I was going into it, I thought marketing was advertising. I thought they were one and the same.

The first night of class, our professor asked, “What is marketing?”

We started answering with advertising. Then that expanded to promoting.

As she kept asking clarifying questions, we kept expanding the definition.

What about your logo? How about interviews?

By the end of the discussion, we had the definition. Marketing is the action or business of promoting and selling products or services, including market research and advertising.

Therefore, marketing is the overall process. It encompasses everything it takes to bring your product or service to market. Once you have your “thing”, how do you get people to buy it?

Your marketing includes everything from branding to advertising. It also includes design, packaging, research, advertising and public relations.

That means anything you do to promote and sell your products and services is included in marketing.

ADVERTISING

Now if that is the definition of marketing, then advertising is a subset of marketing. Advertising is the activity or profession of producing advertisements for commercial products or services.

These are typically the ads you buy. Advertising involves an exchange of money or something of value for the exposure of your product or service.

You benefit with the exposure. The other party benefits by receiving financial gain.

PROMOTION

Promotion is typically free exposure. This part of marketing usually involves leg work. You hustle and get exposure.

The definition of promotion is the publicization of a product, organization, or venture so as to increase sales or public awareness. You get in front of people and publicize your stuff.

That means promotion is usually the exploitation of opportunity. It could involve holding up a sign in front of a TV camera at a rally. And promotion could also be handing out flyers at a conference.

This form of marketing also includes your activity on social media. You are doing the work and getting noticed.

PUBLIC RELATIONS

The other way to get exposure is through public relations. How does this differe from the first three?

No money is exchaged. Both parties typically benefit by the arrangement.

Public relations is a strategic communication process that builds mutually beneficial relationships between organizations and their publics.

When you give an interview to another podcast or media outlet, you benefit by the exposure. The other party also benefits with the content. It is a mutually beneficial relationship.

Many people think public relations, or PR, is simply sending out news releases to media organizations. It is so much more than that. It is all about relationships with other influencers.

ABIGAIL SINCLAIRE

Abigail Sinclaire is the founder and CEO of Human Network Connection. She is hired by Entrepreneurs and Virtual Media Hosts to skyrocket their impact and income. Abigail helps these pro through interviews and collaborations that reach a wider audience and generate multiple streams of income.

Abigail joins us on the show today to show us how to leverage public relations to grow our podcast audience and build our business.

You can sign up for the Celestial Starprenuer PR Audit Call with Abigail. Combine your Public Relations with Collaborative Partnerships that will elevate your presence, generate more income, and expand your business. You can grab your call at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/PR.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

How To Serve And Grow – PTC 351

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Like Zig Ziglar would always say, “You can get anything you want in life as long as you help enough other people get what they want.” When you serve first, things will come back to you.

Your podcast allows you a tremendous opportunity to serve others. You can serve people with your content. Guest can come on your show and be served by you as you get them exposure. Events and organizations can be served by your promotion.

On the show today, I want to give you a variety of ways you can benefit when you serve. We’ll also talk to Dan Miller, author of “48 Days To The Work And Life You Love”. He has a great resource for you called “How To Talk, Serve And Put Money In The Bank“.

SERVE

There are three people who really taught me how to serve through my business.

The first influence in my business was Zig Ziglar. The more I listened to Zig encourage us to serve, the more I tried it. As I was getting better at serving, my business continued to grow. It is amazing what serving can do for your spirit.

The second influence was Dave Ramsey from Ramsey Solutions, The Ramsey Show and Financial Peace University. Dave always encourages his listeners to find someone to help you with your money who has the heart of a teacher.

That really hit home for me. Teachers have a special heart and desire to serve. They have such an impact on people by how they serve.

As I went into my business, I wanted to come from that same place and serve well.

COLLABORATE

When it came to creating partnerships in my business, I wanted my approach to be the same. I want my business to have the heart of a teacher and serve.

I really learned how to have a partnership discussion based on service at Collaborate.

This is an amazing event where you can connect and collaborate with hundreds of coaches, authors, podcasters, speakers, program leaders and many others. There are a variety of experts who can become your partners to help you grow your business, impact and income.

There is another Collaborate coming up soon. You can get all the details through my affiliate link at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Collaborate is an event put on by the team at JVIC – Joint Venture Insiders Circle. Rich German and Iman Aghay have that heart of a teacher. They want to serve. More importantly and impactful, they teach their audience how to serve.

SERVE BY NETWORKING

During the Collaborate event, participants are put into networking circles of six or eight people. Each person has about 2 minutes to tell who they, who they serve and what sort of help they seek from their promotional partners.

Now, most events would stop there. Throw people in a room and let them get at it. 

Instead, Iman teaches every person exactly how to use their two minutes. He gives you a template to tell people exactly how you serve so they will want to partner with you.

But, it doesn’t stop there. He also teaches participants how to have the follow up conversation after the event and serve even more.

We so often go to events and meet a ton of people. After the event ends, we neglect to follow up and take action on the connections. No collaboration happens.

Iman teaches participants to use their 2 minutes in the breakout rooms to simply get people to want to have a follow up call with you.

On the follow up call, Iman says use the first 20 minutes of the call to see what the other person is all about and where they need support. Spend the next 20 minutes talking about you and where you need support.

Finally, spend the last 20 minutes to find ways you can serve each other. This is such a powerful way to create amazing partnerships.

You can get the full details on the next Collaborate event at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate. I would love to see you there.

DAN MILLER

When you serve, you offer so much value to everyone you touch. Powerful relationships are formed when you serve.

Today, we talk with Dan Miller. He is President of 48 Days LLC, specializes in creative thinking for increased personal and business success. He believes that meaningful work blends our natural skills and abilities, our unique personality traits and our dreams and passions.

Dan is active in helping individuals redirect careers, evaluate new income sources, and achieve balanced living. He believes that a clear sense of direction can help us become all that God designed us to be. Dan is the author of the New York Times best-selling “48 Days To The Work (And Life) You Love”.

In this episode, Dan and I discuss the power that comes when you serve.

You can find Dan’s resource “How To Talk, Serve And Put Money In The Bank” at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/serve.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Building Your Email List With Christine Bennet-Clark – PTC 350

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

It is never too early to start building your email list. As soon as you start your podcast, you should start building your list.

DON’T WAIT

Many podcasters wait until they have an audience before they start the email list. There is no good reason to wait.

Just like your podcast, your emails won’t be perfect from the start. It is better to practice and refine with a smaller audience than blowing a first impression with a large list.

Starting early also gives you more time to nurture your list before you have something to offer. Take the time to build the relationship.

The list will also not explode to thousands over night. Just like your downloads, your email list will grow slowly and methodically with focused attention over time.

WHY A LIST?

There are a few reasons you want to build an email list.

Your email list allows you an opportunity to communicate directly with your audience. With an e-mail list, you can show up in your listener’s email inbox with a few strokes of a keyboard.

Will your audience read every email? No. But, they will see every email. They will read the emails that are pertinent to them. Just seeing the email from you will keep you top-of-mind with your listeners.

Being top-of-mind is important when it comes time to take action. You want them to remember you. Communicate often and consistently.

OWNERSHIP

Another benefit of email is you own the list, unlike social media. If the owners of the social platforms decide you did something they didn’t like, your list could disappear.

With an email list, you can move your contacts to any email platform you wish. Once your subscribers give you permission, you own the list.

RELATIONSHIPS

By offering lead magnets, or free pieces of valuable content in exchange for their email address, you are building your relationship with your audience.

It is never too early to start building relationships. Lay the foundation before you being using your podcast to grow your business.

HOW TO BUILD IT

There are a variety of ways to build your list. Today, we talk with Christine Bennet-Clark about some of the best methods.

Christine Bennet-Clark has been a digital marketing educator and consultant for over ten years. She is the founder and owner of Digital Business Success, a best-selling author, an international speaker and the creator of Quiz Funnel Blueprint.

With a background in education and curriculum design, she is well positioned to help entrepreneurs create marketing funnels that convert.

I invited Christine on the show today, because she focuses on list building as a core business strategy. She trains and supports entrepreneurs to create lead generation quizzes to use in gift Giveaways and other marketing media.

Her VIP Week Group, Solo Intensives and 1-Day Boot Camps are well known as the place to go for in depth training that gets stuff done.

On this episode, Christine will help us discover which list-building tactic may work best for us. Enjoy the conversation.

You can get Christine’s list of 8 Top Email List Building Strategies at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/list.

Grab the checklist and begin building your email list today. It is never too early to start building relationships with email.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Use Events To Grow Your Audience – PTC 349

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Events are a great way to grow your audience. However, you need a strategy.

Many of us go to great events and collect a lot of great information and meet a lot of great people. We then return home to our to do lists and do nothing.

The notes and names go in a drawer in the desk and we take no action. We have good intentions. We just have other priorities.

In order to get the most out of your events, have a plan.

To help, grab my Building Relationships At Events worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/events. This will give you the full strategy to use events to grow your audience.

STRATEGY

When developing your strategy, you need to consider your actions before, during and after the event. Your actions need to be focused and deliberate.

Before the event, you need to plan your attack. Lay out your goals and tools.

During the gathering, you have limited time. Use every minute you have in ways that help you grow.

After the event, tie up the loose ends. This is where the real work takes place.

Let’s look at each of these phases.

BEFORE EVENTS

Before events, it is all about planning. You need to have a goal and purpose.

Do your research. Research the attendees that fit your goal before the event. Find the individuals you’re hoping to meet (and impress).

Dress to impress. As the saying goes, you only have one chance to make a first impression. Don’t blow it.

DURING EVENTS

When you arrive, use your time wisely. Make the most of every opportunity.

Have questions ready for every session you attend for the open Q&A at the end.

Don’t spread yourself too thin. Don’t work the room. Focus on quality vs. quantity. Join in the conversation.

When you meet people, consider their network. Can you help each other make connections? Be a connector. How can you help them?

Listen first, then speak. Ask a lot of questions.

  • “Who are you?”
  • “What do you podcast about?”
  • “How did you get into that?”
  • “If someone wanted to get into that niche, where would they begin?”
  • “I’ve enjoyed our conversation. How can we stay in touch?”

Swap business cards to stay in touch. Be sure you don’t use your business cards as spam by giving a card to every person you meet. Give them with a purpose.

Take notes about each meeting. Write on their business card.

AFTER EVENTS

The real results come from your actions after events. This is where the real work takes place.

Follow up is critical. Reach out to each person you’ve met while you are on the trip home. Don’t let this valuable time slip away. Make an impression.

Have a purpose to reach out. Focus on helping them. This is not a time to sell.

Use this sample script: “I enjoyed our conversation at ____. Your story about _____ was fascinating/intriguing/hilarious. Would you be willing to discuss ____/be on my podcast to promote your _____/tell me more about ______.”

LIVE VS. VIRTUAL

Many live events are coming back. Pick and choose the right gatherings and conferences that will help you meet the right people.

Find people who are already talking to the audience you want to attract.

While live events return, continue to work the online events. Many online events will continue to operate, because they are convenient and come with lower costs. Again, find the events that will make the biggest impact in your growth.

WORKSHEET

To help you grow and develop your strategy, grab my Building Relationships At Events worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/events. This worksheet lays out the entire strategy you can use events to grow your audience.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Your Step-By-Step Audience Growth Strategy – PTC 348

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Whether you are brand new, or you’ve been publishing for years, we are all looking for audience growth. Unfortunately, few of us have a strategy. We are just trying random things and gaining no traction.

CLEANING

I was cleaning the basement the other day. After hours of work, it looked like I had done nothing.

We collect everything down there. The basement is where everything goes when we don’t have a place to put it.

We have a pool table down there that doubles as a ping pong table. The table came from some friends that just wanted it out of their basement. I quickly learned why.

The table has now become the place where my son does his school work … and sorts his baseball cards … and leaves his spare hockey gear.

My office space is down there. We have book shelves and storage shelves and a couch where we go when tornado warnings fire up.

One day, I decided to clean the basement. I started putting a stack of books on the book shelves. That’s when I realized some of my hockey coaching material was on one of the shelves. That belonged in binders in my office space.

While I was putting the hockey stuff away, I noticed I had some podcast notes in a stack on my desk. I started getting that squared away. On my desk was a shoebox I was using when I was recording a video.

I took the shoebox over to the baseball cards where it belonged. Next thing I know, I am arranging the baseball cards on the pool table. My son had a few jerseys on the table that got taken to the laundry room.

This went on for hours. When I finally stepped back to admire my work, it didn’t even look like I had been there. There was no change.

Why? I had no plan. My work wasn’t focused. I needed to work on one area until it was done.

INTENTIONAL AUDIENCE GROWTH

Be intentional to grow your audience and get people to listen.

Create a plan and stick to it. What activities will bring in new listeners if you do those activities on a consistent, regular basis?

About a year ago, I joined JV Insider Circle and my podcast took off.

JVIC connects you with people who run podcasts, radio shows, tele-summits and live events. Members of this community have large lists in your target market.

You can find details on JVIC at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/JVIC.

By attending the bi-weekly calls and various virtual events they hold, I met a variety of influencers who were talking to my potential audience. I started participating on their summits and in their giveaways. They had me on their podcasts and you’ve heard a few of them here.

Next thing I know, my audience was growing by leaps and bounds. I simply focused on this strategy and took regular action.

Instead of trying everything, find two or three things that you enjoy doing, will get you in front of new listeners and you can and will do on a regular basis.

Then, focus on those actions for a month. See where it takes you.

CONTENT

Before you invite people to your party, make sure you’ve cleaned the house.

The first thing you need to do is make sure your content is solid and entertaining. Ask yourself if you would listen to your show if it wasn’t your show.

Oscar spent the first year of his podcast interviewing other people. His show wasn’t growing or driving his business. He came to me for some help.

We restructured his show to highlight his expertise. The show still included other experts. However, we created space specifically for Oscar to talk about what he did and the service he provide.

After we got the show working, we started inviting people to the party. That’s when his audience began to grow.

Tighten up your content before you bring more listeners to the show. You only get one shot at a great first impression.

NEW AUDIENCE

Once your content it tight, go get in front of new people. You can’t grow your audience until you find people who are not yet aware of you and your show.

As we discussed, JVs are a great way to find new listeners. You can also be present in social groups. You can appear on podcast interviews. People can discover you on summits.

There are many ways you can get in front of people. Find the activities you love and will commit to doing consistently.

Again, you can check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jvic to learn about finding joint venture partners.

INVITATION

Once you get in front of a new pool of potential listeners, invite them to listen.

So many people get interviewed or get on a stage in front of an audience and forget to tell people to listen.

If your goal is audience growth, ask people to listen to your show. Tell them where to find you and why they will love the show.

REASONS

Telling people to listen isn’t enough. You need to give them a specific reason to listen. Why will they love it?

When you ask people to listen, give them a specific episode that they will love. If you have interviewed someone special or taugh something really cool, send them to that episode.

Asking people to check out a generic show will give you a few listeners, but not great growth. Telling them why they will love your episode that was downloaded more than any other episode will bring people in.

Remember, they are asking, “What’s in it for me?” Give them a reason.

REMIND THEM

Getting them to listen isn’t enough for audience growth. You need to bring them back episode after episode.

Remind your listeners to come back using your e-mail list and social media.

Stay top of mind so the new listeners add to your current listeners. If your current listeners are leaving, you do not achieve audience growth. You maintain. New listeners are just replacing old listeners.

Give your current listeners a reason to come back next week by teasing effectively. Create some fear of missing out.

YOUR AUDIENCE GROWTH PLAN

This week, get to working on your audience growth plan. Start small with a plan that you can stick with. Do the work consistently and watch your audience grow.

Next week, we will talk about ways to use events to create audience growth. Events are coming back. Let’s be strategic to use these events in the best way. You’ll get a bunch of ideas for your plan next week.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Grow Your Coaching Business With Bill Pratt – PTC 347

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you share your info and expertise on your podcast, coaching is a great way to turn your podcast into a coaching business.

To be a successful coach, you need to be able to get your clients from point A to point B. People pay coaches who can create a transformation in their lives.

The most effective way to do this is to find people who are following your journey but are a few years or steps behind you. Help them take your journey by avoiding the pitfalls and mistakes you made.

DEMONSTRATE

Your podcast provides you a great opportunity to demonstrate your coaching. It allows you to show listeners the transformation they can experience.

On your episodes, you can interview those you’ve helped. You can help potential clients. The episodes can simply be sharing your plan and process and offering to help people through your coaching business.

STRATEGY CALL

Invite your listeners to have a strategy or discovery call with you.

On these calls, define their goals. Where do they want to be in one or three or five years?

Next, determine where they are now. What have they tried that has worked? What hasn’t worked?

Now, what needs to happen to get from today to their goals? Develop that plan with them.

Use a phrase like, “It sounds like if we do this, we can accomplish that.” The two of you develop the plan together. They are part of the process to get to the solution.

Once that plan is developed, ask if they would like some help implementing it. If they do, you can then discuss the options within your coaching business. That’s it.

PAYMENT

For payment, they can simply send you money via PayPal or Venmo or some other service. You don’t need a complicated backend system. My first client in my coaching business sent me a money order.

COACHING BUSINESS GROWTH WITH PARTNERS

Once your strategy calls are working, find partners who can get you in front of more potential clients. That is what our interview today is all about.

Bill Pratt is the host of the 3-day live, online event CoachingBizCon. He is also a college professor, business and money coach, textbook author, and professional speaker.

Bill has been interviewed on countless media and was featured on a twice-monthly TV program called Money Matters. He works with industry influencers including Jay Shetty and Rob Goyette.

He believes that with the right information, people will accumulate wealth faster and will be able to use that wealth to improve the lives of those around them.

Bill’s event Coaching Biz Con can help you find JV partners to grow your coaching business. You can check out Coaching Biz Con at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bizcon.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Turn Your Podcast Into A Book – PTC 346

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you are like me, you have been working diligently on your podcast, writing your show notes and sharing your content. You now have a stack of episodes sitting there getting the occasional download. Have you ever thought that you could turn your podcast into a book?

Repurposing your content across various platforms allows you to be seen everywhere without multiplying the amount of work you are doing.

Creating the content is the part that takes the time. Creation takes the mental power. The editing and rewrites eat your time.

Sharing the content can be turned into a system and checklist. You can make it an efficient process and multiply your impact.

As you repurpose your content, make sure you have a strategy. Decide where your content will send your listeners. Develop a strong call-to-action as you begin to be seen everywhere.

Let’s talk about 6 different ways you can take an episode and repurpose it across multiple platforms.

VIDEO

Start with video. This is the format that takes the most time and makes it possible to use this across many platforms.

This doesn’t need to be highly produced. You can simply shoot video of your recording your show. Add some graphics if you’d like to spice it up a bit.

YouTube is the obvious place for your video. You can also use that video on your website, social media and newsletter. Share it.

AUDIO

You can strip the audio from the video for your podcast. No need to rerecord it.

If you don’t start with video, you can simply start at this point and record your show. Either works.

When you record on Zoom, the platform will record both video and audio. This makes it easy to use it on both platforms.

Many audio editing software programs will allow you to import the video and it will strip the audio for you. It makes it easy to repurpose your video without recording it a second time.

BLOG

Now that you have your show recorded, you can turn the notes into a blog post.

Your show notes can be posted on your website as a blog post. Build it out so your notes are more than an outline. Add some meat to the bone.

The other option is to have your show transcribed. There are various services that will do this using automation. This choice takes a little proofreading and editing on your part.

You could also hire a virtual assistant who can transcribe the show for you. Either way, this gives you a lot of written content you can share elsewhere.

SOCIAL

Now that you have video, audio and text, you can share bits of it on social media.

You can use clips of your video and audio on social. Your blog post and show notes can be turned into graphics and posts.

EMAIL

Your show notes can be used for your daily emails.

Sending an email everyday doesn’t guarantee your list will read every email. What it does mean is that your list will see your name every day. They may only read the subject lines that connect with them. But, they will see your email in their inbox each day.

Frequency to the target keeps you top of mind.

I was concerned that a daily email would cause people on my list to unsubscribe. Very few unsubscribed. Those that stayed were more engaged.

PARTNERS

As you create this great content, find partners who can use your stuff.

Find other content creators who could use a bit of your content on their platform. Maybe an online magazine could use a bit of your content as an article in their content. A podcaster could use a segment of your show as part of their show. Find content creators who talk to your niche and create a partnership.

PLAN

As you create this content across various platforms, be sure to have a strong call-to-action. What do you want your audience to do?

Your content could send your audience to your website, your lead magnet or your discovery call. Have a unified plan.

When all of your content leads your audience to the same place, your maximize the impact your content can have.

BOOK

Now that you have multiple episodes, you can take all of that content and aggregate it into a book.

Group your episodes into similar topics. Turn these groups into chapters. Find an overarching theme and create your book.

Now that theory sounds easy. But, it’s a little more challenging than that.

Today, we have an amazing expert who can help us with the process.

BOOK COACH DAN JANAL

Dan Janal works with business owners and professionals who want to elevate their reputations and set themselves apart from their competition by writing a book.

As a book coach, developmental editor, and ghostwriter, Dan shapes stories and strategies that can transform a career or business.

Dan has written more than a dozen books that have been translated into six languages. His latest book is Write Your Book in a Flash.

He also hosts a podcast, “Write Your Book in a Flash with Dan Janal”, where he interviews subject matter experts who have written books. Thinkers360.com named the show one of the top 50 podcasts for thought leaders.

He’s a former award-winning daily newspaper reporter and business editor. Dan has interviewed President Gerald Ford and First Lady Barbara Bush.

Dan is an award-winning daily newspaper reporter and business newspaper editor who excels in making difficult concepts easy to understand.

Today, Dan is going to show us the benefits of a book, how you can find a ghostwriter and how he uses his podcast to drive his business.

You can grab his free gift “How To turn Your Podcast Into A Book” at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/flash.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Interview Or Solo Show? – PTC 345

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

As you create your podcast, is it better to do an interview or a solo show? You might consider co-hosts. Should you have segment contributors? It all comes down to preference. There are benefits to each. We will cover those today. 

INTERVIEW QUESTIONS

If you perform an interview on your show, you need to grab my list of 17 Most Powerful Podcast Inteview Questions Ever. You can download the full list at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview.

This list can be customized for any niche or guest. It will help you create more powerful interviews that will have your guests saying, “Wow, nobody has asked me that before.”

You will create a unique, engaging interview that doesn’t sound like everyone else. Grab it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview.

STRUCTURE

There are various ways you can structure your podcast. A few ways include a solo show, an interview, co-hosts, and crowdsourced.

Let’s talk about each one to identify the benefits and drawbacks of each.

SOLO SHOW

Benefits include …

  • Easy to schedule
  • Easy to edit
  • Less preparation
  • You have full control over the content

Drawbacks include …

  • More difficult to grow, because there is no guest to co-promote
  • The content is all on you

AN INTERVIEW

Benefits include …

  • Guest helps create the content
  • You don’t need to be the expert on everything
  • You have another person to promote your show
  • Interview swaps are possible
  • There is someone to talk to on the show

Drawbacks include …

  • Need to find guests that fit
  • More difficult to schedule
  • Lots of solicitation from potential guests that don’t fit your audience
  • It is tricky to find ways to promote yourself when you are interviewing others

CO-HOSTS

Benefits include …

  • Someone to talk to
  • There are two people to do the work and share the duties
  • Content ideas come from multiple people
  • Easier to be engaging with someone in front of you

Drawbacks include …

  • You need different personalities
  • Difficult to schedule
  • Balance of duties
  • Who owns the show if you split

CROWDSOURCED

Benefits include …

  • Much more engaging with differing points of view
  • Highly entertaining when produced correctly
  • Sounds like a top notch show with the variety of audio

Drawbacks include …

  • Takes time to find material
  • If you solicit your audience for content, you need to get people to submit
  • Requires more time to edit

OPTIONS

Those are just four of the ways you can structure your podcast. You could have episodes where guest contributors appear for a segment offering additional content. Repurposing your live presentations is another option.

The best part is that you don’t have to pick just one. You can use a consistent format and then drop in others when it makes sense.

On this show, I typically bring you a solo show. However, there are times when I have a guest here for an interview. It isn’t one size fits all.

Dave Jackson at School of Podcasting typically does a solo show. There are times when he does an interview. He also does a crowdsourced show once a month.

Dan Miller at 48 Days Podcast is usually a solo show answering listener questions. But there are times when he brings on a guest for a very special interview.

Pick the flavor that works for you. Then, change it when the time is right.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Podcast Launch Case Study – PTC 344

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When you go through a podcast launch, there are pitfalls to avoid. Creating a strategy for your show early is a critical piece to ensure your podcast helps attract your ideal clients and drives your business.

On this episode, I want to take you through a launch case study to help you discover a few things you might tighten up with your show.

PODCAST LAUNCH

If you do not have a podcast yet, you could launch in a weekend. I am holding a 3-day workshop that will get your podcast launched in a weekend.

During this workshop, you will discover how to build a solid podcast that will attract your ideal listeners. You won’t just learn how to record, edit and publish your podcast. I will take your hand and walk you through it during this workshop.

You will learn how to properly conduct interviews that will benefit you. We will create your marketing strategy to grow your audience. By the end of the weekend, you will refine your personality to create engaging entertainment that will attract your ideal clients.

If you would like to launch your podcast in 3 days, enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/start.

This 3-day workshop happens Friday through Sunday, July 16th through the 18th. You will publish your podcast by the end of the workshop.

STRATEGY

Your podcast can be a powerful tool when you are trying to attract your ideal clients. You need to decide how your podcast fits into your plan.

I like to start with the end in mind.

Let’s say you are a coach looking to attract clients. How might your podcast bring those potential clients into the top of your funnel.

Well, you need to decide what your funnel looks like before you can answer that questions.

How do you enroll clients? You could use a webinar. Strategy or discovery calls is an option. Clients could discover you by seeing you on a summit or stage. They might hear you on another podcast.

Once those potential clients discover you, where do they go for more information? This is where you send them to your lead magnet or directly to your podcast.

I like sending people to a lead magnet first. Let’s capture their information so we can invite them to listen to the podcast.

If you invite them to your podcast while giving an interview on another show, you get one opportunity to invite. If you invite them to grab your lead magnet, you can then use your e-mail to invite them to listen many times.

Once they begin listening to your podcast, they begin to know what you are all about. They can decide if they like how you teach and what you have to offer. Your podcast is all about building report with your listeners.

On your show, you can offer listeners more help and opportunities to get what you have to offer. When the time is right for them, they can sign up to work with you as a coach and become a client.

This is the sort of process you need to develop if you want to use your podcast to grow your business. Start with the end in mind and determine how your podcast fits into that strategy.

PODCAST LAUNCH CASE STUDY

Sadie came to me to launch her podcast “Meathead Test Kitchen” with her co-host Sausha. They wanted to create a show around their healthy eating and workout products.

Demonstrating your products, courses and books is a great way to make money with your podcast. This is like a weekly webinar, but your prospects actually subscribe to it.

How great is that? Your listeners ask for it every week! Give them a sample of your stuff. Then, tell them where to buy it.

This is like a long infomercial for your stuff without the slimy feel. You are offering help and showing your ideal clients how to get more.

Do you have a book or course you could demonstrate on your show? Your own little home shopping network … and your ideal clients are subscribing.

This is what Sadie and Sausha do on the Meathead Test Kitchen podcast. Sadie followed my Podcast Fast Blueprint to launch her show in 30 days. Now, they demonstrate products and direct people to their website to buy them. Some of these products are their own products. Some are affiliate products.

On this episode, we talk to Sadie about her launch experience, how she is growing her show and using it to build her business. Enjoy.

PODCAST LAUNCH WORKSHOP

If you do not have a podcast yet, you could launch in a weekend. Join us for a 3-day workshop that will get your podcast launched in a weekend.

During this workshop, you will discover how to build a solid podcast that will attract your ideal listeners. You won’t just learn how to record, edit and publish your podcast. I will take your hand and walk you through it during this workshop.

You will learn how to properly conduct interviews that will benefit you. We will create your marketing strategy to grow your audience. By the end of the weekend, you will refine your personality to create engaging entertainment that will attract your ideal clients.

If you would like to launch your podcast in 3 days, enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/start.

This 3-day workshop happens Friday through Sunday, July 16th through the 18th. You will publish your podcast by the end of the workshop.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/start. Join us for the 3-day workshop and get your podcast launched in a weekend.

Podcast

Podcast Content Strategy – PTC 343

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you hope to use your podcast to grow your business, you need a podcast content strategy. Randomly creating shows will get you random results. Define your goal. Develop the plan to get there. Then focus.

TRAINING

I will be holding a free training called “How To Make Money With A Free Podcast … Without Ads and Sponsorships.” This is the exact step-by-step process to grow your audience, attract your ideal customers and clients, and make money with your podcast.

You can join us for free. Register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth

On this training you are going to discover:

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid those pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode
  • And more!

Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

NO STRATEGY

When I first started coaching podcasters, I developed the Powerful Profitable Podcasts system. Unfortunately, it didn’t work.

This was system and process designed to get podcasters from idea to monetization. It was built with seven sections and a few dozen modules.

Powerful Profitable Podcasts started with the magic of audio. This covered theater of the mind and your why.

The system helped podcasters design their foundation. This included your strategy, solution and structure.

It was program that covered everything. The system taught show prep, reviewing your show to get better and monetizing your efforts.

Powerful Profitable Podcasts went from A to Z, soup to nuts. It was everything you need to do to create a profitable show.

So, why did it fail? Nobody wanted everything. Podcasters don’t want to solve every problem. They only want to solve their problem.

That is when I started to do some market research and focus on specific problem. I took the system and broke it into parts. Instead of teaching the whole system, I now teach individual parts of the system within a podcast content strategy.

YOUR STRATEGY

There are three steps to designing your strategy.

First, determine your process. How do you help your listeners?

Next, brainstorm frequent questions for each step that your listeners might be asking.

Finally, identify a lead magnet or additional help for each question.

This assumes you have built a follow-up system that gets to your offer. This could be your e-mail follow-up sequence or one-on-one discovery call. You have the contact info of your listener. Now, follow up and offer more help.

This process also works with interviews. Who can you interview as a case study or as a compliment to each question?

With an interview podcast, start by working backwards. When you land a guest for your show, work backward to determine how the interview fits within your podcast content strategy.

If the interview won’t fit in the strategy, you shouldn’t be doing the interview. Interviews must benefit the listener, the guest and you. If it isn’t win-win-win, you should politely decline.

MY STRATEGY

Let me show you how this would work with my show.

My Audience Explosion Blueprint process is three steps. Your programming, promotion and personality. Don’t make it harder than it needs to be.

That process consists of six steps. Those steps are your podcast platform, content creation, popularity factor, influence roadmap, money plan and raving fans.

I now want to create episodes around each of those steps.

QUESTIONS

What questions would my ideal listener ask regarding those steps?

Podcast platform – What is the best way to structure my show?

Content creation – How can I create content that gets my listeners to engage?

Popularity factor (discovery) – How can I grow my audience?

Influence roadmap (personality) – How can I make my show different from everyone else? Why would anyone listen to me?

Money plan – How can I make money with a free podcast?

Raving fans (story) – How do I get people to keep listening?

LEAD MAGNETS

Podcast Platform – Podcast Show Clock Worksheet – Episode 288 How To Structure Your Podcast.

Content creation – 17 Of The Most Powerful Podcast Interview Questions Ever – Episode 331 Interviewing Secrets – 75 Ways To Drive Engagement With Your Podcast – Episode 341 Get Your Listeners To Engage.

Popularity factor – Collaborate – Episode 334 Double Your Audience.

Influence roadmap – Podcast Review Show and Personality Development Worksheet – Episode 310 How To Develop Your Podcast Personality.

Money plan – 6 Ways To Make Money With A Free Podcast – Episode 281 The Podcast Profit Roadmap.

Raving Fans – Story Development Worksheet – Episode 130 Can You Tell Stories Like Walt Disney?

CONTENT CREATION STRATEGY

Now, my podcast episodes offer my listeners help with a specific problem.

Each episode directs you to a lead magnet that will give you additional help with that problem.

The e-mail sequence will then offer you additional help. I will then give you a chance to get even more help by working with me.

It is all part of a strategy.

This week, look at your process. Begin developing your strategy to take your listener from content to client.

JOIN US

Come join my on my new training called “How To Make Money With A Free Podcast … Without Ads and Sponsorships.” This is the exact step-by-step process to grow your audience, attract your ideal customers and clients, and make money with your podcast.

This is the process I use. I will teach it to you in this training. You can join us for free. Register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

On this training you are going to discover:

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid those pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode
  • And more!

Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Grow Your Podcast Downloads – PTC 342

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are three important steps to growing your podcast downloads. The three steps are awareness, attraction and retention. I like to call it promotion, programming and personality. Today, I want to help you grow your downloads by focusing on promotion.

TRAINING

I will be holding a free training called “How To Make Money With A Free Podcast … Without Ads and Sponsorships.” This is the exact step-by-step process to grow your audience, attract your ideal customers and clients, and make money with your podcast.

You can join us for free. Register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

On this free training you are going to discover:

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid those pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode
  • And more!

Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

DOWNLOADS

Before you can make money with your podcast, you need to grow your podcast downloads. You don’t necessarily need a big audience. To drive your business, you need the right audience.

Less than 7% of all podcasts have an audience large enough to attract big sponsors and advertisers. There are much better ways to monetize your podcast.

Many people believe sponsorships and advertising are the only ways to make money with a podcast. Untrue.

In fact, you shouldn’t clutter up your show with ads. Instead, use your podcast as a powerful marketing tool for your business.

Podcasting is huge. You have incredible power in front of you. Let me show you some numbers.

There are just under 2 million podcasts today. On the other hand, there are over 600 Million blogs and more than 1.3 billion YouTube videos. Where do you want to compete?

Podcast search engine Listen Notes reports there were 246,782 podcast debuts in 2019 alone. Today, more than 90 million people in the U.S.— approximately 32% of the U.S. population over the age of 12 — have listened to a podcast in the past month according to Edison Research.

According to The Nielsen Company, the total podcast audience is growing at a compound average growth rate of 20%. And that could mean the overall audience for the medium could double within the next five years. Now is the time to stake your claim in your niche. Get noticed and build your audience.

Let’s talk about why many podcasts don’t make money. There are a 6 reasons podcasts don’t make money or attract clients. Let me give you the big two.

You already know that ads and sponsorships are a tough sell, especially if you are not in the top 7%. If you are part of the other 93%, how can you make money?

It’s all about the right audience.

WHAT ARE YOU SELLING?

The first issue most podcasters face is you don’t have anything to sell.

When podcasters contact me for coaching, our first step is a podcast strategy session. During that call, we define goals and the strategy to achieve those goals.

Though the questions vary, one seems to consistently come up. “How can I make money with my podcast?” I ask, “What are you selling?”

Can your listeners currently give you money for anything?

As coaches and content creators, you probably have something to sell. You just need more people to buy it.

ARE YOU ASKING?

The second problem is you are not asking for the sale

Podcasters say, “Yeah, Erik. I have a course for sale. Nobody is buying it.”

Have you told anyone about it?

One of my buddies has a great course available. I had known him for six months before I knew anything about it.

Once you build your rapport through your podcast, the “yes” should become a formality if you actually ask for the sale and help your listener succeed.

THE RIGHT PODCAST DOWNLOADS

The big challenge is the audience. You need to find an audience full of your ideal clients.

When I started building my e-mail list, I developed multiple lead magnets that would help my podcast audience. I then offered those on my show.

My list grew nicely. My podcast downloads grew as well.

Before too long, I had about 500 people on my e-mail list. My show was getting about 200 downloads an episode.

Then it happened. I hit that plateau. Has that happened to you?

My podcast downloads stopped growing.

What I discovered was what worked yesterday doesn’t necessarily work today. That doesn’t mean you need to chase the next big thing. It simply means you need multiple streams of traffic.

That’s when I discovered my ability to diversify my traffic.

I participated in a few gift giveaways. My list doubled. My podcast downloads grew as well.

Then I gave a few presentations on summits and did a few podcast interviews. My downloads ended up doubling in a few months.

If you want to grow your downloads, find ways to get in front of your ideal audience.

MULTIPLE STREAMS

You should not try everything at once. Pick 3 that you enjoy and can do well.

My former coach Marc Mawhinney calls this his three pillars. What three traffic sources are you going to use to reach your ideal clients and potential listeners?

You could use stages. By stages I don’t only mean physical stages. The term stage refers to any platform where you can speak in front of a group of people.

Stages could include real stages. It also includes podcasts, radio shows, summits, webinars, Facebook lives and other speaking opportunities.

You could also use social media as a strategy. Be active in groups.

Gift giveaways are a great way to reach new people. This is where a group of similar experts team up to provide a bunch of valuable free gifts to their e-mail lists.

In a gift giveaway, each expert contributes a gift. All experts typically e-mail their list a few times and post on social media inviting people to get the gifts. When people opt in for your gift, they are added to your e-mail list.

Gift giveaways are a great way to build your list and reach a new audience.

YOUR LIST

Building your e-mail list is a great way to start the relationship with your listener. By e-mailing your list with valuable resources and information, you build your credibility and trust.

You need to serve when you e-mail. Send information your listeners can use.

When I send my daily e-mail, it always contains a tip or piece of information my listeners can use. This varies from content to growth to monetization. Every e-mail begins with something my listeners can use.

The tip is typically followed by an opportunity to go deeper and get even more help. Sometimes this is from me. Other times it is from one of my partners.

My e-mails are rarely 100% focused on sales. There is always value. If I only send sales e-mail or only send when I have a pitch, people stop opening my e-mails.

I understand your inbox is valuable. Therefore, I deliver value.

MONETIZATION

If you want to monetize your podcast, it all begins with building the right audience.

You need to find ways to promote yourself to new listeners. Continuing to market to the same pool will not help you grow. Find new fans.

Once you find listeners, find ways to help them. Then, keep them coming back again and again.

Those are the three steps to grow your podcast downloads. Promotion, programming and personality.

JOIN US

Come join my on my new training called “How To Make Money With A Free Podcast … Without Ads and Sponsorships.” This is the exact step-by-step process to grow your audience, attract your ideal customers and clients, and make money with your podcast.

This is the process I use. I will teach it to you in this training. You can join us for free. Register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

On this training you are going to discover:

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid those pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode
  • And more!

Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Ways To Grow Your Podcast Engagement – PTC 341

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Many podcasters ask me how to get more listener interaction with their show. How can you get more listener feedback and comments? They are looking for ways to grow their podcast engagement.

We need to transform your information into engaging entertainment. When your content is engaging, people take notice and take action. If you want your listeners to interact more with your show, make your content engaging.

You can download the list at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/engage.

The one struggle that I hear most often is the desire to gain more engagement. How do we get more listeners? How do I increase my download numbers? What do you do to create more engagement? The problem may be worded differently, but the struggle is the same.

Are you making the problem more difficult than it needs to be?

The solution is easy to understand, yet difficult to execute properly.

Through all of my research and years of experience in both radio and podcasting, I’ve discovered a few key steps to create interaction. This week, let’s cover 7 steps to create more podcast engagement with your listeners.

Some of these steps may sound a little too simplistic. Just remember … don’t make it harder than it needs to be. Step back and ask yourself if you are truly executing on each step to the fullest.

ASK

1. Ask Them To Engage

How do you expect them to know you want them to be part of your show if you don’t ask?

Be sure to make your request specific. Tell your listener exactly what you want her to do.

If you want your listener to e-mail you or leave a voice message, tell them how to do that. Tell them where to go and what to do. When you want more podcast engagement, you need to ask for it.

EASY

2. Make It Easy To Engage

You may use social media, your website, an e-mail address, voicemail, or a number of other methods to reach you. Simplify it.

Create one contact page on your website containing the info to avoid the need for a laundry list during your show. Then, always provide that one contact source.

By using that one source, you also prevent your listener from getting caught in the decision paradox. If someone must decide which options to choose, they will choose to do neither.

It is much safer to make no choice than to make the wrong choice. Don’t put them in that situation.

Make the questions specific, so they don’t have to think. Give your listener a question to answer or specific piece of information to provide.

If he isn’t forced to be creative and “work” to create content for your show, you will have more success creating podcast engagement.

DEMONSTRATE

3. Show Them How To Engage

Give examples of podcast engagement. Show your listeners what you want them to do.

If you want people to leave you voice messages, play some examples on the show. When your listener hears others asking questions or giving opinions, they will know exactly what to do.

On the radio, we always had trouble getting the first call. Nobody wants to be first. We would set up the first call with someone who called about something completely different.

If we wanted to get into a conversation about best movie theater, we would set it up. When someone called to request a song, we would ask them the question. Then, we would play that call to demonstrate to others what we wanted.

Prime the pump to get more podcast engagement.

REWARD PODCAST ENGAGEMENT

4. Reward Podcast Engagement

What do your listeners get by engaging? What is it in for them?

Reward listeners who engage. This doesn’t need to be a gift or physical reward. You could acknowledge them on the show or highlight their journey.

Rewarding your active listeners can take many forms.

SUPERFANS

5. Use Superfans

Reach out to your superfans to begin the podcast engagement. They are more likely to engage than others. Use this to your advantage.

Connect with three or four to start the engagement. When your superfans start the conversation, others will follow.

NAMES

6. Use Their Name

Know your frequent listeners by name and use their name often.

Like Dale Carnegie says in “How To Win Friends And Influence People“, there is no sweeter sound than the sound of one’s name.

Jon and Dave and Regina listen to my show each week. They support my show and all I do. Find those frequent listeners for your show and mention them.

HIGHLIGHT

7. Highlight Members

Highlight a member of your community or audience on each show.

If you want more members and more engagement, highlight a member each week. Rather than simply acknowledging them, do a full feature on them. You might even invite them on the show and coach them.

Really shine the spotlight on a member and it will pay off when they share it.

Here are two bonus ideas …

SHARE

8. Share Tips

Have listeners share a tip of the week. Creating a crowd sourced show is a powerful way to create podcast engagement.

Dave Jackson at School of Podcasting does this as the final episode each month. He has a question of the month. He then tells people exactly how to leave their answer.

For the final episode of the month, he combines all of the answers into a show.

TEXT

9. Text

Let listeners text to make it easier. When podcast engagement is easy, engagement goes up.

We would often be told to get more callers on the radio during our show. Unfortunately, people would rather text than call. It’s a way of life today.

If your listeners are in the habit of texting, find a way to allow them to text you. Make it easy.

TIP SHEET

Would you like 75 ways to drive podcast engagement and grow your audience? You can get my list at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/engage.

You will get ideas to engage your audience with your content. There are tips to increase your podcast downloads. There are also ways to encourage your listener to visit your website.

You can download the list at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/engage.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

How To Improve Your Next Podcast Interview – PTC 340

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

On this episode, I want to teach you how to create powerful podcast interviews like the pros. There are a few adjustments you can make to create a better interview.

REASONS

There are many reasons we interview guests on our podcasts.

  • They are content experts
  • They know more than we do
  • Guests add depth to the conversation
  • Interviews can expose your show to others
  • Interviews can cross-promote your products
  • Guests add additional content to your show

If you are like me when I started, you probably feel a bit overwhelmed. I felt like I was a kid playing dress-up. Did I really belong with the professional interviewers? I wasn’t big time. Impostor syndrome was definitely kicking in.

You can learn how to be be more confident and create a better interview.

  • We can avoid making fools of ourselves
  • You can battle the impostor syndrome
  • We can look smarter by surrounding ourselves with smarter people

With just a few adjustments, you can take your podcast interview to a whole new level. Here are 7 tweaks you can make this week to deliver a better interview.

BIO

1. You give their bio, not the guest.

When you open the episode, it is your responsibility to provide your audience with the background of your guest. You know what the audience needs.

Your guest is not familiar with your ideal target listener. The guest doesn’t know what your audience needs to know to put the conversation in context.

If you start the questions with “tell us a little about yourself”, you guest has no idea where to start. She might begin with growing up in a small town and working in her mom’s store. What does this have to do with your show?

Introduce your guest with the details your audience needs to understand how the conversation will benefit them. Give your audience a reason to listen. Why did you invite your guest on the show? Begin there.

STANDARD

2. Avoid the standard questions.

If you want your interviews to stand out, ask unique questions. Avoid all of the standard questions every other interviewer asks.

There are times when the guest will send you a list of potential questions. When you follow the script, you become common.

Use those questions to create some great questions of your own. Standard questions result in standard answers. If you want a better interview, ask better questions.

SET UP

3. Set up the question and then ask.

Last week I made a trek to pick up my daughter from college and bring her home for the summer. On that 3-day drive, we were able to listen to quite a few podcasts.

On one particular show, the host was interviewing a former wrestling star. The host is a big wrestling fan.

Each time the host would ask a question, he would follow it with a bunch of framing. He would ask something like, “How do you find places to hold your seminars?” It was a solid question for the interview. Unfortunately, he followed it with a bunch of examples and what he would do to find speaking opportunities.

When you follow your question with a bunch of framing, your guest forgets the question. Your listener forgets, too.

Set up the question. Tell a little of your story. Then end with the question.

LESS YOU

4. A little of you and a lot of them.

That brings us to the fourth tip. Tell your story, but only a little bit.

This is a fine line. You want to demonstrate a little of your authority. But, you want to make your guest the star.

Give a little bit of yourself. This should only be 2 or 3 sentences. Your story could be part of your framing.

Shine the spotlight on your guest. When they look good, you look good.

LISTEN

5. Listen to the answers and ask great follow-up questions.

So many podcasters are too concerned with their list of questions. They want to get through each question on their sheet.

Stop worrying about your list and listen to the answers. When you listen, you will come up with great follow-up questions. That is where the magic lies.

You really only need a few great questions. Use follow-up questions and you have a better interview.

YES/NO

6. No yes/no questions.

The sixth tip … You want to avoid yes/no questions.

Questions that can be answered with yes or no, or can be answered with one or two words, the momentum of your interview dies. The conversation comes to a screeching halt.

As open-ended questions that allow your guest to elaborate.

STORIES

7. Get your guests to tell stories.

That leads into the final tip. Get your guest to tell stories.

Everything interesting is about people. When your guest tells stories, you develop a plot. It’s a beginning, middle and end. Your interview becomes engaging.

When your guest tells stories, your listener gets emotionally involved. As humans, we have learned through stories for centuries.

Stories will transform your interviews in a powerful way. You will always have a better interview when you use stories.

Here is an episode of Podcast Talent Coach to help you with your stories: SECRETS TO AN EFFECTIVE PODCAST INTERVIEW – PTC302.

LIST

If you want to supercharge your interviews, grab my 17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions. Get it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview.

We interview to give more depth and voice to our content. The goal of these questions is to create inspiration and connection between the listener, the interviewee and you.

Your guests will begin telling you stories you haven’t heard them tell any other interviewer. You will hear things from your guests like “This was a really fun interview.” You will be unique and stand out from the crowd. 

It is my 17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions. Get it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview and start building your better interview.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Great Podcast Examples – PTC 339

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

On the show today, I want to give you a few podcast examples that will help you in various areas of your show. These are podcasts that I feel do many things well that you can model.

We will also talk about a few of my past episodes. After over 330 podcast episodes, you and I have discussed quite a few topics.

I looked at my stats the other day and pulled up my 6 most popular shows. If you are looking for the episodes that have had the most impact, you can give these a listen to help you on your podcast journey as well.

You can find a link to all of these podcasts in the show notes at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/examples.

THE BEST

Picking the best is always subjective. What I like you may not. That’s the great thing about podcasting. If you don’t like one host or show, you can probably find a dozen other shows on the same subject.

The quality of podcast examples depends on the niche and your tastes. Just like radio formats. One size definitely does NOT fit all.

I will give you a few that I feel do well in particular areas. You can take a listen and decide for yourself.

INTERVIEWS

In terms of hosts that conduct solid interviewers, there are three that I really like.

Malcolm Gladwell on Broken Record does great interviews, though he isn’t the only host of the show. The show is sort of album liner notes come to life. Broken Record brings you conversations with artists in a world without liner notes for a new audience of music lovers.

Michael O’Neal on the Solopreneur Hour podcast is a great interviewer. He creates real conversations. They can sometimes be a bit long.

Solopreneur Hour is a podcast of lively conversations, candid insights and bold advice for proudly unemployable people who are primed for real prosperity and fulfillment. Michael talks with the best and brightest solopreneurs from all walks of life.

Barbara Corcoran has a lot of fun with her inteviews on Business Unusual. You know Barbara from Shark Tank. She reminds me of my mom and has tons of fun.

I really like the older episodes before COVID hit. Her conversations with listeners were a lot more engaging.

In the description, Barbara says, “Life is too short to waste your time practicing someone else’s fancy theory on success. I give you the straight talk and the confidence to get there.”

Though I’m not a big fan, Howard Stern does amazing interviews. He usually asks exactly what the listener is thinking.

CO-HOSTS

When it comes to co-hosts, you need to ensure hosts have different personalities and opinions. If both are the same, one of them isn’t necessary.

Matthew and Elysha Dicks host Speak Up Storytelling podcast. This is a great example of co-hosts who compliment each other quite well. Unlike most storytelling podcasts, which offer you one or more outstanding stories to listen to and enjoy, this podcast seeks to entertain while also providing some specific, actionable lessons on storytelling.

Screw The Nine To Five podcast is hosted by husband and wife team of Jill and Josh Stanton. They are real, sometime brash and always funny.

This is a great example of two personalities really playing off each other. They have the same goal, but different approaches.

BUSINESS

Shane Sams on the Flipped Lifestyle podcast does a great job at giving you ideas you can actually use. This isn’t just tips and tricks found on the internet. Shane has done it.

The thing I love about Shane’s podcast is that he promotes his membership site and courses without being over-the-top salesy. This is a great example of using your show to drive your business without being a total infomercial.

Marc Mawhinney hosts the Natural Born Coaches podcast. He helps coaches. Pretty obvious. Love the title.

Marc uses his podcast to boost his JV relationships. He is typically interviewing experts in the online space. They provide great information. At the end of most episodes, they invite you to a webinar. This is a great example of leveraging interviews to drive revenue.

SOLO

One of the best solo shows I listen to is 48 Days To The Work You Love with Dan Miller. Dan spends 48 minutes every week answering questions. He is engaging and captivating having a conversation directly with you while doing it all on his own.

Dave Jackson over at School of Podcasting also does a solid solo show. Carrying a show by yourself and connecting with the listener isn’t easy. Dave does it every week. If you’re looking for another great show about podcasting, check out Dave.

Let’s get into the six most popular episodes of Podcast Talent Coach.

YOUR VOICE

The first is Like Your Voice – PTC223.

“I hate the way I sound.”

I hear that complaint quite often. Many people do not like the sound of their own voice. It is quite common.

It is also quite natural to dislike the sound of you own voice when hearing a recorded version of it. When you talk, the bones in your head vibrate adding to the qualities you naturally hear. When you hear a recording of your voice, those vibrations are absent causing your voice to sound different to you.

The natural bone vibrations also make you do some unnecessary acrobatics with your voice when using headphones. The bone vibrations combined with the enclosed nature of your headphones cause you to hear the big announcer voice in a much different way the listener hears it. You tend to speak in ways you don’t normally speak in everyday conversation.

The thing we fear most is not death but humiliation.

Listeners can tell in the first few words if you are excited and in the zone.

Your inner critic never congratulates you.

There are seven steps you can take to make your voice sound more natural and get you on the path to enjoying the sound of your voice. You will discover all seven in this episode.

DOWNLOADS

The next is How To Increase Your Downloads – PTC209.

Most of us want to grow our audience, increase downloads and become more influential in our niche. I recently conducted a survey asking about your biggest challenges with regard to your podcast. The most frequent response revolved around ways to increase podcast downloads.

If you were to list your top three struggles with your show, would one hurdle you list be getting more listeners and engagement?

When podcasters reach out to me for their free strategy session, I ask them how I might help with their podcast. Promoting the show, gaining listeners and increasing podcast downloads is most always part of the answer.

You are not alone. We all want a bigger audience. Whether you have 100 listeners or 10,000 listeners, I’m sure you would like a few more.

There are 6 steps to growing your audience. You can hear it in episode 209.

YOU’RE AN EXPERT

Next is 3 Ways To Position Yourself As An Expert – PTC227.

Once when I was grabbing a quick bite to eat at the local fast food restaurant, I was reminded we are all an expert at something to someone.

After ordering my food, I pulled up to the drive thru window of the fast food restaurant to pay. My total came to $4.38. I handed the kid in the window $5.38. The amount completely puzzled him.

He looked at the currency for quite some time. I was beginning to think he didn’t realize I needed change. After what seemed like two minutes, he looked around for his manager.

When he realized his manager was helping another customer, he looked back at the money trying to devise a plan B.

The kid finally stuck his head into the window and asked, “Are you good at math?”

I said, “The total was $4.38, right?” He replied with, “Yeah.” I said, “You owe me a dollar.”

“Oh, that’s what I thought,” he replied with relief as he ducked to the register to retrieve my dollar.

At that point, I realized we are all an expert to somebody. Even people who do not normally deal in American currency could probably guess that $5.38 minus $4.38 equals $1. To this kid, I looked like a genius.

If you think about where you were two years ago, you are much more experienced than a person in that position now. Help those folks make the two-year journey to get to the point where you are now.

There are 3 Ways To Become An Expert In Your field. We discuss them in episode 227.

LAUNCH

The next episode is What Do You Need To Start A Podcast – PTC248.

It seems so overwhelming. Launching a podcast looks so technical and confusing. What do you need to start a podcast?

It really is much easier than it appears. You can truly have a show up and running in four weeks.

When I was launching my podcast, I had been in radio for a couple decades. I knew how to create a great show.

What I didn’t know was how to get it on the internet, on Apple Podcasts and out to the world. I knew how to create an .mp3, but how do I make that .mp3 an actual podcast?

I watched a ton of YouTube videos. It felt like the more I watched, the more confused I became. It seemed everyone had their opinions without a real “right” answer. I had almost too many options. Which were the best?

In episode 248, we cover the six easy steps to follow to get your podcast up and running. Don’t overthink it. Done is much better than working for perfection.

ATTENTION

The next most popular episode of Podcast Talent Coach is How To Capture Attention – PTC219.

Have you noticed a lot of the business interview podcasts sound the same? We are hearing the same guests answer the same questions time and time again. How do you become unique in this sea of sameness?

Storytelling can transform your podcast.

I was on a coaching call with Arman the other day. He is a great public speaker who is launching a podcast to compliment his business.

Arman has a knack for telling stories in his speeches. His past life experiences create compelling tales. We were discussing the power of stories in his show.

There is a subtle difference between telling stories in a speech and telling stories in a podcast. During a speech, few people will get up and leave if you don’t hold their attention. While listening to a podcast, if you are captivating, there is a good chance your listener will go find something else to enjoy. There is no guilt in turning you off.

Therefore, you need to capture their attention right out of the box and hold it.

Stories can be a powerful tool with your podcast.

People do business with people they know, like and trust. Stories help you develop that knowledge, likability and trust.

Your stories define you and will touch many more people. The stories you tell and the details you include reveal many things about you. That begins to develop that like and trust.

Stories help you connect, motivate and inspire.

There are four parts to the storytelling structure. We cover those in episode 219.

COACHING

The episode that was the most popular for the longest time is Behind The Scenes Of A Podcast Coaching Session – PTC204.

Dave Jackson and I reviewed the Jeep Talk Show on the Podcast Review Show. Tony Muckleroy, one of the hosts of the show, reached out to me for a follow up review.

On this episode, I take you behind the scenes of that coaching session to show you how things work. It is my hope there are a few things in this session that might help you improve your show.

Tony hosts the Jeep Talk Show with his two co-hosts Josh and Tammy. They started the podcast about 8 years ago.

The primary reason Tony reached out for coaching is audience growth. Their show has plateaued around 1,700 downloads a month. Tony is hoping to discover how they might increase their audience and grow the show.

During our coaching session, Tony and I discuss the points Dave Jackson and I made on the Podcast Review Show, the progress the hosts have made toward those points and where they might go from here.

Jeep Talk Show has some passionate followers. The team posted our coaching session as an episode of their podcast. It is Tony’s hope that sharing the session with his audience might get listeners to provide the show with additional feedback.

This episode features the coaching session with Tony and his show. It was episode 204.

LISTEN

There you go. 15 different episodes that you can check out and use to overcome some of your struggles.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

6 Steps To Start A Podcast – PTC 338

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you want to start a podcast, don’t make it harder than it needs to be. Follow these 6 steps and you can launch a podcast in 30 days.

The first thing you need to remember is patients.

FISH

Download numbers are is like a fishing stories. The fish in the story is always bigger than the actual fish.

Many podcasters twist the numbers and inflate their stats to make their downloads look better.

A podcaster might say, “I am getting 3,000 downloads.” That could be true.

It could also be true that our podcaster is doing a daily show that gets 100 downloads with each episode. When added together, the show had 3,000 downloads total last month.

The statistic is true, yet a bit misleading.

Here is the truth. The median number of downloads for an episode is 121.

Yes, not 1,210. One hundred twenty one.

First, a math refresher before the details. To calculate the median, you stack up all of the numbers smallest to largest. The one right in the middle is the median number.

This means 50% are higher and 50% are lower than the median number. It is the middle.

“The Feed” is the official podcast of podcast audio host Libsyn. Each month on the show, VP of Podcast Relations for Libsyn Rob Walch presents the actual numbers.

This data is based on active shows hosted on Libsyn released in the month of March 2021. Downloads are measured to the end of April 2021.

For the month of March 2021, according to Rob, the median number of downloads for an episode of an active podcast on Libsyn is 121 downloads.

This means if your podcast is getting 121 downloads, you are doing better than half of actively published podcasts on Libsyn.

For perspective, only 6.2% of the active shows are getting over 5,000 downloads during that period.

Getting 1,000 per episode would put you in the top 20%.

2,800 downloads would make you better than 90% of the active podcasts.

Only 5% of active shows get more than 6,600 downloads per episode.

Next time you compare yourself to another show, keep these numbers in mind.

6 STEPS TO START A PODCAST

There are 6 steps to launch your podcast. Those are purpose, program, platform, produce, promote, and profit.

Let’s take each of these one by one.

PURPOSE

Define your why. Without a strong why, it will be difficult to find the motivation to produce every week.

PROGRAM

Define your topic. Make sure it is something you can talk about for hours on end.

PLATFORM

What will be the structure of your podcast? You can choose interview, solo show, multiple hosts, magazine style or a variety of these. Then, develop a show clock.

PRODUCE

Record your show. Use Audacity (free) or Hindenburg (paid). Record your interviews with Zoom. Edit the audio, and export it as an .mp3. Post it on your audio host and website for your potential clients to enjoy.

PROMOTE

Don’t believe if you build it they will come. It doesn’t happen that way. Tell everyone about it. Find ways to get in front of new listeners.

PROFIT

Build a system to monetize your podcast. Use your podcast to build authority and relationships. Send your listeners to your e-mail list and nurture the relationship even further. Be sure you have something to sell.

ACCOUNTABILITY

The other important piece you need is an accountability partner. You’ve been wanting to start a podcast, but haven’t pulled the trigger.

Anne joined me in my Podcast Fast Blueprint program. She said she wanted to start a podcast for a long time. She just never pulled the trigger.

After going through the program and launching her show in 30 days, she finally accomplished her goal.

She said the program was so helpful. Anne just needed someone pushing her to get it across the line.

That is the power of accountability. Sometimes we have a desire to do something. We just need that accountability partner to help push us to get it done.

That’s what Podcast Fast Blueprint can do for you. Are you ready to launch your show? Would you like to see if Podcast Fast Blueprint makes sense for you?

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Getting Started – Repurpose Your Podcast With Video – PTC 337

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When you repurpose your podcast with video, you can increase your reach. However, there are a few other really big reasons to be on video as well as audio.

PODCAST

First, understand that I love podcasting. If you are only going to be on one platform, podcasting it the obvious choice.

There are three ways to share your content … video, audio or text. You can publish your content using blogs, YouTube videos and podcasting.

There is one way I feel is best, and you can probably guess which format that is.

COMPETITION

Today, there are about 600 million blogs in the world today (Statista). When was the last time you read a blog on a regular basis?

In the video space, you are competing with 31 million different YouTube channels, 50 million content creators and 1.3 billion YouTube videos (YouTube).

YouTube also keeps changing the algorithm which makes it incredibly hard to get your videos to go viral. It is hard to stand out and get noticed.

However, there are fewer than 2 million podcasts right now. Only about half of those are actively publishing. The platform is still young. The opportunity for you is huge.

Where do you want to compete? Would you rather try to be seen as one in 2 million or one in 600 million?

Do you want to deal with all of the tech issues that come with shooting video? The lighting, the wardrobe, the teleprompter? Or, would you rather just roll in, turn on the mic and record with a lot fewer issues with equipment, time and hair?

There are two other reasons podcasting is a better than other platforms for your content.

PORTABLE AND GROWING

First, podcasting is portable. Your ideal clients can listen while driving, working out, showering, running and many other places where reading and watching video isn’t feasible.

The numbers are also in your favor. Now is that right time to leverage your podcast.

More than 1-in-4 radio listeners now consume podcasts at least every week according to Jacobs Media’s Techsurvey 2020.

More than 90 million people in the U.S. over the age of 12 have listened to podcasts in the last month according to Edison Research. That is about 32% of the U.S. population 12 and over.

According to the Nielsen Company, the total podcast audience is growing at a compound average growth rate of 20%. That means the audience could double in the next 5 years. 

Podcasting is huge and now is the time to get in. There is a bright future ahead.

VIDEO

There are four big benefits to also being on video.

REPURPOSE WITH VIDEO

Video allows you to repurpose your podcast content to another platform without duplicating the work. If you start with video, you can use the audio from that video as your podcast.

Now you can be on two platforms with the same content and double your exposure.

SEARCH

The second reason is search. Google owns YouTube. Your search becomes huge when you use their platforms.

YouTube is the second biggest search engine in the world. Use that to your benefit by putting your video there.

Your video can be you on camera or simply a screenshare using Screenflow for Macs or Camtasiafor PCs.

VISIBILITY

The third benefit is visibility. It just makes sense that the more platforms you are on, the more you will be seen.

Your podcast isn’t only on one podcast player like Apple Podcasts. You are on as many players as possible.

Being on video and YouTube allows you to expand that visibility.

PREFERENCES

The final benefit is listener preferences. Some people like to consume content via audio. Others are visual learners. There are also some people who like to read, because they can scan the content much faster than watching or listening.

Your podcast pleases the auditory consumers. The show notes hit the reading crowd. Now your video will serve those visual learners.

GETTING STARTED WITH VIDEO

If you can find the bandwidth in your week, now is the time to get started.

Matt Tompkins joins us today to show us how to get started with video, how to repurpose our content and the power of a podcast when it comes to driving your business.

Matt is the co-founder and owner of Two Brothers Creative. Matt helps your business with the highest quality audio & video production that accurately reflects your company, all for a price you can actually afford. Your story and message is our primary focus and they produce all types of videos to connect you with customers and clients.

With more than 17 years working in broadcasting – on the radio locally and syndicated nationally, as well as producing a television show – Two Brothers Creative has taken great pride going the extra mile for clients.

Matt is also the host of It’s The Fix podcast. On the show, Matt shares his recovery from addiction, managing Manic Depressive Disorder, Depression, and losing nearly 40 lbs. Public Figures, celebrities, and experts join Matt to break down the stigmas and barriers so that we can all get the Mental Health we need.

Today, he will help us get started with video. This interview is a bit longer than my normal episode. We get deep into his start, the podcast, how he helps clients succeed and what we need to start with video.

START WITH VIDEO

If you want to repurpose your content without doubling your work, leverage video. You can increase your search reach and your visibility. You will also serve your content in the format various listeners prefer.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

7 Tips To Help You Like Your Voice – PTC 336

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Most people do not like the sound of their own voice. It is natural and quite common. Don’t let it get in your way.

When we hear ourselves, the Impostor Syndrome starts to kick in. 

On a coaching call the other night, we were talking about reviewing your podcast in order to improve. The only way to improve your content is to listen to your shows like a listener.

My client said she finds it difficult to listen to her podcast. She said it is uncomfortable.

NATURAL

It is quite natural to dislike the sound of your own voice when hearing a recorded version of it. When you talk, the bones in your head vibrate adding to the timbrance and qualities you naturally hear.

When you hear a recording of your voice, those vibrations are absent. The bones in your head aren’t vibrating. That causes your voice to sound different to you.

The natural bone vibrations also make your voice bounce up and down like a cheesy DJ. You start doing some unnecessary acrobatics with your voice when you are wearing headphones.

The bone vibrations combined with the enclosed nature of your headphones cause you to hear the big announcer voice. It is much different than the way your listener hears it. You tend to speak in ways you don’t normally speak in everyday conversation when you are wearing headphones.

FEAR

As we listen to ourselves, we think about being judged. It is said that the most common fear is the fear of public speaking. The thing we fear most is not speaking but humiliation. We don’t want to make fools of ourselves.

Your inner critic never congratulates you. Your voice reminds you of the critics.

The more you listen to your show, the more comfortable you will be with your voice.

There are seven steps you can take to make your voice sound more natural and get you on the path to enjoying the sound of your voice.

1. NOTES

The way you write is much different than the way you speak. You use different words. Your sentence structure is different. The flow of the written word simply differs greatly from the spoken word.

As you are speaking, use notes instead of a full script. You will sound much more comfortable when speaking from the heart rather than speaking from the script. The flow and structure of your sentences will be much more natural.

Make note of the important points to include in your podcast. Hit those points within your show without reading it word for word.

2. ONE PERSON

You will sound much more natural when you speak to one person rather than a group of people. Audio is a very personal medium. People are using listening with headphones.

The only reason people listen to audio is for companionship. They don’t want to be alone when they are doing whatever it is they are doing. Talk to her.

When your listener is listening to your podcast, she wants to feel like you are talking to directly with her. If you include a call-to-action in your podcast, you want your listener to act upon that request. If you are talking to a group of people, she can easily think someone else will take action and she will do nothing.

Instead, speak right to her. If you are speaking directly with her, she will begin to develop a friendship with you. She will begin to feel like she knows you. She will also feel like you care about her personally.

When you speak to one person, your delivery will sound much more conversational and less like a lecture. This will help you become more comfortable with your own voice.

3. ONE CUP

Your voice will sound different to you when you listen to your voice through headphones. The enclosed space of the headphones amplifies your voice.

The sound of your voice is also changed by the audio processing. The bones in your head vibrate differently when using headphones.

To help you sound more natural, remove one ear of your headphones. Only use one side to monitor what’s going on with the audio.

With only one cup on your ear, you are able to hear your voice more naturally with the free ear. You will also hear your voice in the context of the ambient room noise rather than through the vacuum of the headphones.

4. TURN IT DOWN

If you are wearing only one cup of your headphones, turning the volume down will also help you sound more natural. With a lower headphone volume, you will hear your natural voice better. You won’t be fooled by the dominance of the headphone sound.

Use should your headphones to make sure you hear the other audio included in your podcast. Make sure you can hear your music bed, intro, guest and other audio. However, make sure your headphones are not giving you a false image of your voice.

5. SING-SONGY

Speak naturally. Do not attempt to sound like other announcers you have heard. Be yourself.

Have you heard those old school DJs that are really sing-songy? They sound like they are puking or singing some bad, over-inflected high school musical? That’s what we don’t want.

When you speak like an announcer, you begin to stretch and emphasize words unnaturally. Your speech begins to unnaturally bounce.

When you listen to your recorded voice like this, you sound like a puky disc jockey or used car salesman on a bad television commercial. Both lack warmth. They are hard to believe.

Instead, speak conversationally. Use a natural pace. Don’t use unnecessary emphasis on words. It might help if you speak like you are on the telephone just talking with one person on the other end. These steps will help your voice sound more natural.

6. PERFORM

This may sound counter to what I just said, but you need to perform.

Put yourself in the right frame of mind with visions. People can hear your smile. You need to get there before the recording begins.

Work from pictures. All communication is visual. Envision in your mind a specific time and place that makes you happy. Actually describe it out loud. This will change your state of mind.

There is a philosophy in acting that the performance begins before you break the wings. That means actors get into character before they actually step onto stage. They take steps to get in the right frame of mind before the performance begins.

Do the same for your podcast. Get there before you hit record.

7. REVIEW

The best way to become a more natural speaker is to review your show often.

When you listen to your show on a regular basis, you will become much more accustomed to hearing your voice in a recorded setting. You dislike your voice, because you are not used to hearing it outside of your own head. The more you hear your voice, the more natural it will sound.

It is possible to overcome the dislike of your own voice. You simply have to take steps to conquer it. It will take time to begin liking the sound of your voice. Be patient.

Remove some of the annoying qualities of your speech. Use notes, speak to one person and get rid of the sing-songy pattern. Polish up the product first.

Next, adjust the way your record. Use only one cup of your headphones. Turn the volume down a bit to hear your voice in its natural setting. Make minor adjustments until you get comfortable.

Finally, review your show. When listening to your own voice becomes habit, your recorded voice will sound much more natural to you. Review your show often.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

How To Leverage Interviews To Grow – PTC 335

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Interviews can add so much to your podcast and brand. You can benefit in many ways by leveraging interviews and guests when you look beyond the content.

If you are looking for great guests and partners, you want to check out Collaborate. It is an event that is designed to connect people who want to work with each other.

Regardless of your niche, you’ll find someone that will make a great partner. Get registered at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

CONTENT

Guests can add content to your show. That is the obvious benefit of interviews.

You can create a great episode with much less preparation when you interview others. Your guest can offer information that it outside of your area of expertise.

Guests can also provide different perspectives and approaches. They can provide info from their area of expertise that compliments your knowledge.

You also don’t need to prepare as much for an interview as you do for a solo show. Some guests overprepare. They know too much for the interview.

When you know too much, you suffer from the curse of knowledge. You forget what it is like to not know the information. That causes a disconnect with your listener.

The great Larry King used to say that he never read the book or saw the movie before he interviewed his guests. He wanted to ask the questions his audience would naturally ask. If he knew too much, he may miss a great questions.

Know enough about your guest to lead them down the path to present the info your audience wants. Don’t learn too much where you start talking jargon and making assumptions.

LEAVE ROOM

As you interview others on your show, be sure to leave room for yourself.

So many podcasters come to me frustrated that their podcast isn’t doing much to grow their business. When I listen to an episode, most of the time is spent interviewing the guest.

The host tells the audience how great the guest is. We demonstrate the guest’s expertise. The host will send the audience to the guest’s website for the free thing or promote the guest’s course, program or product.

It is no wonder the podcast isn’t helping the host’s business. It was a 30-minute commercial for the guest. Why would people come see you?

Instead, carve out time for yourself. Be sure you are leaving space to demonstrate your authority in your niche. Spend time building the relationship with your listener.

GO FIRST

When I have guests on my podcast, I spend the first ten minutes or so teaching. I use that time to show my audience how I can provide value for them. This is all designed to demonstrate my authority and expertise as an influencer in the space.

After I teach a bit, I then interview my guest. The interview is usually a case study to what I just taught or an example of a small part of something I taught.

You should also include your call-to-action during your time as well. Send your listeners to your website or lead magnet before the interview starts.

If you wait until the end, two things happen that are not good for you.

First, a good portion of your listeners won’t make it all the way to the end of your episode. Studies show that just over half listen to the entire podcast. Many stop listening when they are done doing whatever they are doing.

Next, your guest just gave their call-to-action. Your listeners will be focused on that one. Now your call-to-action gets lost in the mix. Putting it up front makes you first and separates your ask from the call-to-action of your guest.

Leave room in your show to toot your own horn.

EXPOSURE

Exposure is another benefit of podcast interviews on your show. Guests can share your podcast episode with their audience. This could be on their show, in their e-mail, on their social media and anywhere else they communicate with their tribe.

When you publish the episode, notify your guest. They are not obligated to share your show. However, they just might if you make it easy for them.

Send your guest artwork they can use in their social post. Write the sample post for them. Make the whole process as easy as possible.

Be grateful they appeared on your show. Do what you can to help them get exposure. If they help in return, that’s an added benefit to you and your podcast.

CREDIBILITY

Podcast guests can also add credibility to you and your show.

When you have experts on your podcast, it provides social proof for you. You get an implied endorsement just by letting the guest appear on your show.

Listeners assume you have a relationship with the guest. The two of you are hanging out chatting about the things you have in common. Their reputation rubs off on you and you look great.

On the other hand, make sure you screen your guests. Don’t let just anybody on your show. Pick the guests that make you look good. One bad guest can ruin your reputation.

CLIENTS

Guests can become your clients. This is definitely a way to benefit from interviews. You can help your guests achieve their goals.

A podcast is a great way to open that door and begin the relationship. Zoe Routh uses her podcast to make a connection with potential clients. Rather than cold calling prospects or trying to schedule a meeting, she invites prospects to be a guest on her show.

Once they are a guest, she begins serving the potential partner. She builds the relationship.

This is a long-term play. Show your guest what you can do and how you can help them succeed. It could lead to something in the future once you build the relationship.

PARTNERS

Finally, interviews are a great way to generate revenue with your podcast.

Interview guests can become your JV partners. The interview can help you promote your guest’s products or services and earn a commission.

The first part of your conversation should provide great value for your listener. Teach something. Share some great value.

At the end of the interview, you guest can make a pitch. Send listeners to your website with a redirect to the guest’s offer. If you send directly to the offer, you rely on the guest to track everything. When listeners come through your site with a redirect, you can see how many hits that page received. That will allow you to analyze if the call-to-action worked.

Your guest can also promote your goods and services and you pay them a commission. It is the process, just in reverse.

Interviews have a ton of benefit for you, your podcast and your business. Make sure you are making the most of every opportunity.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Double Your Audience – PTC 334

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When I talk with podcasters about their goals, they tell me they want to grow their audience. Today, I want to show you the exact steps you can use to double your audience.

These are the exact steps I took last summer to double my downloads in four months.

I also want to let you know that Collaborate is coming again. This is my favorite event of the year. Your chance to meet hundreds of potential partners. Get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

UNCOMFORTABLE

Before we get into the steps, you need to decide if you are really prepared to take the action necessary to grow your audience. Only you can decide if you will do the work.

Everybody wants to lose weight. Few people are willing to do what it takes.

The good news is growing your audience isn’t as difficult as losing weight. It also won’t take nearly as long.

However, it will take discipline. It will also require you to get out of your comfort zone and try some things that may push your boundaries.

Most of us consider ourselves introverts. We find it uncomfortable to engage in conversation with people we don’t know. Putting ourselves out there in vulerable situations can sometimes paralyze us.

On the other hand, when you do put yourself out there and meet new people who can help you, big things can happen.

It is lonely at the top, because so few people are willing to do the work it takes to get there. The extra mile isn’t very crowded.

When you look at these steps, you will notice that they make you a bit uncomfortable. Do you want to be average, or are you ready to stand out from the crowd?

MAKE IT EASIER

You can make this process much easier. Having conversations with people who want to have those conversations makes this process much less awkward.

If you want to double your audience, follow these four steps.

First, create a real benefit of listening to your show. How will your listener be better off when the episode is over? They could be entertained, inspired, more knowledgable, or motivated. You get to decide.

But, you need to decide. Your show cannot simply be information. Listeners can get that anywhere.

Your podcast needs to take your audience through a transformation. To make your show powerful and engaging, stir the emotion and provide a benefit.

Next, find your target audience. You can’t hit a target you cannot see.

Define your target listener. Then, figure out where they congregate.

The third step is getting in front of them. Once you know where they are, go there. Be present. Make them aware of you.

Finally, invite them to the show. Tell these new potential listeners how to find you.

ACTION

The process to double your downloads isn’t difficult to understand. It is just challenging to do it on your own.

You need to take action to achieve your goals.

I was in your shoes. It was difficult for me to put myself out there.

One year I attended a conference where I was speaking. People were actually coming to the room to hear what I had to say. You would think I had plenty of confidence.

One night at the conference, there was a special networking event. I purchased a ticket to start networking.

When I walked into the room, nobody noticed. As I made my way around the room, nobody noticed.

Eventually, I joined a table of a few podcasters. We started chatting about our shows and got to know each other a bit.

What I realized was these people were in the same position I was in. We were all there to meet new people. There was no reason for me to be uncomfortable.

COLLABORATE

Fast forward to last July. I attended an online event called Collaborate. This event was designed to help people meet potential partners.

I reminded myself what I learned back at that conference. We were all there to meet potential partners.

Iman Aghay was leading the event. He taught everyone there exactly how to network and what to say. It was great. He destroyed the self talk. We were all operating from the same playbook.

From that event, I met 40 potential partners. Some would join me on my show. Others would have me on their events.

Evakarin Wallin helps coaches go from start to empowered. She came on my show.

Kelly Falardeau became a great parther. She helps entrepreneurs and coaches write their book. We’ve promoted each other.

I met Margie Dunki-Jacobs. Margie helps entrepreneurs get to the next level. She has promoted me. She has been part of my coaching groups. We’ve found various ways to support each other.

Merri-jo Hillaker is awesome. She helps business owners make a kryptonite breakthrough and reach success in their lives. She was a guest on my show and involved in various other Podcast Talent Coach things. Her story is great.

Shelley Roxanne helps people go from overlooked to overbooked. We created a partnership after she was on my podcast.

Patty Fogarty does website triage. Robin O’Donovan creates custom music. Shadeed Eleazer helps you monetize your network and is an amazing personality that everyone loves.

The potential partners I met were incredible. And, I was taught exactly how to take action and meet all of these amazing people.

OTHER NICHES

I also met many others in a variety of niches.

Alicia helps parents raise happy, healthy kids. Angela is all about essential oils and whole life health. Bonnie does online dance classes. Cheryl does healthy eating. Dr. Cheryl does neuropathy medicine. Gayle teaches you how to get on TV. James is all about chiropractic care. Kim does holistic animal care. Melissa teaches reinvention after divorce.

Some of these experts didn’t fit my niche. However, some knew others that would be a great connection for me.

By connecting and collaborating will all of these amazing people, I doubled my downloads over the course of 4 months.

SIGN UP AND ATTEND

Would you like a chance to meet a whole list of potential partners for you? Collaborate is happening again. You can get the details and register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

The event is amazing. Not only will you network with hundreds of potential partners who are looking for opportunities, you will be taught exactly how to properly network. You will learn exactly how to make the right connections.

This is by far my favorite event of the year. Do yourself a favor and take action. If you want to grow, push yourself.

You can register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate. I would love to see you there.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Unique Podcast JV Approach – PTC 333

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

One way to monetize your podcast is through joint venture or JV partnerships. When partners help each others grow and market, your audience and business can rapidly hit new levels.

A joint venture in business is different than a JV partnership in online marketing and business.

THE JV DIFFERENCE

In business, a joint venture is a business entity that is created by two or more parties, generally characterized by shared ownership, shared returns and risks, and shared governance.

Companies will typically create a joint venture for one of four different reasons. The businesses might look to gain access a new market. A joint venture could help the businesses gain scale efficiencies by combining assets and operations. This relationship could help share risk for major investments or projects. The companies might want to access skills and capabilities of the other company.

When it comes to online marketing JV partnerships, some of these reasons hold true, but not all. For infopreneurs, the definition is a little more broad and loosly defined.

A marketing JV partnership in online business typically involves two or more parties pooling their resources and expertise to achieve a particular goal. The risks and rewards of the enterprise are also typically shared. In these cases, ownership and governance is typically NOT shared like it is with traditional business.

ONLINE JV

As a podcaster, you might promote a product or service from an expert. With an affiliate agreement, you would earn a commission with each sale. This is a straight up affiliate relationship.

When you are a joint venture partner, you take the relationship a little further. This JV partnership might include an interview on your podcast, an appearance on your partner’s summit or a co-promoted webinar.

A JV relationship is a deeper partnership than a standard affiliate relationship.

You could promote Amazon products on your podcast. There are many affiliate products to promote from sites like ClickBank or JVZoo. You typically won’t interview the owners of these products. You simply promote and earn a commission.

If you attend an online event intended to meet partners such as Collaborate (www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate), you create a relationship where you each help each other reach their goals.

JV EXAMPLE

For instance, I met Steve Eriksen at Collaborate. Steve runs Midlife Solopreneur at www.MidlifeSolopreneur.com. He helps and supports solopreneurs with mindset, marketing, sales and much more.

As Steve and I became JV partners, I promoted his summit. He invited me to appear on his summit. I interviewed him on my podcast. He promoted my last webinar. Steve is now helping me build my next giveaway.

Along the way, Steve earned a commission from my courses that sold through his affiliate link with me. I earned commissions from his courses that sold through my affiliate link with him. But it was more than just affiliate sales. It was a partnership. We helped each other get exposure.

I have met dozens of partners through Collaborate in this way. If you would like to attend the next one, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate for all of the details.

VARIETY

There are a variety of ways to create JV relationships with partners. I’ve mentioned a few there with Steve. Podcast interviews, summits, and giveaways.

You could also speak at events, host a webinar together, include each other in newsletters or blog posts, shoot video together, create a product together, provide coaching for the other’s mastermind group, provide content for your partner’s membership site and a variety of other ways.

The key to a great JV partnership is being open-minded. If you are willing to talk, brainstorm and try things, you’ll find success. The first idea typically doesn’t work. Learn from it and try something else.

UNIQUE JV APPROACH

Today, I would like to show you one example of being creative and finding a way that works for you.

Marc Mawhinney is a lifelong entrepreneur who helps coaches get more clients without paid advertising! He achieves this with his coaching programs along with his popular Natural Born Coaches podcast, his Facebook group The Coaching Jungle, and his exclusive print newsletter – Secret Coach Club.

Marc has been a speaker at events like Social Media Marketing World, Entrepreneur City Live, and the TP3X conference. He has also been my coach and helped me achieve some pretty big things.

During our chat, Marc will tell you how his flat fee JV approach works as one way to generate revenue with his podcast. You can also learn all about it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/flatfee, which is my affiliate link for it. (See how that works?)

We also talk about how to get into coaching, why a support group is helpful and a few coaching mishaps along the way.

Grab a pen and paper and enjoy my chat with Marc Mawhinney of Natural Born Coaches podcast.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Overcoming 3 Podcast Growth Challenges – PTC 332

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcast growth isn’t some secret, but it comes with challenges. I realize many podcast gurus tell you they have the magic formula. It isn’t magic. Growth is a method.

There are two ways to grow your downloads. Get more people to listen. Or, get people to listen more.

There are three challenges podcasters face when developing podcast growth. Today, I want to help you overcome those challenges.

MAKE IT EASY

The first of the challenges most podcasters face is making podcast growth too complicated. The process is simple to understand. It is difficult to implement.

Let’s reverse engineer this process by starting with our goal of podcast growth.

To grow your podcast, you need to get more people to listen to your podcast. That is pretty obvious. More people to listen is the easy part to understand.

In order to get more people to listen, we need to get in front of potential listeners and invite them to the party. We need to tell them why our show is exactly what they are looking for and give them a real benefit to listening.

If we want to get in front of those potential listeners, we need to figure out where they are. Who is talking to your ideal listener right now. Which experts already have your ideal listeners in their audience? Let’s partner with those people.

Where do we find those experts? We need to define our ideal listener first. Once we know everything there is to know about our ideal listener, we can then figure out who they follow, trust and admire. Those will be our partners.

We start by defining our ideal target listener and follow the path.

On the other side of the coin, we need to keep our current listeners coming back for more. Entertain your listeners. Give them a real reason to come back next week for the next episode by creating a powerful tease. Generate a real sense of intrigue. 

STRATEGY

The next of the three challenges podcasters face is a lack of a solid growth strategy to follow.

We just talked about the process. Now we need to develop the strategy to execute.

After we develop our ideal target listener and determine who they follow, we can begin creating partnerships. Those partnerships will help us grow.

Reach out to those influencers and ask for a conversation. Tell them you would like to discuss how you can help each other grow. Partners help each other.

When you get on the call with your potential partners, start with them. Ask them what they are working on and how you might support those efforts. Find ways to help them. This should take about twenty minutes.

Next, explain what you are trying to accomplish. Let them offer ways they might support you. In this step, you are simply looking for ways to invite people to your show.

You are looking for stages to speak on. This could be podcast interviews, summit appearances, presentation opportunities or a variety of other stages.

Once you develop your strategy, work on it everyday. Find one influencer each day and make a connection. Not every connection will become a partner. However, your network will definitely grow in a big way.

MENTOR

The final and most important of the challenges podcasters have is not having a mentor. They are not learning from someone who has done it.

When you find someone who can show you the way, you can ease so much pain. The time you spend trying to figure it out will be cut way back. You will have fewer headaches and a lot more fun.

A mentor who is ahead of you on the path can give you the map. Rather than trying to figure out the next step, you can instead enjoy the journey. You can also get to your goal much quicker.

Have you ever got tired of trying to figure out something and finally asked for help. Someone shows you how to do it and you say, “Ugh, why didn’t I think of that!?!”

There are times when you don’t know what you don’t know and that’s ok. Let someone show you and move to the next step. Progress over pride. If you want to fast-track your success, find someone to teach you. You will be happy that you did.

LASER COACHING

If you’re looking to grow your podcast audience, I’ve got a 3-step system that will help you overcome the challenges and get you there:

Step One: Define your ideal target listener so you can …

Step Two: determine which experts already speak to them in order to …

Take Step Three: create partnerships and get in front of those potential listeners which allows you to …

Grow your audience and drive your business.

This system works really well, and if you’d like some help growing your podcast audience, I’ve got great news!

You see, normally I charge $997 per month to coach clients to get these results. We typically meet for one to two hours per week which can take a lot of your time … and mine.

And you know, those marathon coaching sessions take a lot out of me.

So I’m opening up an opportunity for you.

You can now get UNLIMITED Podcast Growth Laser Coaching!

This is a coaching model that is ideal for growing your audience with my 3-step system. I ran a beta opportunity for four podcasters a few months ago, and it is going very well. So, I’ve opened 6 more spots for this opportunity.

For less than 84 bucks a month, you can get a full year of UNLIMITED 15-Minute Laser Coaching sessions with me.

Yep. Unlimited. You can have as many coaching sessions with me as you like for a full year for less than 84 bucks a month.

HOW IT WORKS

Here’s how it works:

1. Go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and apply to have a chat with me to see if you are a good fit for Podcast Growth Laser Coaching. Remember, there are only 6 spots available. I need to pace myself to ensure each client gets the attention they deserve.

2. If this makes sense, you’ll get an email from me with a link to my calendar so we can have our first coaching session.

3. Your first call is 30 minutes to make sure the coaching is perfect for you and we come up with a custom plan to help you grow your audience.

4. At the end of our call, and each call thereafter, we’ll agree on “homework” that will move you forward and keep you accountable.

5. After each call, I’ll send you a recording of the call, confirmation of your homework, and a link to schedule your next call.

6. Once your homework is complete, you can schedule your next 15-minute call.

For example, you have your coaching session on a Wednesday, do your homework right after the call, and you can schedule your next call that very same day. It is truly Unlimited Coaching!

And don’t worry, if you get stuck on the homework or need support between calls, I’m just an email away.

APPLY NOW

Go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and apply to have a chat with me to see if you are a good fit for Podcast Growth Laser Coaching. I’ll select six to participate and get the coaching, and I’d love for you to be one of them.

There is a guarantee. We both need to be comfortable with each other for this to work and get your results. If, during our first 30-minute call, either of us feels like this is not a perfect solution to help you grow your audience, I’ll refund your money immediately. No Risk!

If you would like to be one of the six, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and apply. You and I can have a chat to see if you are a good fit for Podcast Growth Laser Coaching. 

Let’s make it less complicated, develop your strategy to grow, and see how I can take your hand, show you the way, and help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Interview Secrets – PTC 331

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

This week many listeners sent me their questions when it comes to creating a great interview. On this episode, you’ll get those answers to make your podcast interview more powerful and engaging.

Here is the first question.

I need help with getting interviews, when I send invites I don’t get any response.

– Stephen Aiken

There are three steps to getting great guests. You need to have confidence, fish a lot, and get in their shoes.

This just came up on a coaching call the other night with one of my laser coaching clients. He was also finding it difficult to get potential guests to respond.

Your first step is to have confidence. Remember, you podcast is valuable exposure to your guest. Even if you have 100 listeners, that is still an audience of 100.

Do you think your guest would like the opportunity to get on stage at a conference in front of 100 people? Probably so. If that is the case, why wouldn’t they want to get on a podcast in front of 100 people?

On top of that, your podcast will be around for years as long as you keep producing. You may only have 100 this month. Two years from now, that could easily be 500 or 1,000 downloads. The long tail has massive potential.

Smart guests understand this. They play the long game.

Next, fish a lot. Ask a lot of people and expect a lot of those people to say no. Your podcast isn’t at the top of their priority list. The more you ask, the more you will hear no. It also means you will hear yes more often as well.

You also need to ask repeatedly until they say yes or no. No reply does not mean no. It simply means they didn’t reply. Your e-mail may have been overlooked or lost in the mix. Maybe they forgot to reply. It could be their assistant lost the request.

Ask again and again. If after 7 tries they finally say no, you’re still in the spot you are right now. You have lost nothing. If you want the interview, keep asking.

Finally, put yourself in their shoes. When you send the e-mail to ask, start with the benefit to them. They don’t care how long you’ve been podcasting or where you grew up. Your potential guest wants to know how the interview will benefit her.

Start your ask e-mail with what you love about your guest and how you share the same audience. Explain how getting in front of your audience would be a benefit to them. The benefit isn’t now. It is the long play. Smart marketers understand.

Do you have suggestions for types of questions to ask or not to ask?

– Daniel Fellows

During the actual interview, it is more compelling for the listener when you have a conversation rather than a “question/answer” session. Get your guest to tell stories by asking them questions that lead them in that direction.

Everything interesting is about people. If you are simply teaching facts, you will lose the attention of your listener. Get them emotionally invested by using stories. Put them in the moment.

My list of 17 Interview Questions help you do that. You can download that list at PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview.

During your conversation, avoid questions that elicit one-word answers. “Did you enjoy that?” “Yep.” “How many units did you sell?” “1,234.”

When your guest answers with one word, it kills the momentum of the conversation. When they answer “yes”, you then need to figure out how to ask “what did you enjoy about it” or “how did you sell that many”. This just turns the conversation into a lot of start and stop.

Structure your conversation to create a story arc. It should have a beginning, middle and end. Lead your listener somewhere.

Remember that your listener will take away one big thing from the conversation. Decide what that will be before the conversation begins. Then conduct the interview to get to that one big thing.

When it comes to giving an interview, I often struggle with the correct articulation for what I do and how I do it, especially when I’m not expecting it.

– Desiree Bolin

Be ready to answer this question at any given moment. People may ask you what you do when you’re at a conference, when you’re networking or during an interview. Prepare it now.

Your answer to “what do you do” should not be I’m a podcaster or I’m a business coach or I’m a virtual assistant agency.

When people ask you what you do, use this framework. “I help ____ do/be ____ so they can ___.” I do not tell people I am a podcast coach. I help coaches and info experts transform their information into entertainment so they can attract their ideal clients with their podcast.

If you are a virtual assistant agency, you might say, “I help small business owners find assistants to help with the busy work so they can spend more time with clients and building their business.”

It is inevitable that you will be asked this question multiple times. Focus on the benefit to your ideal client. Keep working it until you get something you really feel describes who you help.

The next isn’t really a question. This is just great insight from my friend Dan Woerheide of Pro Growth VA and the Pro Growth podcast.

I actually enjoy my conversations with people as interviews. I focus first on the “topic” of discussion, maybe we’re talking about what it looks like to finally make the shift into entrepreneurship or maybe it’s the challenge of creating your first podcast.

But then I don’t prepare like many do. I focus on the conversation, listen intently and I’ve been lauded for my ability to present my thoughts establishing me not only as a great host, but as a thought leader for my audience.

Rather than rely on the answers from well placed questions (read well designed and a laborious effort of preparation), I rely on input, advice and a healthy dose of my own two cents to make for a great interview.

So my “struggle” would actually be why put all the time and effort into planning an interview, when a great conversation lends itself to break all the barriers.
– Dan Woerheide

That is fantastic insight from Dan. A few well-crafted questions that get your guests to tell stories combined with a high level of curiosity and the ability to be a great listener will produce a wonderful conversation.

The late, great Larry King would say he never read the book of his guest. He wouldn’t see their movie or learn about their story. Larry didn’t want to know more than his audience. During the interview, he wanted to ask the questions his listener would be asking.

Larry didn’t want to suffer from the curse of knowledge. He didn’t want to know too much and miss asking a powerful question or leaving his listen in the dark.

When your interview becomes a conversation, you’ve created magic. Have fun with it.

Thanks for all the great questions. If you have a question or need help with your podcast, you can e-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

[CASE STUDY] How A Hockey Podcast Drives Business – PTC 330

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The key to monetizing your podcast and building your business is determining exactly what your audience wants. Monetization is not built by getting your audience to buy what you have to sell. It is all about offering exactly what they want and are willing and able to pay to acquire.

One of the most difficult classes I took while getting my Masters in Business Administration was Managerial Economics. In that class, we learned all of the nuances that affected the economics of business.

In the end, it still came down to supply and demand. At what price is the seller willing and able to offer the product or service? At what point does that line intersect the point at which the buyer is willing and able to buy the product or service being offered?

That is what business is all about.

If you are offering something that nobody wants, you’ll find it difficult to sell anything.

MARKET RESEARCH

To figure out if your listners want what you have, ask them. Recruit a few dozen people in your niche and actually talk with them.

Ask them about their struggles and pains. Where do they need help? Talk to them about their goals, dreams and ambitions. What do they need to overcome those struggles?

If you would like some help on the questions, download my Listener Development worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener. You don’t need to ask every question on that worksheet. Ask enough to get a good idea of what your listener needs.

Once you have the questions, recruit some participants. Send an e-mail to your list. Post on social media. Direct message people. Reach out multiple times.

I would say something like, “I am working on a program that will help podcasters. Would you be willing to jump on a call with me for about 20 minutes and help me with some research?” Shoot for 20 participants.

When you get on the call, ask them your questions. I would start with, “When it comes to podcasting, where are you struggling most?”

Find the commonalities with your listeners. Most of mine tell me they struggle growing their audience and making money with their show. That’s why I created the Audience Explosion Blueprint. This program helps them with exactly what they need. I know, because they told me. This is how you grow your business.

I built the course with the elements they told me they wanted. I take their hand and walk them through every step of the way, just like they requested.

Every element in the program was suggested by my market research. They helped me build it. You can see the details on the Audience Explosion Blueprint at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience. 

YOUR BUSINESS OFFER

When your listeners help you build your program, it is much easier to get them to buy it. They told you exactly what it should include.

We often make it business more difficult than it needs to be. There is often the desire to put everything we know into one course. The problem is the fact that your audience doesn’t want every answer. Your listener wants to solve one pressing problem. Help them do that.

You will only know what to offer when you listen to your audience. Let them help you build your business.

INTERVIEW

Today, we talk with Aaron Wilbur of the Glass and Out podcast. It is a podcast for hockey coaches. Aaron interviews coaches. He also has a conference and membership site that has now become his full-time job and business.

Aaron Wilbur is the Founder and CEO of the Coaches Site, an online resource for hockey coaches, as well as the host of the Glass & Out podcast. The Coaches Site was created to provide the game’s top coaches a platform to share their experience and expertise with a global audience of coaches.

As the host of the Glass & Out podcast, Aaron is fortunate to have weekly conversations with some of the top leaders and trailblazers in hockey, highlighting the origins of their careers, challenges overcome, triumphs and their insights into how coaches can provide an enhanced development opportunity for their players.

During our conversation, we talk about which came first … the podcast, the membership site or the conference. We get into the origin of each. Aaron shares how the podcast helps drive the business and how he turned it into his full-time gig. He also tells us about his crazy infatuation with Nick Saban and Alabama football.

You will definitely get a few nuggets from this business case study. It just proves you don’t need to teach online business or funnels in order to monetize your podcast.

A big thanks to Aaron Wilbur for joining us on the show. If you want to check out the Glass & Out Podcast or see what his membership site is all about, visit him at www.TheCoachesSite.com.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What You Need To Launch A Podcast – PTC 329

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Launching a podcast doesn’t need to be difficult. Many gurus make you think it takes a lot of technical knowledge and magic powder. Today, I am going to show you how easy it can be to launch your podcast.

Even if you have a podcast, you’ll find some tips here today that will make it even easier for you to succeed.

CHALLENGES

Let’s start with the challenges. There are 3 big challenges that coaches face as they try to build their podcast and audience.

– The first is making it more complicated than it needs to be.

– They don’t have a roadmap

– They don’t know where to start

Let’s take these one at a time.

KEEP IT SIMPLE

Don’t make it complicated. You don’t need to be a tech guru to create a podcast.

Start by recording your episode in audio software. Then, edit it. Editing a podcast is like editing a word document. Highlight and delete. If you need help here, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

Next, export the file as an .mp3. This is just like saving a document as a .pdf. Click “file” and “export”. Some audio software has an export button that makes it really easy.

You then upload your file to your audio host, such as Libsyn. This is just like uploading a photo to Facebook. Your audio host stores your audio. You can get a free month by using the code PTC at www.Libsyn.com.

Embed the audio player and episode on your website. Just copy and paste the code.

Finally, be sure your show is linked to Apple Podcasts and the others. This involves coping the address from your audio host and pasting it on the platform. You only need to do this once.

That’s it. You have a podcast.

Now, producing your podcast is just one of the 6 parts. Most gurus will teach you maybe 2 parts. You need all 6 for a successful podcast. I’ll show you those in a bit.

SPENDING MONEY

You also don’t need to spend a ton of money to podcast.

The #1 mistake most people make when they are launching is spending way too much on equipment and making it more complicated than is necessary. You don’t need a professional studio.

Start with a few inexpensive pieces of gear. You probably already have a computer available.

You need a decent USB microphone that you can plug right into your computer. That will cost you about $75.

You need some headphones. You probably already have a pair of earbuds laying around your home.

Get some editing software. You can get Audacity for free on the internet or use Garage Band on your Mac. I really like Hindenburg Journalist. That will cost you about $100.

If you are going to do interviews, you can record those using free resources like Zoom, Skype or something similar.

Can you spend more? Sure, but why? Don’t complicate it with a mixer and bunch of cables. Don’t go spend $300 on a mic. Just get started.

ROADMAP

Next, many podcasters don’t have a roadmap for success.

One secret most gurus don’t tell you is that getting listeners isn’t enough. You need to develop a plan to keep them listening.

Many podcast gurus teach you how to create a podcast. Record your interview. Convert it to an .mp3. Upload it to your host. You have a podcast. Now what?

Some may even teach you how to get a few listeners. But, that is where most people teaching podcast stop.

The problem is … if you keep putting water in a bucket with holes in the bottom, it becomes very difficult to increase the amount of water in the bucket.

The same is true with your podcast. If you keep adding listeners, but they don’t stick around, your audience and authority won’t grow.

If you want to use a podcast to grow your business and authority, you need to build it on a solid foundation and strategy.

STRATEGY

Earlier I told you there were 6 steps to a successful podcast. 

My Podcast Fast Blueprint teaches you all 6 steps. Those steps are Purpose, Program, Platform, Produce, Promote and Profit.

Producing your show is only one piece.

Your purpose is your why. Without a solid why, you won’t stick with it. Creating a podcast every week will soon seem like a chore.

Find your inspiration with a strong why.

Your program is your niche. This is what you will talk about. It better be something you love and can talk about for hours. This makes creating content so much easier.

Your platform is the format of your show. Will your show be solo, interview, magazine, documentary, two-person or some other format?

We’ve talked about producing. Record, edit, export, post.

Promote is all about attracting your listeners. This is how you bring fans to your show and keep them listening.

Finally, profit from your efforts. Money doesn’t fall from the sky. You need to build an audience and have a strategy.

Six steps. It doesn’t need to be any harder than that.

WHERE TO START

The third challenge many would-be podcasters face is that they don’t know where to start. Let me show you.

What would it mean to your business if you had an easy way to connect to the big fish that were your ideal clients? You could serve them and help them by inviting them on your show and nurture the relationship. Another powerful way to attract your ideal clients.

Let’s talk about using a podcast to drive your business. You have been trying to find unique ways to reach your potential clients. Over the last few minutes we’ve been together, I hope you have written down a few ideas how you might incorporate a podcast into your marketing plan.

How great would it be to be able to talk directly to your ideal client every week and have them request it? They actually subscribe to hear you demonstrate your authority in the space.

You have the steps that can help you. By now, you know how I communicate. You know how I teach. Let’s figure out what you are doing right and find ways to do more of that.

Here’s what I know. If you want another level of success in your business, you’re gonna need help. There’s no way to get different results by doing the same thing. There’s no way you’re gonna get to another level on your own. You need help, and I’d like to be that help.

YOUR OPPORTUNITY

That’s why I am so excited to offer you this opportunity to get into my Podcast Fast Blueprint launch program. This will help you get your podcast launched in 30 days or less.

Launching a podcast is much easier than you think if you know the roadmap. It takes a lot less time than you can imagine. And, it is much more effective than other content methods at attracting and creating powerful relationships with your ideal clients. 

So, let me offer you some help. What would it mean if you were able to get in front of your ideal clients each and every week? Not only that, but your ideal clients actually subscribe and ask to hear from you every week?

This is like a weekly webinar with a built-in audience. What would that do to your coaching business? That is the power of a podcast.

How quickly could you grow your influence and authority in your niche if you were talking to and teaching your potential clients each and every week? That is the power of a podcast.

How would you like me to help you launch a podcast of your own in 30 days? I will walk you through the process step-by-step.

I have a coaching program where I will walk your through the entire process. You will have your podcast launched in 30 days if you do the work consistently. No guessing. I will lay it out for you. You simply need to take the action.

It is called the Podcast Fast Blueprint. And classes are getting ready to start. I’d love to have you join us.

WHAT YOU GET

The coaching includes six weekly group calls with me to teach you the process, to ensure you are taking the right steps and to get all of your questions answered.

This program will give you access to the Podcast Fast Blueprint online portal that will include the recorded calls and plenty of resources that will show you the steps and walk you through the podcast launch checklist. We will record video of the calls and put them inside of the member area, so you can access them again when you need them.

You will also be able to download audio recording of the calls, so you can take them with you and listen on your time. This is just like a private podcast of the teachings. Listen to them whenever you’d like at your convenience.

On top of the 6 weekly calls, you will get the step-by-step Podcast Fast Blueprint to build a successful podcast that not only demonstrates your authority, but attracts clients as well. This process is laid out in the Podcast Talent Coach worksheets that took me 30 years in radio and podcasting to learn, develop and perfect.

This formula is inside of the Podcast Fast Blueprint modules that walk you through creating your content and connecting to your ideal clients. You will learn all of the things necessary to launch in 30 days and start attracting clients.

You will also get lifetime access to our closed group where you can share ideas, get additional support and ask any other questions you might have. Most importantly, you get a system you can follow to launch in 30 days.

In order to ensure you get the attention you need and deserve, I will also give you a personal one-on-one call at the end of the program to develop your audience growth plan after you have launched.

THE VALUE

Total value of this program is thousands and thousand of dollars. But your tuition isn’t nearly that.

People usually pay $1,500 for just the process itself without the recordings, support group, and all of the other components. You won’t pay that either.

You can get full details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/start. I’m not giving the price here, because it could change at any time. This podcast will be around for years. You can see the current structure, bonuses, and price and find the enrollment link at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/Start.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you through the entire process to launching your podcast in 30 days or less, you owe it to yourself to check this out. Stop suffering through the trial and error. Stop beating yourself up with “someday”. Make that “someday” today.

Of course there is a guarantee. In fact, there are two guarantee. First, if you take action and do the work, and you are not launched in 30 days, I will coach you for free until you have your podcast launched.

And, I’ll give you a 30-day money back guarantee. If you get into it and within the first 30 days you realize this isn’t for you, I’ll give you your money back with no questions. What do you have to lose?

WHAT WOULD IT MEAN?

Just think, what would it mean to your business if you could get in front of your clients each and every week? Not only that, but your ideal clients actually subscribe and ask to hear from you every week? This is like a weekly webinar with subscribers and a built-in audience.

What would that do to your influence and authority? Podcasting could double in the next 5 years. 90 million people in the U.S. alone have listened to a podcast in the past month, and it is only getting bigger. Now is the time to start.

Come check out the program and get enrolled. Make today your day. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/Start.

When you join today, you will get instant access to the entire content in the portal. Plus, you will get all of the templates and documents you need to launch your podcast.

THE MODULES

You can start studying today. You can begin in module one by defining your show focus and developing your ideal client.

Each step has homework that you will submit in the private group for feedback.

As we go through this journey, you will begin creating your podcast step-by-step one step at a time. Module 2 will show you how to structure you show, prepare for each episode and how to interview.

Then, module 3 will teach you improve your show and process.

Module 4 shows you how to use your content to attract your clients and so on. You will have your podcast launched in 30 days.

We will begin the live calls soon. So, right now when you take action and join the program, you can get started and be on the path to launch your show in 30 days.

You’ve been saying, “One day I’ll launch my podcast.” One day is just a pipe dream unless you set a deadline and take action.

Here is your chance to launch your show in 30 days. Join the program to today and make today your “one day”.

Make a big impact in your business and in your life. Begin growing your authority and demonstrating your expertise.

Get enrolled at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/Start.

I am excited to work with you. Be sure to take advantage of the exclusive offer today and check out the bonuses.

Let’s get you launched in the next 30 days. I can’t wait to help you launch. Get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/start.

I’ll see you in the program.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How A Meathead Podcast Makes Money – PTC 328

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcasters often think you need to be a business coach or teach people how to make money online in order to make money with your podcast. That isn’t the case. To make money with your podcast, you simply need a passionate, thirsty audience.

Then, you need to be willing to take some smart chances until you find what works.

Today, I want to show you a podcast that is less than a year old and well on their way to generating income with their podcast. Grab a pen and paper. You’ll definitely want to take notes.

FREE TRAINING

Before we jump into it. Let me give you a great resource to help you make money with your podcast.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way to grow your audience and make money with your podcast, please go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth and join us for a free training to see if we can help you get some clarity, build a plan and reach your goals.

Come join us as I present “6 Ways To Use Your Content To Attract Your Ideal Clients”.

On this free training you are going to discover:

  • How to develop your personality to attract your ideal clients
  • Why sponsorships and ads are NOT the ideal way to generate revenue
  • How to grow your network with your podcast
  • And more!

It happens on Saturday, March 27th at 11a ET, 8a PT. Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you are looking for a mentor who can help you shortcut the process of making money with your podcast and avoid all of the pain of trial and error, this free training is for you. Let’s grow your community and start making money with your show.

MEATHEADS

Let me give a case study today of how this works. Sadie took my training, followed my program and launched her podcast with her cohost Sausha.

Their podcast is called Meathead Test Kitchen. The world of fitness and nutrition can be intimidating, but they are here to help make it a whole lot less scary. That’s what the podcast is all about.

They launched Meathead Test Kitchen in August. Their first episode was released on August 16th.

BE UNIQUE

The first thing you will notice about Meathead Test Kitchen is that it isn’t your middle-of-the-road podcast. These two have a definite style, swagger and personality. This isn’t your mom’s fitness and nutrition podcast.

If you want to stand out and get noticed, develop a brand and stand for something. You don’t have to be brash or in your face. You do need to pick a side and defend it. If you try to please everyone, you will please no one.

The reviews of Meathead Test Kitchen shows how they cut through. Here are some of their reviews.

“Dieting and fitness doesn’t have to be boring or tedious. Sadie and Sausha are here to prove it! Fun hosts and honest, easy to understand advice.”

“These ladies don’t beat around the bush, they are honest and easy to relate to. If swear words offend you, find another podcast.”

Pick a side and get noticed.

CONNECTION

Next, make powerful connections. If you want to grow and make money with your show, you need to connect with the right people.

Sadie and Sausha are growing their audience by connecting with the right influencers.

They are 31 episodes in. Just over six months of episodes and they have interviewed local business owners, a Titan games athlete and current Mrs. America contestant. They have interviewed a Bellator MMA fighter, CrossFit Games competitors, coaches, and a world record holding power lifter.

Sadie and Sausha use these guests to help get their show noticed. When influencers talk about your show, people take notice. Give them a reason to talk by interviewing them on your podcast.

If you want to make money with your podcast, you need to have the right people listening. These people should be your ideal clients. Interview guests who are already talking to this audience.

THIRSTY AUDIENCE

Gaining an audience isn’t enough. It needs to be the right audience.

The one thing you need to make money with your show is a thirsty audience. If you were selling water in the desert, you wouldn’t need much of a pitch to sell it at a great price. You just need a thirsty audience.

Don’t try to sell something without asking your ideal listener what they need. I know you feel like you already know. Believe me, you don’t. I thought I knew as well until I built 4 different offers that nobody wanted.

When I finally started doing market research before I built the course, people started buying before the course was even complete. Do your homework. If you want to know how to do that, let’s connect.

BE WHERE THEY ARE

Once you know who your ideal listers are, go play where they are already playing.

Sadie and Sausha recently started releasing the podcast with a full video component on their YouTube channel. They discovered their listeners were also big consumers of exercise videos.

They also have their podcast distributed through all major streaming platforms. Give your listeners plenty of options.

GIVE ‘EM WHAT THEY WANT

Now that they have built the audience, they can start offering the listeners solutions to their problems to make money with their show. They can also begin building a tribe of raving fans.

Sadie and Sausha recently started selling Meathead Test Kitchen merchandise, and have partnered with a local athleisure company to boost both brands. Again, leveraging more powerful influencers.

FIND OPTIONS

Sadie and Sausha will be releasing the first of many cookbook projects in the next few months. On their website you will find a “Shop” page with Amazon affiliate links to things their audience is already purchasing along with things the two mention on the show.

It is all about multiple streams of income selling things your listeners want to buy. They also have some other cool stuff up their sleeves for when the pandemic is over.

THE MAKE MONEY PLAN

Here is your plan. Build your brand. Stand for something. Find a thirsty audience. Figure out what they want. Build it and sell it to them. Then, build solutions to their other problems for multiple streams of income.

Everyone wins. Your listeners solve their problems. You make money with your show. Don’t overcomplicate it.

ARE YOU SERIOUS?

Are you really serious about building your audience and making money with your show? Have you been talking about it long enough and really ready to take action?

A hope and a wish isn’t going to make it happen. You need to get serious and take action. Take that first step.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way to grow your audience and make money with your podcast, please go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth and join us for a free training to see if we can help you get some clarity, build a plan and reach your goals.

Come join us as I present “6 Ways To Use Your Content To Attract Your Ideal Clients”.

On this free training you are going to discover:

  • How to develop your personality to attract your ideal clients
  • Why sponsorships and ads are NOT the ideal way to generate revenue
  • How to grow your network with your podcast
  • And more!

It happens on Saturday, March 27th at 11a ET, 8a PT. Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you are looking for a mentor who can help you shortcut the process of making money with your podcast and avoid all of the pain of trial and error, this free training is for you. Let’s grow your community and start making money with your show.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Time Saving Podcast Production Tips – PTC 327

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Is your podcast production eating your entire week? Do you feel like you edit and publish one episode only to start recording the next? On this episode, I want to help you streamline your process.

There are five steps to producing a show each week. Those are plan, record, edit, publish and promote. Then, repeat.

Today, I will show you how to save time in each of those areas to make you more efficient.

GET HELP TO EDIT

First, let me show you an option. You can always get someone to edit your show and do all of the dirty work for you.

How much time do you spend each week creating your podcast?

If you could cut your podcast production time in half, how could you better spend the time you save? You could spend time finding clients. Use the time to serve your clients better. Spend time creating more digital products to sell. Double down on your promotion time to grow your show.

Take the time you spend each week producing your show and cut it in half. Now, multiply that by four for the four weeks in the month. Dedicating those hours to revenue generation, how much money do you think you could make? Could you find a client or two to pay you a few hundred dollars to help them?

My team can produce your podcast every week for as little as $225 per month. Is that worth getting your time back?

BASIC EDIT SERVICES

The basic edit plan will make your show sound great. You record the episode and send the team your .mp3.

You get professional audio editing, including noise reduction, volume leveling, mixing and mastering. We will take care of adding your open and close. You get the finished .mp3 ready to be posted.

If you are repurposing your video as a podcast, you also get professional video editing with this package. This includes your YouTube thumbnail ready to be uploaded to your YouTube account.

Finally, you get an audiogram to help you promote your show.

All of this is just $225 each month for four completed episodes and videos.

EDITING PLUS

If you want to step up a level and add a little coaching to your plan, the Plus level is for you.

At this level, you get everything in the basic package to edit your show. You also get a 60-minute group coaching call each month to help you produce a better podcast. You get to ask questions and get the help you need.

On top of that, my team will take care of your show notes. They will handle uploading your audio to your podcast host. They will also upload your video to your YouTube channel.

To help you promote at this level, you will also receive a captioned social media video to help you grow your audience and attract more clients.

The Plus package is $495 per month for four episodes and videos.

GO PREMIUM

If you want to go all in, you need to check out the Premium package. This takes it all off of your hands.

With the Premium package, you get everything in the Basic and Plus packages. You also get a monthly, 30-minute, one-on-one coaching call with me. I will personally help you on your journey and overcome your struggles.

You also received advanced SEO-optimized show notes. This well help people find your podcast through organic search by ensuring the right keywords are included.

My team will also add timestamps to your episode along with the resources that you mention in the show. This will help your listeners find exactly what they want.

You will receive a custom blog header image for your episode. My team will also upload your show notes to your WordPress site. It is handled for you.

And to help you promote, you will receive a quote card taken from the episode. You can use this on social media to promote the episode and grow your audience. This also makes it easy for your guest to promote the show.

To have all of this done for you so you can spend your time growing your audience and building your business, and get one-on-one coaching with me to overcome your struggles, your investment is just $695 each month for four episodes and videos.

You can see each of these packages in detail and sign up to work with me and my team at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

Imagine what you could do with all of that time back. Let’s get started.

YOUR TIME TO EDIT

Now, if you decide to continue doing it on your own, find ways to save time.

It takes time to get ready to do each step. For instance when you are ready to record, it takes time to set up the gear, open the program, adjust your mic and headphones, find your production pieces, get in the right mindset, make sure you have some water and all of the other details.

On the surface, it doesn’t seem like a lot of time. I bet if you were to time the set up prep time and the time it takes you to shut it all down, you would be surprised that it is probably around 15 minutes.

TIME IT

Next time you are ready to record an episode, time it. Start the clock as soon as you decide to record the episode.

Let’s say at 2 you decide it’s time to head in and record. As soon as you get off the couch and start walking toward the mic, the clock starts. It stops as soon as you hit record.

As soon as you have saved the file and finished the session, start the clock again. It stops when you turn off the light and leave the room.

The total of those two periods is at least 15 minutes. Four episodes a month is costing you an hour in set up and tear down. If you record all four episodes in one session, you only set up and tear down once. You just saved 45 minutes in your month.

This is just one example. The more you can batch your work like this, the more time you will save.

Remember, you don’t have to do any of these steps at the same time. You don’t have to record and edit in the same sitting. You are better off recording four episodes at the same time and then editing all four at another time. Doing the same actions together is where you will save time.

PLAN

Let’s start with planning your episode. Break up planning into four parts. Then, do each part for multiple episodes at the same time.

Find the time in your day and week when you are most creative. For some of us that is morning. Others do best at night. Some are better on a weekday at lunch. Others find their creative muse on Sunday mornings. Find your right time.

Step one is creating topics. Spend ten minutes brainstorming as many topics for your podcast as possible. Shoot for 50 different topics. What does your audience what to learn? If you interview guests, who can help you teach them that topic?

Step two is selecting your ideal five. Pick five of the 50 topics that you would like to build out as episodes. These could have a theme or they could stand alone. Your choice.

Step three is outlining each episode. For each topic, list three to seven points you could discuss on this topic.

Finally step four is adding important details to each point.

This episode is a perfect example. I am covering five areas where you can save time. That was the outline I started to build out. Each of the five areas have a few important details, like these four steps of planning.

Five episodes are now ready to be recorded. You don’t have to fight writer’s block trying to figure out what this week’s episode will be all about. Grab the outline and start recording. 

RECORD

The next step in your process is recording. There are a few ways to save time when you record.

We already discussed the idea of saving set up and tear down time by recording multiple episodes at the same time. This is a big time saver.

You can also save time recording by setting up a studio that doesn’t need to be dismantled each time. This may be a cost issue or a lack of space. If you can swing it, removing the need to set up and tear down can make you more efficient.

Finally, you can save time recording interviews by preparing your guest ahead of time. I do not mean you should provide them the questions. Before your interview, you should give them a recording checklist to minimize the time it takes to troubleshoot their tech issues.

EDIT

Editing is probably the area where you can save the most time. The first thing you should do is stop worrying about saying uh and um so much. Very few people notice. It is natural in most conversation.

Make it easy to locate your editing points. If there is something you know you want to edit out of your show, leave a short gap of five to ten seconds. This will allow you to visually find your edit.

Create a palate for your show. If there are things you use for each episode, such as your open and close, put those pieces in a place you can find quickly each time you edit. Create a system to organize your audio so you can easily find it.

Finally, create a checklist. This will allow you to know quickly which pieces need to be completed each and every time. You just follow the process.

PUBLISH

When it comes to publishing your episode, what do you do each and every time that can be streamlined? I have created a template for my episode artwork. I can easily populate the template for each episode. It save a ton of time.

Create a show note template that you can fill in with the critical information your audience needs. Repurpose your show prep and outline for your show notes. Show notes take a lot of time.

Find ways to give your listener what she needs in your show notes without spending a full day on it. Ask yourself why a listener might come to your show notes in the first place. Put that in there. Then, add some content that will attract search engines.

To save time, create a process that is easy to follow.

PROMOTE

When it comes to promoting your show, create a consistent way to promote your show. Don’t try to do everything. Do the things that will make a difference.

Use the 80/20 rule when it comes to promoting your show. If you get more listeners by appearing on other shows, spend your time there. If Twitter isn’t where your audience hangs out, don’t waste your time.

Take some time to list the 20% of your promotion activities that make up 80% of the results. Do those things and eliminate the others.

GET RID OF IT

You can remove all of the editing headache from your weekly “to do” list and have my team help.

Let my team produce your podcast every week for as little as $225 per month. Get your time back.

You can see your editing options at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How Brodie’s Niche Made Over $1k In 3 Episodes – PTC 326

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There is a big misconception that narrowing your niche limits your potential. The truth is actually the opposite. The more narrow you make your niche the more defined your expertise will become.

CAN YOU HELP?

Before we jump in, I would love your help. I am refining my Audience Explosion Blueprint program, but I need some input from you to improve it. Could you give me 20 minutes of your time to answer 8 questions?

If you have been trying to grow your audience and make money with your show, it would help me a ton to know what you’re struggling with. This will help me understand where to improve the program.

You can grab a time on my calendar over the next two weeks at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/input. I promise to respect your time. Just 8 questions the help me understand what you need.

Let’s talk about your niche. 

MEDICAL NICHE

The best example of a niche is your doctor. When you have a general illness, you go see your general practitioner or family doctor. This is the physician that knows a little about everything.

When your doctor figures out the problem, you are then referred to the specialist. Which doctor gets paid more? The specialist gets paid more, because they are the best.

If you need knee replacement surgery, do you have your general practitioner do the work? Of course not. You go to a orthopedic surgeon. You want to see the expert who only focuses on knees.

PODCAST NICHE

The same is true with your podcast. Will your show be more popular if you are a business podcast or an online funnel marketing podcast?

All things being equal, the funnel podcast will be more popular. You know exactly what you get on that show. There is a really good chance we are going to talk about marketing funnels. I get it.

What is discussed on the business podcast? It could be renting retail space, negotiating contracts with your sales team, how to structure your board of directors, how to hire a media specialist, where to find your next director of operations, how to create online courses, what to look for in an accountant. Who knows what gets discussed? You never know if the topic is appropriate to your particular situation.

Do you need marketing funnels? If you are an online entrepreneur you do. Do you need business topics? Who knows?

YOUR NICHE

If you don’t have my Ideal Listener Development Worksheet, please download it and use it to develop your niche. This will help you define exactly who you attract and exactly what they need.

When you decide what your ideal listener needs, you will then know how to define your niche.

You should niche down at least twice to get to a niche that is narrow enough. If you want to be seen as the expert, your area of expertise needs to be focused.

Let’s say you want to create a podcast that helps salespeople. What does that mean? Will this podcast help business-to-business salespeople, retail salespeople, online salespeople or something else? We need to niche down.

Our podcast will help business-to-business salespeople. Now we need to decide what that looks like. Are these salespeople selling advertising to mom and pop businesses or salespeople doing large corporate sales?

If we niche down one more level, we could create a podcast that helps people transition into pharmaceutical sales.

Now, we can be an expert. Would it be easier to be known as the sales expert or the pharmaceutical sales transition expert? The narrow niche becomes easier to own.

NICHE CASE STUDY

I have a great case study for you. Today we talk to Brodie Sharpe, founder of RunSmarter.Online. He is a physiotherapist from Melbourne, Australia.

About 2 years into his career he became a recreational runner and loved it. Wanting to spend more time around runners, he started his passion project. This became the ‘Everyday Running Legends’ podcast where he would interview runners who had inspirational stories to tell.

Brodie also transitioned out of his private practice physio job and opened his own online physio clinic tailored only to helping runners.

After struggling to grow the business with an interview podcast, he launched a solo show that centered on his expertise. Still searching for success, he niched down and launched the ‘Overcoming Proximal Hamstring Tendinopathy Podcast‘.

Talk about niche. This show has been live for about 3 weeks now and only getting 80 listeners. However, the show has attracted 4 customers and generated over $1000! This is how a niche makes you so much more powerful.

We talk to Brodie about his journey, how and why he niched down and where he is going next.

Enjoy the conversation.

YOUR INPUT

I need a little input from you. I am refining my Audience Explosion Blueprint program. As I do, I need to know where you struggle. Could you give me 20 minutes of your time to answer 8 questions?

If you have been trying to grow your audience and make money with your show, this will help me understand where to improve the program.

You can grab a time on my calendar over the next two weeks at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/input. I promise to respect your time. Just 8 questions the help me understand what you need.

I really appreciate the help. Thanks for being here.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

5 Ways To Grow Your Podcast This Week – PTC 325

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you want to grow your audience, you need to find ways to reach new listeners. Promoting to your current listeners over and over again won’t do much to bring in new listeners. Find ways to get in front of people who are unaware of your show and invite them to listen.

On the show today, I am going to show you five ways you can find those new listeners over the next few days. You simply need to take action.

Before we jump into the five ideas, I have a little housekeeping.

PODCAST EDITING

First, if you want to free up time in your week that you spend editing your show, I can give you some help. I offer editing services for your show. This includes everything from basic show editing to full production and show notes.

Imagine what you could do to promote your show and grow your business if you had that time back every week. You can start with the basic package which will give you four shows a month. Or, you can check out the premium package with comes with one-on-one coaching, SEO-optimized show notes, images and thumbnails and more.

Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/edit. Click on the “show me what is in each package” to see the full details of each. I would liove to give you back some time in your week.

Next, let me turn you on to a fantastic opportunity.

FIND PARTNERS

There is an event coming up March 3rd through the 5th. It is called Collaborate. This is an incredible way to find true partners who can help you grow.

During this virtual event, you are placed in small breakout rooms of around 8 people just like you. These are online experts in various niches such as online business, mindset, health and more.

Attendees are coaches, authors, speakers, program leaders, producers of podcasts, radio shows and events. Every attendee is looking to connect and partner with others to help each other grow their businesses, impact and income.

When you are placed in the breakout room, each person in the room has 2 minutes to tell others who they are, what they do, what support they can offer other attendees and what support they need.

If you find someone who might make a good partner and fits your niche, you agree to connect in the next few days to determine how you might help each other.

You will literally meet over 100 people. Not all will fit your niche. That will depend on your target.

Let’s say you help small businesses set up their accounting books. In a breakout room you meet a coach who helps small business leaders with their sales process. The two of you have the same target audience but offer different services. That is where the collaboration comes in.

RESERVE YOUR SPOT

You can reserve your spot for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

However, there is an upgrade VIP option for only $47. I would highly recommend going VIP. You will find so much more value. You also get a directory of everyone who attends to help you find even more partners.

Get signed up. It will be the best three days you can invest to explode your next year.

I have attended Collaborate three times now. I’ve always gone VIP. This event has done more for my show and business than anything I’ve done. There were 40 people in my niche alone that I met at just one event. I meet more and more each time I attend.

Join Collaborate at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Let’s talk about other things you can do over the next week to grow your show.

GET INTERVIEWED

First, get interviewed on another show. We talk about this a ton. Finding complimentary shows in your niche is a great way to grow.

Reach out to a podcaster in your niche to begin the discussion. I’m sure you listen to a few shows who target the same audience you target. Let’s chat with those podcasters first.

Send the podcaster a note. Start with something specific you liked about an episode. “Hey, Erik! Great episode on growing your show. I’ve just sent three e-mails to other podcasters to see if we can swap interviews. Love the idea.” Keep it short.

Next, tell the podcaster that it appears you target the same audience in complimentary ways. “As I was listening to your show, it hit me. It sounds like you help coaches refine their funnel so they can get more clients. I help coaches transform their information into entertainment on their podcast to get more clients.”

Finally, ask for an opportunity to talk. You are NOT asking for an interview. Ask for a chat. “Would you have time over the next week to jump on a call to see how we might partner and help each other grow?”

Get the call booked. Spend the first 20 minutes finding out what they do. Then, spend the next 20 minutes telling them what you do. Spend the last 20 minutes brainstorming ways you can support each other.

A podcast interview on both sides might come of this. However, bigger opportunities might show up that you didn’t even consider.

This is the way Collaborate works. Rather then sending a cold e-mail, you are in a room for people looking for connections just like you. Again, find details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

YOUR GUESTS

Your guests are a great resource to help you promote your show. Though you cannot expect it of them, it sure is nice when they share your interview with their audience.

Reach out to the person you interviewed or mentioned in the podcast. Tell them the episode is live. Then, tell them you would greatly appreciate it if they would mention it to their following.

Make it easy for them. Write the copy. Create the social media graphic. The easier you can make it for your guest to share the episode, the more likely it will be that they actually share it.

The same is true when you answer questions on your show. If you receive an e-mail and you include that question on the show, reply to the e-mail and let them know you answered their question on the episode. Give them a link. Ask them to share it the same way you would ask your guest.

SWAP

To promote your show, you could swap mentions with another podcaster. So many podcasters think the only way to partner with another show is to get interviewed on the show. There are many other ways.

One great way to get your show promoted is to swap mentions in your newsletter. Connect with another podcaster in your niche who has a decent e-mail list. You will know they do if they have frequent lead magnets are mailing often.

Connect just like we talked about. Reach out to let them know you appreciate what they do. Be specific. Tell them you have similar audiences. Ask if they would like to partner to grow. If you connect, simply mention each other’s show in your e-mails to your audience.

You could say something like, “Hey, I found a really cool podcast I thought you might enjoy. As you are trying to grow your audience and make money with your show, you need to be sure your process is solid. Check out the Yadda Yadda show. They help you build your process from lead magnet to shopping cart.”

You can find partners just like this at Collaborate. Check it out at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/colllaborate.

SUPERFANS

The fourth way to promote your show is by leveraging your superfans. These people will be evangelists for your show, because they love it. If anyone will promote your show, it will be these people. You simply need to empower them.

First, create a list of superfans. Find the people that comment on your episodes, send you e-mail about the show and interact with you on Facebook. You know who they are. You might have 3 or 37. Write them down.

Next, create a post on Facebook and tag your superfans. Be sure to ask a question, so the post starts getting some interaction and gets seen by others.

This could be something like, “Just want to thank a bunch of the listeners to Podcast Talent Coach. Thanks to Bruce, Elaine, Greg, Josh, TaVona, Oscar, Laura, Chris, Rick, Prasha, Andy, Cat, Tony, Kim, Christine and so many others. I really appreciate you listening to the show. What is one idea you’ve picked up from the show that has helped your podcast?”

Be sure to respond to everyone who comments. Interact. If you can get some traction with the post, friends of your superfans will start to see the interaction. Mention your show by name so others can find it.

ADD A LINK

My final idea today is to add a link to your show in your e-mail signature. Make it easy to find your show.

Next, add some valuable content in the email with a call-to-action. This could be a free download or checklist or top 5 ideas. Make it something your audience can use. Make sure it is valuable.

Finally, invite your subscribers to share it with a friend. Say something like, “If you know someone who could use this information as well, please forward this e-mail to them. They can have this free resource as well.”

TAKE ACTION

There you go. Five ideas to grow your audience this week. Now, these ideas will do nothing to grow your audience unless you actually take action and do something.

Pick one of these ideas and take action. If you can get one done, select another and take more action. I would rather see you complete one than start all five and complete none of them.

If you want to start making powerful connections with others who can help you grow, I really encourage you to attend Collaborate. It is an amazing event that can help you skyrocket your growth. Get all of the details for Collaborate at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Have a great week.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Breaking Down An Effective Introduction – PTC 324

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The introduction of your podcast is probably the most critical part of your show. A typical listener will give you between 90 seconds and a few minutes to entice them to stick around. Don’t blow it. You can’t catch up to a slow start.

Today, we are going to break down six different podcast intros. I will show you which parts of the introduction are effective and which are not.

When you create your podcast introduction, you need to put yourself in the shoes of your listener. What is in it for them? That is what they will be asking. How will they be better by the end of the episode?

If you are going to use a clip from the episode at the beginning, you need to open a conversation loop. Tease the content to come by creating some intrigue. Make your listener want to stick around. If you can’t do this, don’t use a clip.

The voiceover intro should tell your listener who you help, what you help them do and why. You do not need to structure it in those exact words. However, your intro should answer those questions.

As an example, our first sample episode opens with, “Do you love your work? Do you think it’s possible? You’re about to find out.”

Do you know what this show is all about? It sounds like a show about finding a career that you love. I don’t even need to tell you the name of the podcast.

Edit your introduction. Keep it short. Let it give your episode momentum. Don’t coast and wander your way into the show. Start quickly. Capture the attention of your listener and get them excited about the content.

If you would like help with your introduction, grab my Podcast Introduction template at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/intro.

Ok, let’s jump into the intros. First up is “48 Days to the Work You Love” with Dan Miller.

48 DAYS TO THE WORK YOU LOVE WITH DAN MILLER

Host: Well, a listener says, “Hey Dan … all this talk about setting goals and getting things done sounds great but, I’m a thinker. Not a doer.”

(VO over music bed) Do you love your work? Do you think it’s possible? Well, you’re about to find out. It’s time for 48 Days to the Work You Love with Dan Miller on the 48 Days online radio show. Whether you need a professional tune up, or a work overhaul, this is the program for you. Now here’s your host, Dan Miller.

Host: Well, what do you think? Do you need a tune up or a complete overhaul? You know, we’re still here at the beginning of the year. A great time to be looking at that. Just gonna have some little kind of subtle realignment to what you’re gonna do? Or, are you gonna really make a break and head off in a new direction? We’re hearing from lots of you who are doing both of those things. Delighted to hear the plans you’re making.

You know, last week, the lead in was, “I know what to do, but can’t make myself do it.” We had a whole lot of you that that apparently kind of struck a nerve, and you commented on that. I’m delighted to have you do so. We’re gonna talk some more about that. What is it that keeps us from doing? There may be some unique kind of built-in traits that we have that make us more a thinker than a doer. Well, we’ll look at that.

So, questions … “I know what I need to do, but I’m easily turned back to wonder and invention.” Somebody asked, “How can I make some money off the land I just inherited?” “Where do you find customers who aren’t broke?” Love that question. We’re gonna dig in.

INTRODUCTION ANALYSIS

First, the title of the episode doesn’t get too cute. It let’s you know what the podcast is all about. “48 Days To The Work You Love” sounds like a career search podcast. The name isn’t too clever or too cool for the room.

The tease to open the podcast is effective. It is short and to the point, while creating anticipation of what is to come. The tease gets you guessing what the quote is all about. It makes you want to stick around to close the circle.

The voiceover introduction starts with the listener point of view. “Do you love your work? Do you think it’s possible? Well, you’re about to find out.” These three sentences reinforce exactly what this podcast is all about. The intro makes it relevant to you. We don’t waste a lot of time with information you don’t need.

Dan comes in after that with the overview of this particular episode. We know what the podcast is all about. He now tells us how this particular episode is special. What makes this one different than the others.

Again, he begins in the shoes of the listener with, “Well, what do you think? Do you need a tune up or a complete overhaul?” He gets the listener invested in the content.

Dan does a nice job creating social proof. He uses phrases like, “We’re hearing from lots of you”, “Delighted to hear the plans you’re making”, “and you commented on that”, and “So, questions …” All of these statements show listeners exactly what he wants them to do.

Finally, Dan gives an outline of the questions he will address on this episode. This is sort of a table of contents.

Overall, this is a solid introduction.

BUSINESS UNUSUAL

The next introduction is “Business Unusual” with Barbara Corcoran from Shark Tank.

(Host) Hey this is Barbara Corcoran you are now tuned in to “Business Unusual”. And, everything you ever learned about business, throw it out the window. I’m gonna tell you the real deal. Listen in.

Today, I’m gonna answer all your burning question about work, life, starting a company, getting on track, and much much more. Be sure to call into the “Business Unusual hotline” with your question at 888-BARBARA. That’s 888- BARBARA. But first today we’re gonna be talking about moms getting back in the workforce. What do you do when you put your life on pause, or at least your career on pause, to raise a bunch of kids and you want to get back? Listen in. I’m going to give you great advice.

INTRODUCTION ANALYSIS

This is a solid intro. It doesn’t start with your typical sample clip from the episode. Barbara gets right into it.

A sample clip isn’t necessary. If you plan to use a clip to tease the episode, you need to do it properly. A teaser clip should create some anticipation. It should open the loop that needs to be closed by listening to the show. Pulling a random clip doesn’t accomplish either of those.

Barbara tells us exactly what the podcast is all about. You know she tells it like it is. Her intro is focused on you. She says, “I’m gonna answer all your burning question about work, life, starting a company, getting on track, and much much more.” Barbara also gives you the phone number to participate.

She effectively tells you what the podcast is about, so you know it is right for you. Barbara then says, “Today we’re gonna be talking about moms getting back in the workforce. What do you do when you put your life on pause, or at least your career on pause, to raise a bunch of kids and you want to get back? Listen in.” She sets up the content for today to keep you around for the entire episode.

This whole intro is short and sweet. I love the momentum it creates.

FLIPPED LIFESTYLE

Next is the “Flipped Lifestyle” podcast with Shane and Jocelyn Sams. 

(Host) Hey y’all! On today’s podcast we welcome back Brooke Butcher. Last time Brooke was on the show, she was just starting out and growing her online nursing community. On this episode we get to celebrate Brooke’s growing membership and her incredible milestone. Brooke just quit her job and works full-time online. On today’s podcast Shane is helping Brooke get used to her new, self-employed, location independent lifestyle as well as growing her nursing membership. You’ll learn how to balance your time between business and life while working at home, promotions to help grow your membership site and how to know when it’s time to go full-time online. You are going to love today’s podcast. Enjoy the show.

(Voiceover) Welcome to the “Flipped Lifestyle” podcast, where life always comes before work. We’re your hosts, Shane and Jocelyn Sams. We are a real family who figured out how to make our entire living online. Now we help other families do the same. Are you ready to flip your life? Alright. Let’s get started.

(Host) What’s going on everybody? Welcome back to the “Flipped Lifestyle” podcast. It is great to be back with you today and I am super excited because not only is this an amazing member of the Flip Your Life community on the show, it is a repeat guest. It is someone we know and love and we are going to be celebrating some major, major wins in her online business and her membership world today. Welcome back to the program Brooke Butcher.

INTRODUCTION ANALYSIS

This intro is solid, but could be cleaned up a bit. The opening bit delivered by Jocelyn before the voiceover says much the same thing Shane says after the intro.

Jocelyn’s part could have been cut in half. This portion is intended to get you to listen to the rest of the episode. We don’t need a full guest introduction here. This portion would have been sufficient:

“On today’s podcast Shane is helping Brooke get used to her new self-employed, location independent lifestyle as well as growing her nursing membership. You’ll learn how to balance your time between business and life while working at home, promotions to help grow your membership site and how to know when it’s time to go full-time online. You are going to love today’s podcast. Enjoy the show.”

After this part, Jocelyn says Brooke is self-employed, location independent and the owner of a nursing membership site. We’re going to learn about time management and how to promote our site.

Shane then comes on and again tells us that Brooke has a membership site. We got that in Jocelyn’s portion. He says she is a repeat guest. We know that, too. Finally, he tells us we are going to celebrate some major wins in her membership. Jocelyn told us that as well.

I do like the voiceover intro. We know what the show is about. It is focused on us.

“Welcome to the ‘Flipped Lifestyle’ podcast, where life always comes before work. We’re your hosts, Shane and Jocelyn Sams. We are a real family who figured out how to make our entire living online. Now we help other families do the same. Are you ready to flip your life? Alright. Let’s get started.”

With this intro, we know exactly what the show is all about and what we are getting. We know how we will be better off when the episode is over.

I also like the way Shane doesn’t waste much time before he jumps into the interview. Tell us what we need to know to understand this interview is applicable to my situation.

SPEAK UP

The next podcast is “Speak Up” with Matthew and Elysha Dicks.

(Host) Welcome to “Speak Up”, a podcast about telling better stories. This is episode 103. I’m Elysha Dicks. I’m the Executive Director of Speak Up. We are a Hartford-based storytelling organization. We produce shows, teach workshops, and help people find and tell better stories.

And I am Matthew Dicks. I am the husband of Elysha Dicks. I am also the Artistic Director of Speak Up. I’m a storyteller myself. I’m an author of several novels. And the non-fiction title “Storyworthy: Engage, Teach and Persuade and Change Your Life Through the Power of Storytelling”. A book that will help you become a better story teller.

How are you doing today, honey?

I am fine.

Excellent.

How are you?

I am great. I am happy to be podcasting again with you.

Yes.

It’s a glorious summer day. We only have two weeks left of our summer vacation before we have to return to school, but we are trying to suck the marrow out of every minute we have.

That sounds gross.

No, it’s a phrase.

I know it’s a phrase. That doesn’t mean it’s good.

Alright. It’s poetry. You’re supposed to suck the marrow out of life.

I know I’ve heard it before. This one I’m going to pass on.

Alright I’m going to be sucking the marrow over here.

Suck it by yourself.

Do you have any follow up for us honey?

Not that I can think of today, how about you?

INTRODUCTION ANALYSIS

“Welcome to ‘Speak Up’, a podcast about telling better stories.” This is probably the shortest intro that tells us exactly what the show is all about. I like this a lot. No questions here.

However, they follow it with “episode 103”. Is that important? Not really. That doesn’t have anything to do with anything. Leave it out.

Elysha then gives us their pedigree. I usually suggest podcasters start in the shoes of the listener. However, this is effective in giving the audience a reason to believe what they have to say. This intro gives them credibility.

We also know they teach workshops and produce shows. We know they know what they are doing. If we want more of what they have to offer, we also know we can get it.

The intro is followed by some chit chat. I love the way the play off each other. It gives us a sense of their style and sense of humor. However, it gives us no reason to stick around. You can’t catch up to a slow start.

If Elysha and Matthew took some of their story teachings, they would realize they need to start strong. Set the stage. Suck me in. Give me a reason to care.

“How are you? Fine. Glad to be podcasting. Have two weeks left in summer break.” I’m getting fidgety listening to this. I’m inclined to find something more compelling. They need to hook me sooner.

Most people give themselves anywhere between 90 seconds and a few minutes to decide if they will stick with an episode or find something else. Make it count.

INSPIRED MONEY

This one is “Inspired Money” with Andy Wang.

(Clip) Today on “Inspired Money” … Take this year, what a crazy year we’ve been in. So if I think that nobody’s hiring, there’s no opportunity for a small businesses, they’re all shutting down, that we’re all going to get sick and then it’s going to kill a whole lot of us, well, there’s some pieces of reality in there. If that’s what is dominant in my mind, I’m dead in the water. I’m not going to start a profitable business. I’m not going to see new opportunities. But if I think wow, this is a challenging time. With every challenge there’s the equal seeds of opportunity. If I believe that, then I look at this, ok, i didn’t expect this to happen. Yes, it closed this door. What am I going to find if I just re-direct a little bit in terms of a new opportunity?

This is episode 163 with career coach and author of “48 Days To The Work You Love”, Dan Miller.

(Voiceover) Welcome to “Inspired Money”. My name is Andy Wang. A managing partner at Runnymede Capital Management. Each week we bring you an interesting person to help you get inspired, shift your perspectives on money and achieve incredible things. From making it to giving it away, inspired money means making a difference, creating something bigger than oneself, and maybe, just maybe, making the world a better place. Thank you for joining me.

(Host) Hey inspired money maker, welcome back. If this is your first time listening welcome. Are you happy in your career? Do you feel like you found your calling? So many people aren’t quite sure and experience midlife crisis. I want to open with a quote from our guest. “Success is never an accident. It typically starts with imagination, becomes a dream, stimulates a goal, grows into a plan of action, which then inevitably meets with opportunity. Don’t get stuck along the way.” That’s Dan Miller. He’s author of the New York Times best-selling books “48 Days To The Work You Love”, “No More Dreaded Mondays”, and “Wisdom Meets Passion”. He also hosts the top ranked career podcast “48 Days to the Work You Love Internet Radio Show”.

INTRODUCTION ANALYSIS

The clip at the beginning of this episode sets up the interview. We get inspired with just a few sentences. We also end with a question, which opens the loop. The guest ends with, “What am I going to find if I just re-direct a little bit in terms of a new opportunity?” That’s what the episode is all about.

The voiceover part of the intro tells us what the podcast is all about. “Each week we bring you an interesting person to help you get inspired, shift your perspectives on money and achieve incredible things. From making it to giving it away, inspired money means making a difference, creating something bigger than oneself, and maybe, just maybe, making the world a better place.” We know what we’re going to get.

When you create your intro, tell your listener how they will be better after listening to an episode. What’s in it for me? This intro does exactly that.

Andy then introduces Dan. He gives us just enough to find his guest credible. He has written a few New York Times bestselling books and he hosts an online radio show. I’m good with that. I’ll listen.

The introduction of your guest only needs to provide your listener with enough information to make them care and want to stick around for more. It doesn’t matter that Dan is a career coach or that he has started multiple businesses. Just give us enough to want more.

SCREW THE NINE TO FIVE

The next show is “Screw The Nine To Five” with Jill and Josh Stanton.

(Clip) Your mission is to pay back how much you spent on ads. I’m getting all these customers coming in. Now, I’m building a customer list. And then you have a flagship program or one-on-one coaching and it’s so much easier to upgrade an already existing customer than it is the first acquiring of them.

Yeah.

Right? Once you get them in the door and you rock their world they’re going to be like, “This guy is awesome. I wonder what else they have.”

(Voiceover) Warning. This podcast may cause you to quit your job, and start a business. What’s up? We’re Jill and Josh Stanton. And we help people quit their jobs. Right now you’re joined by tens of thousands of up-and-coming entrepreneurs all around the world who are using their commute to redefine their lives and build a business online. So if you’re ready to create the financial freedom, time freedom, location freedom and personal freedom you crave so you can do what you want when you want, then turn up the volume and let’s do this thing. This is the “Screw the 9 to 5” podcast.

(Host) Hey! Welcome back to another episode of the “Screw The Nine to Five” podcast. Today we are jammin’ on if we were to start all over again … no audience, no revenue, none of the things … how would we build this business from scratch?

INTRODUCTION ANALYSIS

The clip at the beginning of this show does very little for me. At the end of the full opening, we know the episode is about “if we had to do it all over again, what would we do?”

The intro clip is all about, “Your mission is to pay back how much you spent on ads” or “getting a customer is harder than keeping a customer.” What does that have to do with anything? It doesn’t open a loop or create any intrigue. Be sure to tease effectively.

Now, I do love their voiceover intro. “Warning” is a great way to start. “You are joined by tens of thousands” shows social proof. They talk all about the life I want to create. This is all perfect. They are in my shoes and telling me the benefit.

When Jill comes back in with “Today we’re jammin’ on starting over again”, you get a sense of how she rolls. She jumps right into the content. The momentum is great.

The intro overall is nice and short. It would be much stronger if they had just used a more effective clip at the beginning.

TEMPLATE

If you need help creating your introduction, get my introduction template at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/intro. This will help you shape the opening of your podcast.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Difference In Your Next 12 Months With Lisa Sasso – PTC 323

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Where do you want to go in the next 12 months? If we are a year from today and we are looking back over the past year, what would need to happen for you to be happy with your results? This is where your goals begin.

CREATE SPECIFIC GOALS

Be specific as you set your goals. How many downloads would be a success? If you have a goal to make money with your podcast, how much? What is the timeframe?

When you are specific with your goals, you are able to visualize that victory.

What are you selling? Do the math. How much do you need to sell to reach your specific goal?

As the old saying goes, when you don’t know where you are going, any road will get you there. Let’s not wander through the next year. Set specific goals. Then, take specific action to reach those goals.

Let’s say you have a goal to lose weight. At the end of the year, your weight has gone from 234 pounds to 232 pounds, did you reach your goal? You lost two pounds. You lost weight. Is that a success? Possibly. But probably not quite what you were expecting.

Without a specific goal, you will not be able to make a big difference in your journey.

CRUNCH THE NUMBERS

Do you want to grow your downloads? What is that number? What does growth look like?

Do you want to make money with your podcast? How much? How will you do that?

You need to crunch the numbers to define your actions. If you haven’t clearly defined your goal, you can’t make the numbers work. You haven’t determined the sum of the actions yet.

If you want to grow your listeners, pick a number. Let’s suppose you want to grow your downloads by an average of 50 downloads per episode. How many subscribers do you need to attract to your podcast each week? About 12. 50 downloads divided by 4 weeks is a touch over 12. About two a day.

Now that we have worked the numbers, we can figure out the actions that will help us attract two subscribers a day.

How much money do you want to make with your podcast? Do the math and figure out what that would equal per week. Then, find something to sell that could bring in that income. Just crunch the numbers. Break it down.

Once you break it down, determine the steps you need to take to help you reach those goals.

FREE TRAINING

I can help you put all of this together. Join me for a free training on Tuesday called “6 Ways To Make Money With Your Podcast”. In this workshop, I will walk you through the process of creating your strategy. And, it’s free.

Sign up at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you haven’t set your goals, you will get the same thing in 2021 that you’ve been getting for the last few years. No specific results. Very little progress toward your dreams. More frustration.

Spend an hour with me and let me help you lay it out. Sign up at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

GOALS WITH LISA SASSO

Today, I’ve invited Lisa Sasso to join us to help us clarify our goals. She is a goal-setting expert.

Lisa Sasso has an MBA from Bentley University and is a Certified Executive Coach. She is a Certified Professional Coactive Coach, certified by the Coaches Training Institute. She is also a Professional Certified Coach from the International Coach Federation.

Lisa empowers professionals to achieve their personal and professional goals with accountability, balance and gratitude to reach their greatest potential.

Find Lisa at www.LisaSasso.com.

Start setting your goals today. As Lisa suggests, use SMART ART goals to be specific and visualize your destination.

If you want the same as you’ve always been getting, keep doing the same thing. If you want different results, take action. Define your goals. Develop your strategy. Then, take action.

Your journey starts today. Enjoy the ride.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your Why and My Story – PTC322

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you want to create a successful podcast, you need a strong “why”. If you don’t have a powerful reason for creating your show, it will feel like work trying to record it each week. This week, I will show you my “why” and share my story.

TRAINING

Before we start, I have a few great resources for you this week.

I am doing another free workshop for you. It is called “6 Ways To Make Money With Your Podcast”. If you want to make money with your podcast, this will help you develop your strategy.

In this workshop, we will develop ideas for your show. You will receive a workbook to give you a clear focus for your strategy.

Do you want to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show?

Do you want to grow your audience to consistently produce your show and promote your content in just a few minutes a day?

On this training, you will discover …

  • How to transform your show into a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid these pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode to grow your audience
  • And much more

Get registered at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/growth.

LIBSYN

If you need a host for your audio, be careful of the free services. Companies that offer their service for free often have a difficult time making money. If they aren’t making money, they can’t stay in business very long.

If your hosting company closes their doors and goes away, your audio goes away as well. All of your work is down the drain. Find a solid company and pay for great service.

I am now an affiliate of Libsyn. My show has been hosted on Libsyn since it began back in 2013. They also have fantastic support to help you set up your feed and move your show if you need it.

You can get your first month free using the coupon code PTC at Libsyn.com.

PODCAST EDITING

If you are spending too much time editing and posting your podcast and not enough time trying to attract listeners or building a business around your show, I now have a team ready to takeover your editing.

There are three packages available. You can start with the basic service that includes simple editing, mixing and mastering. Or you can go all in with the premium service that handles YouTube video, promoting, SEO, timestamps, show notes, and more.

You can find all of the packages at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

WHY YOU NEED A WHY

To build your podcast audience, you need a strong “why”. Building an audience takes consistency. Consistency builds trust.

People are creatures of habit. They typically listen to your podcast on the same day each week. It is a habit.

When your listeners come for your show, you new episode better be there. If they come and you haven’t posted on schedule, your credibility begins to deteriorate. You said you would do something and you didn’t.

Getting into the studio and recording a new episode every week takes dedication. If your purpose isn’t well-defined, it can become a struggle to make yourself stick to the schedule.

When you have a burning desire to lose weight, going to the gym is much easier. The same is true with your podcast. When you have a true, devoted “why” and purpose, getting into the studio become easier.

Find your “why” somewhere in your story. How did you get here? Why are you passionate about your subject and niche?

MY STORY

My whole life I wanted to own my own business and be my own boss. I grew up with a single mom in a household that was probably in the low income bracket, but I never knew it.

Sure, we were challenged by money. We may have been broke at one time or another. But we were never poor. My mom never had that mentality.

Mom waited tables at night, cleaned houses during the day, and created amazing wedding cakes on the side. She did whatever it took to provide for us.

That is probably why I never knew how little money we had. It wasn’t until I had to fill out financial aid forms for college that I discovered our situation. The application required parental tax forms.

My mom’s tax return said she made $12,013 in the past year. Even in the 80s, $12k wasn’t a lot to live on.

She taught my brother and me the value of hard work. And I started early.

I was hustling Christmas cards door-to-door off the back of Boys Life magazine by the age of 10. When I was 12, I bought two cases of gum at a white elephant sale and sold it out of my school locker.

If there was a gig to be had, I was trying it. We held magic shows and homemade haunted houses for the kids in the neighborhood in our garage. I was throwing newspapers and babysitting.

When I was 15, I was doing magic shows for birthday parties. My sister-in-law was my agent booking me gigs. Her son was my first show.

ARCHITECTURE

By the time I was 12, I knew I wanted to be an architect and own my own firm. I loved being creative within a set of strict parameters. It was my creative and analytical sides working together.

I started taking classes and had my first job as a draftsman by 17. I was on my way.

College took me to the University of Nebraska to study architecture at one of the best schools in the country. However by the third year, I realized I was on the wrong path.

Computers had come in and taken over architecture. It lost the magic drafting had once held for me. My corporate ladder was leaning against the wrong wall.

THE NEW DOOR

Then one day, a new door opened for me. I discovered radio.

My brother was working part-time at a local radio station. The manager called to see if my brother could fill in for somebody, but my brother wasn’t home. I knew the manager from another job I held. He asked if I would be interested in some part-time hours at the station.

I was a broke college kid at the time. Extra money is always a good thing when you’re in college. So, I took the gig.

For my architecture degree, I needed a few electives. Like any good college student, I looked for the easy classes and found Broadcasting for the Non-Major. I was already working in radio. How hard could that class be?

One night in class, the manager of the campus station came into the room. He said he was looking for a music director for the station. No experience necessary. No need to be a journalism major.

I had always loved music and was a broke college kid. Extra money is always a good thing when you’re in college. So, I took the gig … and loved it.

That gig turned into a full-time opportunity at another local station. Soon, I was building a career in broadcasting.

I finished my architecture degree and stayed in radio. That first full-time job paid me $12,000 a year. Though it was the same money my mom was making, my parents thought I was crazy. We just paid for a degree in architecture and I was taking a radio job for $12k.

NOT ENOUGH

Though I was having a lot of fun, the credit card companies and the tax man were soon hunting me down. Turns out it is hard to make ends meet on $12k.

I picked up another job in a warehouse and a third job DJing weddings. Just like mom taught me, I did what I had to do to climb out of that hole.

Soon I was making $26,000. Then $36k. Then $46k. I paid my dues doing overnight radio, but it was paying off.

My goal was to eventually own my own radio station. My desire to own my own business and be my own boss was still there. It just looked a little different. I even got my Masters Degree in Business Administration to help make my dream come true.

I had a passion for creating great radio. Coaching the talent was my favorite part of the job. I learned all I could building amazing radio stations with great music, entertaining personalities and fun promotions. 

One time, we had half a dozen contestants spend a week in a truly haunted house doing various challenges to win a trip to the Grammy Awards.

Another contest we created involved putting 6 listeners in a van to travel across the country to New York City. Along the way, they would do various challenges in different cities and vote someone off the trip. That loser would get bussed back to town as the others continued along the journey. The winner got to see the Michael Jackson tribute concert in NYC.

One winter, we invited listeners to build sleds out of cardboard boxes and clear plastic tape. They could decorate the racer any way they would like. On Saturday, we brought everyone out to the ski park to race the boxes down the hill. The winner got a wad of cash.

The promotions and marketing plans we were creating were generating buzz in the market. This was my life and I loved it.

CHANGING OF THE GUARD

Until one day, radio became big business. With the passage of the telecom act in the late 80s, radio started to change over the next decade. Suddenly, the little guy was out and large corporations were in.

Big companies started buying all of the stations. Radio become homogenized. The little guys could no longer buy the good stations. It all started sounding the same.

This was no longer the dream I had. The creativity and entrepreneurial nature of radio had been sucked out. It was replaced with best practices and formulas.

PODCASTING

That’s when I discovered podcasting. The creativity returned. All of the freedom was back. We could one again entertain and control our own shows.

I finally started to really be myself and develop my own personal brand. Rather than being somebody others wanted me to be, I was allowed to be me.

Now, I have a thriving business helping others discover that same passion. I show podcasters how to create great content, grow an audience and build a business around their show without spending 30 years learning it like I did.

The magic is back and I’m spreading it as much as I can.

MY WHY

That is why I do this show every week. My “why” drives me to give you great content you can use each and every week. A burning desire makes it easy to get into the studio every week and produce this podcast.

Take 30 minutes this week and write your story. What is your true “why”? When you find it, your podcast content will start pouring out of you.

I would love to help you even more. Join me for my for my free workshop.

Sign up at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

It is a free workshop for you called “6 Ways To Make Money With Your Podcast”. If you want to make money with your podcast, this will help you develop your strategy.

In this workshop, we will develop ideas for your show. You will receive a workbook to help you develop a clear focus for your strategy.

If you want to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show, and grow your audience and promote your content in just a few minutes a day, this workshop is for you.

Get registered at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/growth. I’ll see you there.

Have a great week.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Attract Clients With Your Podcast [Part 2] – PTC 321

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Roger Killen and the Vancouver Business Network recently invited me to present to their group. I taught them how to attract clients with a podcast.

Over the course of an hour, these entrepreneurs learned how to grow a podcast audience and attract their ideal clients with their content. I thought you might benefit from the content as well.

This presentation was an hour long. Rather than doubling the length of my typical episode, I’ve divided it into two episodes.

This is the is the second half of that presentation. You can hear part on in episode 320.

TRAINING

I have a few great resources for you this week.

I am doing another free workshop for you. It is called “6 Ways To Make Money With Your Podcast”. If you want to make money with your podcast, this will help you develop your strategy.

This workshop will go deeper than the training I’ve given you on these two episodes. We will actually develop ideas for your show. You will receive a workbook to give you a clear focus for your strategy.

Do you want to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show?

Do you want to grow your audience to consistently produce and promote your content in just a few minutes a day?

On this training, you will discover …

  • How to transform your show into a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid these pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode to grow your audience
  • And much more

Get registered at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/growth.

LIBSYN

If you need a host for your audio, be careful of the free services. Companies that offer their service for free often have a difficult time making money. If they aren’t making money, they can’t stay in business very long.

If your hosting company closes their doors and goes away, your audio goes away as well. All of your work is down the drain. Find a solid company and pay for great service.

I am now an affiliate of Libsyn. My show has been hosted on Libsyn since it began back in 2013. They also have fantastic support to help you set up your feed and move your show if you need it.

You can get your first month free using the coupon code PTC at Libsyn.com.

PODCAST EDITING

If you are spending too much time editing and posting your podcast and not enough time trying to attract listeners or building a business around your show, I now have a team ready to takeover your editing.

There are three packages available. You can start with the basic service that includes simple editing, mixing and mastering. Or you can go all in with the premium service that handles YouTube video, promoting, SEO, timestamps, show notes, and more.

You can find all of the packages at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

TRAINING

In this second half of the training I did for the Vancouver Business Network, I will show you the 3 big challenges most podcasters face when growing their audience and how you can overcome those challenges.

The 6 reasons podcasts don’t make money are laid out in this episode.

Many people make podcasting more difficult than it needs to be. I will show you how to make it much easier.

You also will learn the three Ps necessary for successful content. These are secrets most podcast gurus don’t teach you.

LAUNCH HELP

If you haven’t launched your podcast yet, I offer a free mini-course in this presentation as well. You can find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/launch.

I also mention 7 ways to attract your ideal clients using a podcast. You can find that free training atwww.PodcastTalentCoach.com/attract.

Again, you can catch up with the first part of this presentation on in episode 320.

Enjoy the session.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Attract Clients With Your Podcast [Part 1] – PTC 320

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Roger Killen and the Vancouver Business Network recently invited me to present to their group. I taught them how to attract clients with a podcast.

Over the course of an hour, these entrepreneurs learned how to grow a podcast audience and attract their ideal clients with their content. I thought you might benefit from the content as well.

This presentation was an hour long. Rather than doubling the length of my typical episode, I’ve divided it into two episodes.

COURSE CREATION SUMMIT

I have a few great resources for you this week.

When I built Audience Explosion Blueprint, I already had four paid participants before I even launched the course. To make it even better, they told me what I should put in the program to make it easy for them to give me money for it. How great is that!?!?!

Would you like to learn how to fill up your classes with paying clients before you have even launched your program? Join the upcoming Course Creation Summit FOR FREE! Experts will share with you their secrets for how you can create profitable online courses.

In fact, I will be part of the summit on Thursday, January 28th around 11:30a Central Time.

Courses allow you to do the work once and then sell it over and over again.

Get your free ticket now to course creation summit. The event runs all week. If you want to do the work once and sell it over and over again, a course can help you do that. Come learn how.

You can get your seat for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/CreateMyCourse.

LIBSYN

If you need a host for your audio, be careful of the free services. Companies that offer their service for free often have a difficult time making money. If they aren’t making money, they can’t stay in business very long.

If your hosting company closes their doors and goes away, your audio goes away as well. All of your work is down the drain. Find a solid company and pay for great service.

I am now an affiliate of Libsyn. My show has been hosted on Libsyn since it began back in 2013. They also have fantastic support to help you set up your feed and move your show if you need it.

You can get your first month free using the coupon code PTC at Libsyn.com.

PODCAST EDITING

If you are spending too much time editing and posting your podcast and not enough time trying to attract listeners or building a business around your show, I now have a team ready to takeover your editing.

There are three packages available. You can start with the basic service that includes simple editing, mixing and mastering. Or you can go all in with the premium service that handles YouTube video, promoting, SEO, timestamps, show notes, and more.

You can find all of the packages at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

MENTORSHIP

Finally, this is the last call for my Podcast Profits Mentorship. This opportunity is very limited.

This is a special no-risk opportunity for a very limited number of podcasters.

You won’t have to pay thousands or even a few dollars to join this exclusive group. However, you will need to be a great fit.

In this group, I will help you grow your podcast and make money with your show. It comes with no risk to you.

I am looking for 6 podcasters to join Podcast Profits Mentorship.

In this exclusive group, you will …

  • Grow your audience and influence
  • Develop a product or service to sell
  • Build a framework to make money with your show
  • Participate in a small mastermind to help you reach your goals

Membership in this group comes with no risk. You pay me nothing up front. I only get paid a commission of 20% when you make money with your show, similar to most affiliate programs.

To keep the group small, 6 podcasters will be selected from all applications. I want to be sure I have time to give each member the attention they need to succeed.

To qualify for the group, you must …

  • Have published 25 episodes
  • Be willing to attend a 90-minute call every week
  • Be willing to spend 30 minutes a day to grow your audience and business
  • Share with me your download and revenue data during the program
  • Allow me to use your success as a case study

The program begins February 2, 2021. Application deadline is Thursday, January 28, 2021.

If you fit and you’re hungry to grow and win, click here to apply:

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mentor

TRAINING

In this training, you will discover three ways you can use your content to attract your ideal clients.

You will discover why now is the ideal time to begin using your podcast to turn your ideal listener into your ideal client.

In this training, I also give you a way to repurpose your content across multiple platforms without adding a lot of extra work to your week.

On the next episode, I will show you the 3 big challenges most podcasters face when growing their audience and how you can overcome those challenges.

The 6 reasons podcasts don’t make money are laid out in the next episode.

Many people make podcasting more difficult than it needs to be. I will show you how to make it much easier.

You also will learn the three Ps necessary for successful content. These are secrets most podcast gurus don’t teach you.

That second part of the training comes next week.

LAUNCH HELP

If you haven’t launched your podcast yet, I offer a free mini-course in this presentation as well. You can find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/launch.

I also mention 7 ways to attract your ideal clients using a podcast. You can find that free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/attract.

Enjoy the session.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Audience GROWTH With Lead Generation – PTC 319

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Growing your audience begins with lead generation. These are people who share your interest in your niche. Where do you find those people who can become subscribers?

Audience growth is a process. To increase your downloads, you need to generate more leads. Then, you need to convert those leads into subscribers just like a sales funnel.

LINKS

Links mentioned in this episode:

Joe Sayles Jr. summit –

www.FlipYourMarketingFlops.com

Podcast production with Podcast Talent Coach –

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing

Podcast hosting with Libsyn –

www.Libsyn.com

Podcast Profits Mentorship application –

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mentor

Ultimate Course Formula with Iman Aghay –

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/UCF

Before we get into the process, let me tell you about a few opportunities for you and your podcast.

PRODUCTION

First, I have started offering podcast production. If you are spending too much time each week editing, posting and promoting your show, I can help. I have a team that can handle these tasks, so you can spend more of your time finding clients and building your brand and business.

There are three different levels ranging from simple editing to a full service done-for-you package. You can see your options and find a package that is right for you at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

HOSTING

Second, if you do not have a hosting service for your podcast, I am now an affiliate for Libsyn. I have been hosting my podcast with Libsyn since I started the show in 2013. Some of the biggest shows are hosted by Libsyn. They also have amazing support.

If you would like your first month free, visit www.Libsyn.com and use the coupon code PTC for Podcast Talent Coach.

MENTORSHIP

The final opportunity is very limited.

This is a special no-risk opportunity for a very limited number of podcasters.

You won’t have to pay thousands or even a few dollars to join this exclusive group. However, you will need to be a great fit.

In this group, I will help you grow your podcast and make money with your show. It comes with no risk to you.

I am looking for 6 podcasters to join Podcast Profits Mentorship.

In this exclusive group, you will …

  • Grow your audience and influence
  • Develop a product or service to sell
  • Build a framework to make money with your show
  • Participate in a small mastermind to help you reach your goals

Membership in this group comes with no risk. You pay me nothing up front. I only get paid a commission of 20% when you make money with your show, similar to most affiliate programs.

To keep the group small, 6 podcasters will be selected from all applications. I want to be sure I have time to give each member the attention they need to succeed.

To qualify for the group, you must …

  • Have published 25 episodes
  • Be willing to attend a 90-minute call every week
  • Be willing to spend 30 minutes a day to grow your audience and business
  • Share with me your download and revenue data during the program
  • Allow me to use your success as a case study

The program begins February 2, 2021. Application deadline is Sunday, January 24, 2021.

If you fit and you’re hungry to grow and win, click here to apply:

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mentor

WHO DO YOU FOLLOW?

Let’s talk about leads and who you follow.

I have found my greatest success when I pick one expert and follow that person until I’ve gone as far as possible. Chances are good that your followers are the same.

Have you ever binged content? It happens all the time with podcasts.

There will be those days when you see a bit spike in your downloads. This isn’t a big influx of listeners. This is most likely one or two listeners getting all they can.

Over the past four days, I drove 2,000 miles taking my daughter back to college. Dropping her off doesn’t look like it is going to get any easier anytime soon.

On our drive, we spent 12 hours consuming TEDx talks from an event put on by Sarah Lawrence. It was all about positive change.

I discovered Sarah through Iman Aghay with Success Road Academy. I have been following Iman for about a year now, consuming all I can from him.

Iman has a program called Ultimate Course Formula. It helps you build your program in 6 weeks. This leads into his higher level coaching programs. My personal coach teaches in these programs. That is how I discovered Iman.

Over the past 12 months, I’ve been watching all of the videos in the courses. I have watched most of Iman’s YouTube videos. He has a member call every week that I attend. There isn’t anything I haven’t consumed. I want it all.

More importantly, I tell people like you about Iman. This is how his audience and influence grows. Word-of-mouth is powerful. It is how you find leads for your podcast and business.

Lead generation is a key step in growing your tribe.

LEADS

Leads are people you want to pursue to see if they qualify to be a listener, client or customer. This could simply be an audience or list of names.

Once you determine they have an interest in your subject or niche, they become a qualified lead. They are now a name with an interest.

As they become aware of your content, material or offerings, you determine they are a fit for what you do. Now they are a qualified prospect.

From here, you build rapport. You grow the know, like and trust. Foster the relationship.

When the relationship becomes strong, they become a subscriber, customer or client.

This is the customer journey, more often called the funnel these days.

So, if you want more listeners, you need to get more leads. Don’t let the term lead only represent clients. Leads could also become subscribers and grow your audience. You still need to find people who share your interest.

LEAD GENERATION

Joe Sayles Jr. is a Lead Generation Funnel Efficiency Coach, Strategist, and Speaker who has served in various digital marketing channel positions.

Joe has an amazing background. He has owned a martial arts studio, a company that created blogs and websites, and a digital marketing company.

Today, using Joe’s proprietary Lead Generation Domination System™ that was developed over the past decade, he has helped generate more than $15 million in online revenue. Joe combines his knowledge and experiences to help solopreneur businesses learn to increase their leads, decrease their costs, and grow their profits by a minimum of 30% in 90 days (or less), by creating efficient lead generation funnels.

I am excited to have him on the show today to help us develop our lead generation.

In this conversation, you will learn …

– how your podcast fits into your funnel

– how to overcome the biggest struggles with lead generation

– the biggest mistakes most online experts make with lead generation

– and much more

I love the nuggets Joe gives us to grow our show. The lady that is 70-something getting more work than she can handle was amazing. Your podcast is part of your system to build your business. Make sure you lay it out and plan.

Get connected to his mini-summit the 3rd Thursday of each month. It is coming up this week. Find the link at www.FlipYourMarketingFlops.com.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Grow Your Audience With Networking – PTC318

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

In this interview on networking, we discuss:

  • The biggest benefit of networking
  • How podcasters can use networking to grow their show
  • The biggest challenges of networking
  • How to network without the awkwardness
  • Much more

Connect with Basile Lemba here:

HOW WE THINK OF NETWORKING

When you think of networking, you probably imagine walking into a room filled with salespeople all trying to jam their business card into your hand and sell you something. Why else would you network?

The purpose of networking is to grow your network. It is not to make a sale to one person.

One year at New Media Expo, I bought a ticket to Cliff Ravenscraft’s networking event. I thought it would be a great way to introduce my show to a ton of other podcasters who could benefit from my information.

Unfortunately, I didn’t know how to network properly.

When I walked into the room of about 100 people, nobody noticed. I got a drink and few snacks from the table. Still, nobody cared.

I finally made my way over to one of those stand-up cocktail tables and joined a couple other podcasters. They were talking about their shows.

I introduced myself and they asked about my show. After I told them a bit about this show, we talked about their shows.

The conversation came to that awkward end where we have nothing left to say. One of made an excuse to go get another drink or something.

It continued like that for the next 30 minutes. I finally faded out of the room unnoticed just like I arrived.

Looking back on that day, I realized I was doing it all wrong. People don’t want to know about me and my show. They want to talk about themselves. If you want to be interesting, be interested.

NETWORKING TO GROW

As you connect with others, find out as much as you can about that person. If it would make sense to partner and help each other grow, get their contact info. Agree to follow up to see how you might help each other reach your goals.

Networking is intended to find partners, not push your stuff on people.

If you create a partnership with a person who can introduce you or your stuff to 100 other people, you’ve leveraged the opportunity to make as many as 100 new listeners or better yet … clients. If you sell only to the person you’ve met at the event, you’ve only created one new client.

To grow your podcast, we need to find people who can introduce your show to groups of people. If you tell one person about your show, you get one new listener. If that person can put you in front of a new group of people, or simply tell their audience about you, your show can find hundreds or thousands of listeners.

A PODCAST EXAMPLE

I was on a coaching strategy call the other night with a producer of a real estate podcast. Just like most of my clients, he is trying to grow the audience.

The podcast helps people buy and sell their home. They give tips to sell the house quickly, get the best deal and mistakes to avoid.

He told me they promote the show on Facebook and through e-mail when new episodes are released. Unfortunately, those people already know about the show. Those activities are doing nothing to gain new listeners.

We brainstormed ideas to get in front of new listeners. I suggested they partner with complimentary services in the real estate industry to market the show. They could get mortgage lenders, closing agents and staging consultants to tell their clients about the show.

If these agents could promote the podcast to their audiences, the podcast could make mention of the services. Everybody wins.

The key to growing your audience is finding new potential listeners in big groups. Find partners who are already talking to your target listener.

This is why developing your ideal target listener is so important. When you know what your listener is all about, you can determine who is already speaking into their lives. Partner and grow.

You can use networking to grow your show if you use it in the right way.

BASILE LEMBA

Today, we talk to Basile Lemba. He teaches people how to network properly.

Basile was born in Cameroon in West Africa. He moved to France, then Florida. He now lives in Virginia. Each time he moved, Basile was forced to rebuild his connections and network.

As he attended various events, he realized most people lacked the specific know-how to properly connect with each other. That is how he founded BL Networking. Over the past 14 years, Basile has been teaching people how to properly network with each other to get results and grow their business.

We are lucky to have Basile here today to share some tips that will help us grow our podcast audience and connect with powerful partners.

Basile Lemba has over 30 years of experience in Networking.

He is the creator of “PROFITABLE NETWORKING BLUEPRINT” and the Founder of the NETWORKING INSTITUTE.

He has helped over 30,000 businesses acquire the right clients and dramatically increase their revenues. These companies range from “Mom and Pop” to MICROSOFT.

He has an upcoming book on Networking titled: “Everything you think you know about Networking is Wrong!”

Find Basile’s program at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/network.

Do you need help with your podcast? Check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Know Your Numbers With Millen Livis – PTC 317

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

As we move into a new year, you are probably setting some new goals. If you want to reach those goals over the next 12 months, you need to know your numbers.

You can use your podcast to grow your business and make some money. In order to do that, you need to set specific goals with specific targets. That includes knowing exactly what you want to achieve.

BE SPECIFIC

Let’s say you want to grow your downloads. That goal isn’t specific enough. It is like losing weight. You will never lose weight unless you are specific about the amount of weight you want to lose.

When you state that you want to lose 30 pounds by May 1st, you can measure your progress and determine if you reach your goal. When you say, “I want to lose weight”, you can’t tell if and when you’ve reached that goal.

Over the next 12 months, how much would you like to grow your podcast downloads? Be specific.

This past summer, I was able to double my monthly downloads by knowing my numbers. I set the goal and took specific action to hit those numbers. Doubling my downloads wouldn’t have been possible without knowing exactly what I wanted to happen.

DOUBLE YOUR DOWNLOADS

What would it take to double your downloads over the next 12 months?

If you want to grow your downloads by 1,200 over the next year, you will need to grow your downloads by 100 each month.

In order to grow by 100 downloads per month, you will need to get about 3.3 new listeners each day. What can you do everyday to get in front of new listeners and encourage 3 to 5 new people to listen each day?

By breaking down your numbers in this way, reaching your goal becomes much easier. Attracting 5 new listeners consistently is much easier than finding 1,200 people.

MAKING MONEY

How much money would you like to generate with your podcast this year? Revenue potential depends on the viability of your niche and the work you dedicate toward the effort.

For example purposes, let’s say you’d like to generate $60,000 over the next twelve months. How can we break that down to small steps and benchmarks?

$60k over 12 months would mean generating $5,000 each month. If we assume 4 weeks a month, you would need to create $1,250 each week. Working five days a week, you would need $250 each day.

What could you create that could generate $250/day or $5,000/month? You could sell one course a day at $250. You could also create a membership that is $50/month. If you enroll 100 people, that would be $5,000/month.

You need to know your numbers in order to reach your goals.

FINANCIAL INDEPENDENCE

On the episode today, we talk with Millen Livis. She is a financial independence mentor, best-selling author, investor and entrepreneur.

Millen combines her traditional and holistic education to help professional women become financially independent and retire early, so that they enjoy more choices and more freedom, without having to worry about money.

Most people feel financial independence is just a pipe dream. Millen tells us how to break that mindset and jumpstart your pathway from the pipe dream to financial freedom.

With the pandemic, financial education is more vital now than ever before. Job security is no longer a guarantee. Millen shows us how to begin our journey to financial freedom.

You can reach out to Millen for your own consultation. Visit https://speakwithmillen.com.

Do you need help with your podcast? Visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Leverage Your Attention With A Product In Five Steps – PTC 316

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Over the last few episodes, we’ve talked about defining your listener, finding your ideal clients and attracting them to you show. Are you now ready to leverage that attention to make money with your podcast by creating a product or service?

This week, I am conducting a training called “How To Attract Your Ideal Clients and Make Money With Your Podcast”. This will help you kick off the new year on the right foot.

Do you want to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show?

Do you want to grow your audience to consistently produce and promote your content in just a few minutes a day?

On this training, you will discover …

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid these pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode to grow your audience
  • And much more

Get the registered at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/growth.

Today, let’s talk about 5 steps you can take to generate revenue with your podcast.

CREATE YOUR PRODUCT

Your first step is to create something to sell. Create a product or service that will help your listener solve their problems.

Last week, we discussed solving the struggles and problems of your ideal listener. This is how they transform from your ideal listener to a paying client.

What you create could be a digital product, a physical product, a service or an event.

Build your minimal viable product and ship.

OFFER

Once you have created your product or service, you need to offer it to your listener.

Build a store front to offer your product or service.

Courses can be offered on Teachable or Thinkific.

Physical products can be sold on Shopify, Amazon, Etsy, Ebay or a variety of other platforms.

Services can be sold through your website, Fiverr or other ways depending on the service you are offering. Your website for coaching. Fiverr for contract work.

Don’t make this too complicated. Get your listener to send you money and then do the work.

PAYMENT

When you listeners say they want what you’re offering, you need a way for them to pay you. Don’t make this more complicated than it needs to be.

Create a payment system so people can give you money for it. This can be PayPal, Stripe, money order or a number of other ways. This will depend on your sales platform.

When I first started selling my Podcast Talent Coach workbook, it was in a 3-ring binder. People would send me money via PayPal. I would mail them the 3-ring binder. It doesn’t need to be harder than that.

DELIVERY

We have created your product or service. You have offered it to your audience. They have given you money for it. Now, it is time to deliver it.

Develop a method to deliver your product or service.

Again, this depends on what you are selling. Just like I sold that 3-ring binder, be creative until you prove the concept.

My first coaching client would send me a money order after I e-mailed him the invoice. Then, we would get on a Skype call each week for the coaching.

Delivery doesn’t need to be fancy. Be more concerned with the result your product or service delivers.

MARKET YOUR PRODUCT

After you have the first four steps working, it is time to ramp it up.

This is how you begin to use your podcast to make money. Once you have an idea for a product or service that solves a problem for your listener, and you know they are willing to pay for that solution, start talking about it on your show.

Market your product or service on your podcast. Let your audience know you have the solution to their problem. Then, tell them how to get it.

So many podcasters mention their product once or twice on their show and then think everyone knows about it. Mention it when the topic comes up in conversation.

If you have a course that helps people lose weight, mention the course when your are talking about the solution. You might say, “You need to eat five small meals a day to lose weight. In my course, we actually lay out what each of those meals should include. For instance, breakfast should consist of this and that.”

Your listeners are getting value. You are also mentioning that you have a course without being over-the-top about it. You aren’t selling all the time. It is an offer to help your listener.

TALK ABOUT IT

I have a friend who has a book out. I knew him for 6 months before I ever knew anything about it. Every week I would listen to his podcast. He would never mention it.

When I asked why he didn’t promote it on the show, he said he didn’t want his listeners to feel like he was always trying to sell to them. There is a difference between avoiding the over-the-top salesperson and not mentioning it at all.

You need to talk about your products and services on your show. Explain the transformation they experience by using your stuff. Then, tell people how to buy it.

Use your podcast to promote your revenue generating thing. You don’t make money from your podcast. You make money with your podcast by using it as a powerful marketing tool for your business.

TRAINING

Let me help you get started.

Come join my workshop to find your idea. “How To Attract Your Ideal Clients and Make Money With Your Podcast”.

Get registered at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment. Get coaching info at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Podcast

Solving Your Listeners’ Struggles And Problems – PTC 315

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your podcast serves a variety of purposes in the life of your listener. All podcasts need to entertain. But your podcast needs to specifically solve the struggles and problems of your ideal listener.

If you have a true crime podcast or a comedy podcast, the problem of your listener is probably escapism. They simply want to get away from their everyday troubles for a bit. Help them do that.

When it comes to making money with your podcast, you need to figure out how to create a product or service that helps solve those struggles and problems. On your podcast, tell your listeners what to do to solve their problems. Then, offer to teach them how with your products and services.

I would love to invite you to a free training with me. It is a workshop designed to help you find your idea. It is “How To Attract Your Ideal Clients and Make Money With Your Podcast”.

This free training will happen on Thursday, December 31st to help you kick off the new year. Get all the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

I would love to see you there and help you discover how to attract your ideal clients with your podcast. Get signed up and come join us.

THE PLAN

This is the fourth episode in a series designed to help you create a plan to make money with your show. These shows will take you from plan through execution.

I can’t guarantee that you will make money, because only you know your niche, drive and work ethic. You control your destiny.

We started in the first episode with your 2021 podcast roadmap. Then, you learned how to clearly define your target client and listener. Last week, you discovered 7 places to find your client.

Now that we’ve found your ideal client, how to we convert them from prospect to customer? A client is someone willing and able to pay for the thing you have to sell at a price that you are willing to sell it.

How can you create that willingness? Solve problems.

FREE PODCAST

You are trying to make money with a free podcast. Listeners aren’t paying to listen to your show. We need to figure out how to make money with a free product.

Many podcasters feel the only way to make money with a free show is to load it up with ads and sponsorships. I completely disagree. That is the last option you should consider.

There are three big reasons sponsorships are wrong.

First, people are leaving traditional media to escape all of the ads. Why would you clutter up your show with a bunch of ads if your audience is trying to get away from the commercials?

Next, it takes a lot of time and effort to land sponsors. There are over one million podcasts. The average audience size isn’t big enough to generate big sponsorship revenue. You need to kiss a lot of frogs to find that prince.

Finally, there is a limit to the revenue. How many sponsors can an episode possibly handle … four or six? There is a ceiling. Lots of work for limited income.

OPTIONS

Let’s talk about the other options. What happens if you use the show to market your products and services or those of affiliates that solve the problems of your listener?

With products or services, you keep your show clean from the ads. Instead, you provide value to your listeners every episode. Then, you tell them how to get more value with your stuff.

When you promote your products and services instead of using sponsors, you do the work once and make money with every sale. Sponsors pay you once. When you spend the time to create a course or program, and you can sell it over and over.

Finally, you can theoretically sell a digital program an unlimited number of times. You market the product or service once on the show and who knows what the revenue potential could be. It all depends on the value your stuff delivers and how many people buy it.

You don’t make money from your podcast. You make money with your podcast. Use the podcast to market the thing you have to sell.

THE NEED

When we discussed defining your ideal listener, we talked about a few things that make your listener unique. We talked about what they need.

Your listeners have goals and pains. When you can help your listener reach those goals and solve their pains, you can find a solution to their problems that they would be willing and able to buy.

Revisit your ideal listener. What do they want and desire? Where are their problems? Clearly identify their goals. This is beneficial when it comes to building your revenue stream.

When you can clearly identify your listener’s needs, fears, and pains, you will be well on your way. People will pay more to get out of pain than they will pay to achieve pleasure.

People buy more aspirin than vitamins. More money is spent on doctors than gym memberships. More money is spent to fix cars than to pay for upkeep.

Help your listener solve problems and overcome struggles.

MONEY

So, how do you make money with a free podcast? Create a product or service that will help your listener solve those problems and overcome that struggle.

I am all in favor of multiple streams of income. However, you need to get one stream flowing before you can create multiple streams.

Find your listeners’ biggest pain. Create something they would be willing and able to buy. Then, offer to help them.

On your podcast, show the audience your ability to help them. This could be coaching, teaching, demonstrating or a variety of other ways.

Give them the what. Back it up with the why.

The why will be most powerful. The why creates the desire. When you uncover the true why, listeners see what is possible and understand that they need your solution.

Once you create the desire for a solution, tell your listeners what they need to do. The what is the solution.

Now your listener says, “Yes, I can see why I need a solution.”

You show them what they need to do. Your listener says, “I get it. How do I do that?” You sell the “how”, step-by-step.

People can spend time or money. Sure, most everything is available on YouTube. You can spend hours and hours searching for the solution. Or, you can spend a few dollars and have the solution now.

Smart people realize the investment of a few dollars to save a ton of time is money well-spent. This is especially true when you spend the time saved taking action to solve your problem. You are out of pain much quicker.

People pay for convenience. Those are the people you want to attract with your solution.

TRAINING

I would love to invite you to a free training with me. It is a workshop designed to help you find your idea. It is “How To Attract Your Ideal Clients and Make Money With Your Podcast”.

This free training will happen on Thursday, December 31st. Get all the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

I would love to see you there and help you discover how to attract your ideal clients with your podcast. Get signed up and come join us.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment. If you could use the help of a podcast coach, reach out. I would love to be that help.

Podcast

7 Places To Find Your Clients – PTC 314

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you are trying to make money with your podcast, this series of episodes will help you create your plan. Last week, we discussed defining your ideal target listener. Today, I want to help you find those listeners and potential clients.

This started in episode 312 where we discussed your 2021 podcast roadmap. That is the foundation for these next few episodes. If you haven’t listened to that show, I would suggest you start there.

This series of episodes will help you create big things in the coming year if you take action and do the things I’m putting in front of you.

I have created a workshop to find your money making idea. It is “6 ways to attract your ideal clients with a podcast”. This free training will happen on December 30th. Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Let’s talk about 7 places to find your ideal clients.

GROUPS

Social media groups can be a great way to get in front of your ideal clients. However, you need to obey the rules.

You cannot get into a group and become an instant salesperson. You need to provide value.

If members of the group get tremendous value from your posts, they will seek you out for more. One way to offer value is to reply to many of the posts. Even replies of encouragement help.

Every time you post in the group, you create an opportunity to be seen. You are creating top-of-mind awareness for your potential clients.

Studies show that a person needs to be exposed to a marketing message three times before it registers in the mind. Create frequency to the target by being seen often. Engage and interact.

Join 3 groups in your niche and offer value.

PODCASTS

Landing interviews on podcasts isn’t as difficult as it seems if you do it the correct way.

How many times have you been approached by a potential guest or representative of a potential guest asking to be interviewed on your show? I’m sure there have been times when you read the summary of the guest and realize it isn’t anywhere close to being a fit for your show.

I get these all of the time. It was especially true when I didn’t do interviews on my podcast. They would e-mail me about their latest book and say, “I think it would be a perfect fit for your show.”

Really? I don’t usually interview people. I especially don’t interview people about that topic.

That is the wrong way to land interviews.

First provide some value. Pursue fewer shows that are right in your roundhouse.

Last week we talked about your ideal target listener. One of the reasons we define our listener is so we can find them. Here is where that comes into play.

Find 5 to 10 podcasts that also speak to your ideal client. Actually listen to a few episodes of each.

Reach out to those hosts and tell them what you love about their show. Ask if there is any way you can support what they are doing. You might even provide a resource you love or a blog post from another creator that talks about a similar topic.

Start the relationship and conversation. When you have developed some rapport, mention that you speak to a very similar audience. Ask if you might get on a call to discuss how you might help each other.

Do this on a call and not over e-mail. If you are willing to commit the time to a discussion, you appear much more willing to help and partner.

On the call, find ways to support each other. This might be interview opportunities. It might be other ways. Get creative.

Work to land interviews on 3 complimentary podcasts.

GIVE

Creating content is hard work. Offer to help a content creator do just that.

You have great content that can be repurposed across other platforms.

Offer to create guest content or conduct an ask me anything for a complimentary content creator in your niche.

This should not simply be a reposting of something you already used. Either create something new or refine one of your pieces specifically for their audience.

By offering to create content for another creator, you lighten their workload and get in front of their audience. Everybody wins.

I first learned of Erik Fisher on Cliff Ravenscraft’s podcast. Erik would do a weekly segment on Cliff’s show where he would highlight a new tech resource he discovered, such as an app.

This added content to Cliff’s show while getting Erik in front of a new audience.

Find opportunities to provide your content to other content creators.

CROWDS

Empowering your audience to help you is a viral way to find new clients. Let your audience help you create an episode.

Dave Jackson does this on his School of Podcasting show every month. He presents the question of the month at the beginning of the month. Listeners are then invited to submit audio of their answer.

The final episode of the month is a collage of the answers Dave has received. Each submission gets highlighted on the show and is allowed to promote their own podcast.

By creating this episode, Dave helps his listeners. He gets great content for an episode. Dave also creates the opportunity to get his listeners talking about his show. “Hey, Mike! I heard you on Dave’s show last week.”

This creates goodwill between Dave and his listeners. It also gets his listeners in the habit of reaching out to Dave if they need help with something.

Create a crowdsourced episode of your own around your solution to their problem.

VIDEO

Do the work once and use it many times over. You would hard to create your podcast every week. Don’t make it a one-and-done.

Find ways to repurpose your content. If you start with a video of the show, you can then use the audio as the podcast. You can also use the transcript as a blog.

Now, you are doing the work once, you are creating the content once, but using it in three different ways. You can also use pieces of it on social media and in your newsletter.

People like to consume content in different ways. Allow them to consume your content in the way they enjoy most.

To get in front of new clients, repurpose your content on YouTube.

NEWSLETTERS

I hope you have an e-mail list. This is one connection to your audience that you actually own. Facebook can kick you off anytime they would like. You own the list of e-mail addresses of people who signed up with you.

Leverage this list to get in front of new listeners. The people on your list already know you. How can you use it to find new clients?

Partner with other creators in your niche. Just like you would include their segment on your show, include their content in your newsletter. They could do the same for you.

This should be part of your conversation when you reach out to partner. If they have an e-mail list that they send to frequently, swap content.

You can give them great content for their newsletter. They can give you great content for your newsletter. You both win.

Swap newsletter mentions with two complimentary content creators.

STAGES

The final way this week to find your clients is stages. I don’t mean physical stages. We are talking about any opportunity to get in front of an audience.

Summits are a great way to get in front of a new audience and build your e-mail list. A virtual summit involves various experts giving presentations around a specific topic.

People submit their name and e-mail address to get access to the summit. Sometimes you are allowed to offer your lead magnet during the summit to build your list as well.

Find a summit where you can give a presentation.

TWO-WAY STREET

Remember with any of these ideas, you need to give first. Seek ways to help the other person succeed. It will come back around.

If your partner knows you are there to help them, they will be more willing to help you.

It needs to be a win-win-win situation. Your partner needs to win. The audience needs to win. Then, you need to win. Provide great value and everybody wins.

Use a few of these ideas this week to get in front of your ideal clients.

Then, come join me at the workshop I’ve created to find your money making idea. It is “6 ways to attract your ideal clients with a podcast”.

This free training will happen on December 30th. Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth. I’ll see you there.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Why You Should Clearly Define Your Target – PTC 313

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are many reasons why you need to clearly define your target listener. Today, I want to show you six really important reasons you should be able to visualize that ideal target listener before you ever begin recording an episode.

Last week we discussed your 2021 podcast roadmap. That is the foundation for these next few episodes. If you haven’t listened to that show, I would suggest you start there.

This series of episodes will help you create big things in the coming year if you take action and do the things I’m putting in front of you.

To help you clearly define your ideal target listener, download my Listener Development worksheet. www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

This tool will help you be able to visualize that single individual you are talking with on every episode. You content will be much more powerful and connect in a deeper way.

FIND THEM

By clearly defining your ideal target listener, you know where to find them. This is the first benefit.

When you are trying to grow your audience, you need to get in front of people who are not aware of you and your show. You need to let them get to know you. Then, you need to invite them to listen.

It is difficult to get in front of the right people if you don’t know who they are.

Imagine if I wanted you to market a new vehicle that has been developed by a new auto company. How would you begin to market it?

I believe you would begin by trying to figure out the typical driver of a vehicle like this. That driver would be different if it was a pickup truck or high end sports car or an entry level sedan.

Marketing for a Porche Carrera would be much different than advertising for a Ford Fusion. You would look for those ideal customers in different places.

The same is true for your podcast. Know your audience, so you can find them.

HELP THEM

By knowing your ideal target listener, you know how to help them. When you clearly define your listener, you know exactly where they struggle and how you can help them solve those problems.

If you are in the finance niche, the financial problems of a 23-year-old just out of college are probably much different than the problems of a 58-year-old empty nester.

When you can speak directly to those problems, your content becomes much stronger and more powerful. It is like you are reading my mind.

Now you can attract those people to your podcast and offer them additional help with your products and services.

You can’t help everyone. You want to help the right people.

RESULTS

That brings us to the third benefit of defining your ideal target listener. When you know exactly who you are speaking to, you know you can get them results.

If you help people with an online business for instance, you need to decide where they are in the life cycle of that business. Are you helping people who are just starting and trying to make their first dollar? Or, are you helping people who are making $100,000 per year and are trying to scale to $1 million?

Those are much different conversations. When coaches and information experts already have a podcast and have produced at least 25 episodes, I know I can help them grow their audience and drive their business. I’ve done it and know it works.

Does that mean my content isn’t helpful for brand new podcasters or those who do it as a hobby? Not at all. The info is still helpful. But, it is most helpful for those information experts like coaches and speakers who are ready to take it up a notch.

Define your ideal target listener based on who you know you can help.

CONTENT

The fourth benefit of defining your ideal target listener is your content filter. When you know your listener, you know what content they want.

Creating content every week for your show becomes easy when you have defined your listener. You have determined their wants, needs, fears and goals. You know their struggles and problems.

Speaking directly to those areas each week becomes so much easier when you have them defined. Again, your content is much more powerful.

As we discussed earlier, if you are in the finance niche, the financial problems of a 23-year-old just out of college are probably much different than the problems of a 58-year-old empty nester. The same is true for their goals, fears and wants.

You can create a content calendar all around these areas when you have clearly defined your listener.

When you don’t have a clear picture, you start saying things like, “If you’re new, you should do A. But if you’ve been doing it for awhile, you should do B.” Now you are trying to be all things to all people. In reality, you’re serving no one well.

Pick a target so you can hit it with solid content.

CONTEXT

Once you have the content, you need the context. This is the fifth benefit of defining your ideal target listener.

With a clear definition of your ideal target listener, you understand the context in which your content needs to be presented.

I often hear the big internet marketing gurus talk about going to a conference in the Philippines or when they were at their $100,000 mastermind that only meets twice a year at Expert X’s beach house in the Bahama’s.

Those are people who either don’t understand their target audience or their target audience is other big time gurus and not renegades like us. The context is all wrong for people trying to find their way and make their first dollar online.

The first dollar people want to hear from the husband and wife who did it around their passion and have the message of “you can, too.” That is context.

If I know you are trying to create a side hustle around your podcast, I can’t talk about flying to New York and spending ten thousand dollars to do a 30-minute interview with some famous person. It is the wrong context.

Know your ideal listener, so you can create the right context.

STORIES

Finally, when you know your ideal target listener, you know how to frame your stories.

Stories allow your listener to get to know, like and trust you. Through your stories, you listener will know what you believe and value. You trust them with details of your life. They trust you in return.

When your stories elicit that “me, too” response from your listener, they stir emotion. That’s powerful.

In his book Storyworthy, Matthew Dicks teaches the art of storytelling. Matthew is a professional storyteller who has competes in and wins the Moth StorySLAM. These are open-mic storytelling competitions. He is fantastic at telling stories.

Matthew has died twice in his life and had to be brought back to life. He has stories he tells about these two instances. However, neither story is about dying.

One story in particular talks about how his parents don’t come to the hospital immediately after the crash. Instead, they check on the car first. He feels all alone. He then realizes all of his friends have come to the hospital to ensure he is ok and provide their support, and that is the best gift anyone could receive.

Matthew says the story isn’t about dying, because the audience would never say, “Oh yeah, I remember the time I died too.” That doesn’t happen.

Instead, the story is about feeling all alone in the world and then his friends supporting him when he least expects it. Listeners are much more likely to say, “Yeah, I’ve been there. I’ve felt all alone before.”

That is the power of knowing your audience and framing your stories. The fact that his heart stops catches your attention. But loneliness and friendship stir the real emotion in his listeners.

GET STARTED

There they are. Six reasons you really, really need to define your ideal target listener before you record your next episode. Know as much about that person as you possibly can.

If you haven’t listened to episode 312 from last week, go check it out. We talk about your 2021 podcast roadmap.

This series of episodes will help you create big things in the coming year if you take action and do the things I’m putting in front of you.

To help you clearly define your ideal target listener, download my Listener Development worksheet. www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your 2021 Podcast Roadmap – PTC 312

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When podcasters come to me for guidance, we start with a free strategy session to see if and how I can be of help. During this session, we develop a roadmap for the next 12 months. If it then makes sense to work together, we discuss what that could look like.

Today, I want to help you create your 2021 roadmap. This roadmap will be a fill-in-the-blank roadmap, because you and I aren’t sitting down to discuss your specific show and goals. You’ll need to do a lot of the work on your own.

YOUR STRATEGY SESSION

If you have created at least 25 episodes and would like to apply for a free strategy session with me, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. You can apply right there.

If you are disappointed with all of the work you’ve been putting into your show but seeing very little ROI, and you would like 2021 to be different – the year you begin making money with your podcast – apply for your strategy session. We’ll see what is possible.

This could be your opportunity. I’ll show you how you can get more reach and visibility. Plus, I’ll show you how to leverage the work you’ve already done to grow a business around your show.

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s talk about your roadmap. Get a sheet of paper and a pen.

Yes, go old school. The physical act of writing does something to the brain as you are creating. It activates the brain in a way that typing does not.

FOUR STEPS ROADMAP

There are four steps to create your roadmap. We will go through each.

On your paper, draw a line straight down the middle of the paper from top to bottom. Now, draw a line right across the middle of the paper from side to side.

You should now have four quadrants on the page. We will fill each of the four quadrants with different ideas and evaluations for your roadmap.

TOPIC

In the upper left corner, write topic. This is the first step.

To be a podcast success, you need to create your show around a topic that you love. This needs to be something you can talk about for days and never get tired.

I know. You’re saying, “Erik, of course this is my favorite topic. Why else would I be doing the show?”

Well, maybe. I’m not talking about a topic you think is cool. This needs to be a topic that really gets you excited. People should be saying, “Enough already – can’t you talk about something else?”

You talk about this all the time. You eat, drink and sleep this topic.

Here is how we find out. Set a timer for 10 minutes. In the topic quadrant, write as many show topic ideas as you can. Don’t evaluate the topics. Just write as many ideas as you can in 10 minutes.

Pause the episode, set the timer and write. Then come back and push play.

HOW MANY TOPICS?

Ok, count the number of topic ideas you’ve created. If you wrote down over 50 ideas, you are on the right track. This topic comes easy to you.

If you created between 35 and 50 topics, there is a good chance you have a topic you love. Your creativity or self evaluation might be holding back the ideas. Still, 35 is pretty good.

If you were able to only come up with 20 to 35 topic ideas, you may want to try this exercise again. You are walking on thin ice. Struggling to come up with topic ideas will create what appears to be writer’s block.

Passion kills writer’s block. If you love the topic, you have no issues creating topic ideas.

Think about what new people in this niche need to know. Discuss terms, resources, thought leaders, how to get started, where to find the best tools and other similar topic ideas. Now, try the exercise again and see what happens. If you still struggle, you should consider a different topic.

Now if you came up with fewer than 20 topic ideas, you are in the wrong niche. I don’t want to be the one to call your baby ugly. However, you are going to struggle every week trying to create your show.

If you have trouble deciding were to start, you won’t start. Your podcast will fade away quickly. Then you are going to proclaim podcasting doesn’t work. No, your topic didn’t work for you. Don’t start down a path that you don’t love. It is too much work.

BUILD THE AUDIENCE

In the upper right quadrant, write audience. Once you have a topic, you need to build an audience.

When I have a strategy session with a podcaster, we talk about goals. Most of the time the goals will always include “grow my audience”.

You need to understand that size is relative. It is more important to have a passionate audience who wants what you have to offer rather than a big yet passive audience.

People search out the Apple store. Those fans are passionate. Many more people shop at WalMart. However, very few people have a WalMart sticker on the back window of their car or on their laptop.

You want to create fans who will become clients. Lots of listeners are great. Lots of listeners who will buy your stuff is even better.

According to Canalys Worldwide PC Analysis in October 2019, Apple ranked 4th with 7.8% of the world computer market behind Lenovo, HP and Dell. Apple was almost 10% behind number 3 Dell.

When was the last time you saw anyone lining up outside a store waiting for the new HP to be released?

Dell Technologies has a market cap of $52 billion. Apple’s market cap is almost $2 trillion. Now, Apple phones drive that cap. But it is four times bigger.

FIND YOUR IDEAL CLIENTS

You want to find people who want everything you have. In that upper right quadrant, start listing people who are already talking to your ideal clients. This could be podcasters, bloggers, YouTube creators, event coordinators, associations, manufacturers, magazines, radio shows, people with big e-mail lists and anyone else talking to your potential customers.

Where can you find these people? Where do they hang out online? How can you get in front of your ideal clients?

In order to build your audience, you need to find people who aren’t aware of you and your show. Then, invite them to come listen.

SOLVE A PROBLEM

After you have built the audience, you need to create something of value for them so they can give you money. Both of you need to win here.

The best way to offer value to your audience is to help them solve a problem. What are their struggles? What hurdles are they trying to overcome?

When you have a topic that you love, finding their problems shouldn’t be too difficult. You’ve been there. You have been through the struggles.

Determine how you can help your tribe overcome those struggles. Then, create something to sell around your solution.

Solve one specific problem for your listener.

If you know exactly who you help and what you help them do, your single solution should be clear. You can now find those people and offer to help.

In the lower left quadrant, write problems. Now list all of the problems that exist for your ideal customer. Remember, you only need to solve one. Let’s find the right one. The one most would be willing to pay money to solve.

As you brainstorm problems, think of the things people always ask you about. How do you do this or how do you fix that? Where are they struggling?

What questions do you see most often in Facebook groups or online forums? What problems are people in your niche complaining about most often?

These are all signs of problems that need to be solved, and you’re just the person to do it. Find your solution.

SELL IT

Your final step is to get people to buy your solution. In the lower right quadrant, write system.

There are three parts to your system. How can you promote your solution? Where will you sell it? How will you deliver it?

Those are the three things you need to determine. Create a system to promote, sell and delivering your solution.

If you are selling a physical product, many Amazon is right for you. Maybe you’ve created a course and something like Teachable is your delivery.

In this quadrant, write your solution to these three parts. You need ways to promote your solution. You will definitely mention it on the podcast. Where else can you promote it? What affiliate partners might be able to promote it for you? List all of your ideas.

Write down how you will sell your solution. Is there anything you need to learn to do this? Don’t make it more complicated than it needs to be.

Finally, how will you deliver your solution?

Stay focused on one problem and one solution to that problem. You can’t create multiple streams of income until you have the first one flowing first.

START YOUR ROADMAP

Those are your four steps to your 2021 podcast roadmap. Get started today. If you want different results in the next 12 months, you need to start doing different things. Now is your time.

If you would like some help creating your specific plan, let’s talk.

If you have created at least 25 episodes and would like to apply for a free strategy session with me, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. You can apply right there.

This could be your opportunity. I’ll show you how you can get more reach and visibility. Plus, I’ll show you how to leverage the work you’ve already done to grow a business around your show.

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Don’t Wait For Perfect – PTC311

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Let’s look back over the past 12 months. What are you working on that isn’t quite yet launched? Don’t wait for perfect. Ship it.

Some of my greatest accomplishments happened when I was pushed along before I felt I was 100% ready. I wasn’t perfect, but I started.

TRY IT

It was August 1994. I was working at the big rock radio station in my hometown. The gig was only overnights. But, it was full-time and in the big city.

That night, we were having our annual birthday bash for the station. This was a big concert to celebrate the 16th anniversary of the station.

This particular concert featured REO Speedwagon, Starship and Cheap Trick. Three bands that were a bit past their prime, but still big staples on album rock radio.

At this point, I had been in radio for about 6 years. I have been to plenty of concerts. However, this was our show. And it was at the 8,000-seat arena in town.

Starship had just got off the stage. REO was the only band left to play. That’s when the program director said, “Let’s go. We’re going to welcome the crowd and introduce the band.”

Now, I have never had the desire to be on stage. I’ve never wanted to be a public speaker. In fact, speaking in front of a crowd made me incredibly nervous like it does with most people.

My boss grabs the entire on-air staff, about 12 of us, and we head on stage. The crowd sees us and goes crazy.

The morning show takes the mic and says hi. Another roar from the crowd. They thank the rockers for coming out on that particular night to help us celebrate. Another cheer.

THE BIG CHEER

That’s when it happened.

The morning guys begin to introduce the entire staff. One by one, they go down the line pointing out the DJ and getting a cheer from the crowd.

My show is on the radio right before them. They have kind of taken me under their wing.

As they get to me, they give me a little longer intro with some brotherly kind of love and the crowd gives me a cheer a bigger than I expected.

That felt good. My butterflies went away. My chest puffed up just a bit.

That’s when I realized what I had been missing. There is a point where my anxiousness turned into exhilaration.

Where I had once feared speaking to a crowd, I learned that it might just be something I would come to love.

Sure, the butterflies are still there before I step out. But, it is more like the butterflies you experience right before you get to the top of the rollercoaster hill. You know what is on the other side, but it’s still a little scary.

Suddenly you’re in the middle of it absorbing it all. Taking it all in. You just need to get over the top of the hill.

This year, give something a try that you’ve been avoiding due to fear. You won’t know you love it until you try.

So few people are willing to push past the top of the hill. You can discover a whole new world if you just push yourself to try something new.

JUMP

Next, jump.

It was April 2013. I was just launching Podcast Talent Coach. The show was still a blog and not yet a podcast.

I was writing for New Media Expo. They were using my posts on their website as part of their podcasting section.

The whole business was still coming together. The gurus all made it sound so easy. Create all of these multiple streams of income and you’d be rich before you knew it.

Unfortunately, I didn’t know much about the tech. I was a radio guy. I knew content. Figuring out an RSS feed and a funnel and a shopping cart was all a little beyond my reach.

My blog posts contained my e-mail address and an offer for coaching. I didn’t yet know what that coaching would look like. I just knew I could help people shape their content and create stronger shows.

Then one day I received an e-mail.

Ken reached out and told me his wife found my blog. Ken was on the radio and needed help improving his show.

He and I agreed to jump on a Skype call and devise a plan. We chatted for about 90 minutes. At the end, we had a plan to help him reach his goals.

The next day, I e-mailed Ken an agreement recapping what I would provide and what he would pay. He sent me that first payment as a money order. We started coaching.

Was it perfect? Was the funnel optimized? Heck no. I didn’t even know what a funnel was at this point.

We just made an agreement, he paid me and we got started.

Don’t wait until it’s perfect. Jump. Perfect is a pipe dream.

THE SHARKS

Finally, get started.

Last weekend, I had the pleasure of attending Collaborate. It was an amazing event where I made a ton of great connections.

Two weeks before Collaborate, the organizers were recruiting people to participate in Shark Attack.

During this part of the event, five people will make their pitch to a group of high level, online marketers with the hopes of getting those marketers to promote them to their list.

Shark Attack is an opportunity to really get to the next level and play big time.

Now, I was nowhere ready to apply for Shark Attack. My funnel wasn’t perfect. The Audience Explosion Blueprint didn’t have mounds of data to support the conversion numbers. I hadn’t done really big JV launches in the past.

Why would these big players ever want to promote me?

As I was talking with my coach, we discussed where I was and where I wanted to go. We chatted about the last webinar I did and how it converted.

She finally said, “Erik, you’re ready. Go for it.”

I said, “Are you sure?” Then I brought up all of the excuses. My funnel, my data, my history.

She assured me that all of that would be fine. It would never be perfect. I just needed to start.

At 11pm the night before the deadline, I prepared my pitch and shot the audition video. I hit the submit button and went to bed.

Two days later there was a prep call for the event. On this call, the organizers get everybody ready to network and connect. To get the event to run well, they explain everything you need to know to get the most out of the event.

During this call, the 5 participants for Shark Attack are announced.

THE WINNERS ARE …

When they got to the list of five participants, I heard my name called. I would be pitching to the sharks.

We had no idea who they would be. We only knew we would have two minutes to make our pitch and get the sharks interested in promoting our programs.

There was now less than four days to refine and perfect my pitch and figure out how to get these people to promote me. I would be pitching as hundreds of other online marketers watched. The sharks would then have 15 minutes to ask me questions and pick apart my idea.

When the day came for Shark Attack, the sharks turned out to be Jeanna Gabellini, Rob Goyette, Debbie Allen, Alex Mandossian, Michelle Schubnel, and Alex Moscow. All very big players in online marketing.

Names of the participants were drawn in random order. As the first few went, it was just as you would expect. Questions came quickly. Plans weren’t quite refined. Lots of inquiries about the numbers. It was rough.

MY TURN

Name after name was called. It quickly became obvious that I would be last. After the first four went through the process, it was my turn to make the pitch.

I wasn’t sure if waiting was more difficult or if going last actually benefitted my by seeing the others go first. The feedback they received helped me refine my pitch just a touch.

It was finally time. I made my two minute pitch and asked for the partnership. Immediately, Debbie Allen said, “I’m in.”

We were off to a good start. Then, Alex Mandossian chimed in. He told me he didn’t understand the promise I was making or what my clients would receive.

All of a sudden, the sharks were arguing amongst themselves. Michelle thought it was perfectly clear. Jeanna wasn’t quite convinced. Moscow really liked the idea. Rob doesn’t like podcasting, but thought his audience would be a fit.

It all came in a flurry. I answered questions as fast and as best as I could.

That fifteen minutes passed quickly. It was exhilarating. It was also a lot of pressure.

At the end of it all, four said they were in. The other two said they would be willing to have another conversation.

Wow! I went into this unsure of my ability and feeling unprepared. If it hadn’t been for my coach pushing me to try it anyway, I would have missed out. I wouldn’t have these incredible opportunities sitting in front of me ready to make 2021 an amazing year for me.

Sure, it’s scary. Sure, you don’t feel like you’re ready. It will always be scary. It will always feel like it could be better and more ready.

If you want to make big things happen in the next year, acknowledge the fear. Then, do it anyway. Take the first step.

THE NEXT STEP

Are you ready to make 2021 an incredible year? Now is the time to get started.

You won’t know you love it until you try.

Don’t wait until it’s perfect. Jump.

Acknowledge the fear. Then, do it anyway.

I have told you about my Audience Explosion Blueprint. You can get an incredible deal right now for Black Friday and Cyber Monday.

The two biggest shopping days of the year are coming. If you want to explode your audience over the next year, you can get in now with this deal.

Since it is available for a limited time, and since this podcast will be around for a very long time, I have posted the deal on the website. If the deal is still good, you will find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/BlackFriday.

Rocky grew his audience by 100% by going through the program. If you want to play big in 2021, get in on this now. Even if you don’t have a podcast yet, this will make even more sense for you.

Check it out at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/BlackFriday.

 

Whatever you do, make 2021 big. Get started. Use these three tips to reach your goals and live your dreams.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Develop Your Podcast Personality – PTC 310

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are three legs to the podcast stool if you are trying to grow your audience. Those are programming, promotion and personality.

Personality is critical to keep your listeners coming back episode after episode. Your personality is what makes you magnetic.

In order to grow your podcast, you need to retain the current listeners you already have. It will do you no good simply bringing in new listeners if your current listeners are leaving. Your show won’t grow.

Building a relationship with your audience will keep them coming back. You build that relationship through the stories that you tell and through your personality. This is how your listeners get to know, like and trust you.

CO-HOSTS

Dave Jackson and I do the Podcast Review Show together. Each episode we invite a podcaster on the show for a critique of the entire business from content to website to revenue opportunities.

If you would like to be featured on the show, visit PodcastReviewShow.com.

Being part of a two-person show highlights the importance of a defined personality. If there are multiple hosts on the show, you each need to have a lane. Your personalities should compliment each other.

If the two co-hosts on a podcast are cut from the same cloth, one isn’t necessary. A discussion between two people with the same opinions on everything isn’t a very compelling conversation.

There are four steps to develop your personality.

Most of these tips apply if you are a solo podcaster or only have guests on your show just as much as they apply to shows with multiple hosts.

DEFINE EACH ROLE

Your first step is to define your role. Describe the persona you want to project on your show. Describe how you want to be perceived by your audience.

Most importantly, be yourself. Don’t try to be something or someone you are not.

List as many of your personality characteristics as you can.

If you have a co-host, select your partner carefully. If you are the same, one of you isn’t necessary.

You then need to determine what each is expected to bring to the show. Define your duties, so there is no animosity or confusion.

PERSONALITY FOUNDATION

Once you have an exhaustive list, select three to five that you would like as your foundation. These three to five personality traits should be those that you would like to represent your brand.

Many think an over-the-top personality is necessary to get noticed. You don’t need to be like Gary Vaynerchuk or Howard Stern or Tony Robbins to be a big personality. There are plenty of other styles.

You could be warm like Dr. Phil, funny like Jimmy Fallon or tell-it-like it is like Dave Ramsey. Your personality could be energetic like Russel Brunson or motivate like Brendon Burchard or optimistic like Dan Miller.

The fun part is you get to decide. Again, be yourself.

BE PRESENT

Now that you have decided on your primary traits, focus on these. Make sure they are present in each episode.

Let your personality traits come out through the stories that you tell.

Start with the point you want to make or the lesson you want to teach. Next, find a story that will highlight that point or lesson. Finally, include a little of your personality in that story.

Remember, a little goes a long way. You don’t want to be the person that tries to make everything funny. You don’t want to be up in the face of your listener with everything. Just add a little here and there as role work.

In order for your audience to appreciate your personality, it must be contrasted with other complimentary traits. When you yell at your kids for everything, they eventually stop listening. Players stop paying attention to coaches who scream about everything.

On the other hand, if a typically mild mannered coach blows up about a blown play or a parent who is normally nurturing suddenly explodes over bad grades, they are taken seriously. Timing is everything.

If you are naturally funny, let it shine when the time is right. Your show doesn’t need to be a comedy routine. It simply needs to be funny when the time is right if that is your personality.

TAKES TIME

Finally, give it time to develop. Do consistent role work episode after episode and let your personality develop.

This will not happen overnight. Your listeners don’t develop a relationship with you after two episodes. Give it time.

Add personality to each episode. Over time, your listeners will get to know who you are and what you are all about.

This is where true friendships develop.

In order to be sure your personality comes out in each episode, plan your show before you begin. If you are already creating content, it is never too late to start. Start planning today and let it shine.

 

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment. For your free strategy session, check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Podcast

5 Steps To Podcast Engagement – PTC 309

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

On a coaching call the other day, I was asked about my most effective way to grow my audience. You can get more podcast engagement in 5 easy steps.

DOUBLE DOWNLOADS

Over the last four months, I have been able to use this system to double my downloads and increase my e-mail list by 60%.

When I look back at some of the greatest personal and business successes in my life, I have to admit that I didn’t achieve the majority of them alone. If you look at your own successes, I’m sure you will come to the same conclusion.

My audience doubled and my e-mail grew by doing one thing. I partnered with others. Two minds are better than one.

Over the past four months, I have appeared on summits, on podcasts and in giveaways. I have leveraged the audience of others to grow incredibly fast.

I have always believed that my ability to develop long-lasting relationships and build mutually beneficial partnerships with others is my secret superpower.

Strategic partnerships are the most powerful way to scale any venture.

Find people who can help you double your results. Connect and collaborate.

COLLABORATE

If you want to join an amazing event that will help you follow this path, check out www.podcasttalentcoach.com/Collaborate.

At the upcoming, highly anticipated live virtual event COLLABORATE November 13 – 15, you will have opportunities to build these powerful alliances and find your ideal joint venture partners.

You will be among hundreds of top leaders and experts that have already signed up to attend. Don’t worry … there are plenty of people just getting started as well.

If you have been going it alone, or need to scale your results to an even higher level by bringing in more joint venture partners, this event is a must-attend for you.

See full details and register at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/Collaborate.

This will be my third time attending Collaborate. It happens on Zoom and it is a lot of fun, even if networking makes you uncomfortable.

PARTNERS

At the beginning of event, you will learn how to refine your collaborating pitch. You learn how to tell others what you do and how to explain what makes a great partner for you.

Then over the weekend, you will take part in about 20 small networking circles. These are groups of about 8 people. Everyone gets 2 minutes to explain what they do and how they can partner. If someone sounds like a great partner for you, the two of you agree to exchange info and connect at a later date.

The first time I attended, I met 40 people that made sense as partners for me. This is how I’ve been part of summits, giveaways and podcasts. It was great.

At the next event, I decided to be much more selective on my partner selections. I still found 20 people as potential partners.

What could 20 partners help you accomplish in the next year? If you had 20 people promoting your podcast and programs to their audience, how could your audience and engagement grow?

Here is your chance to make those connections. Visit www.podcasttalentcoach.com/collaborate.

ENGAGEMENT

Let’s talk about the five steps to create engagement with your audience.

These steps are going to sound easy. The concepts are easy to understand. You simply need to be diligent and consistent about implementing each.

ASK

First, ask for engagement. If you want engagement, you must ask.

Your audience won’t engage with your show unless you ask them to do so. If you want them to e-mail you, ask. If you want them to share the show with others, tell them how.

People don’t know what you want unless you tell them. Be specific.

SHOW AND TELL

That bring up the second step. Offer an example. Show them what engagement looks like.

Many podcasters say, “Find the details in the show notes.” I listened to podcasts for about 3 years before I figured out where I could find the show notes.

Don’t assume people know how to subscribe to your show. Your listeners may not know where to find your show notes. If you want them to e-mail their questions, show them an example of a great question.

EASY

The third step is the ease of engagement. Make it easy for your listeners to engage.

Nobody wants to jump through 3 hoops to help you. “Visit the website. Click about. Scroll down a third of the page. Look on the right and find the green button. Click that and visit that webform. Fill out the form and click submit. Check your e-mail for the link you’ll get. Click that link and submit your question.”

You lost me at scroll down. If it isn’t easy, you won’t get action.

Easy also means FEWER options. Many people think more options are better. That is false.

If I suggest you e-mail me, text me or visit the website to submit your question, you now have to decide which is better for you. This is just more work.

More decisions mean your listener needs to evaluate the options, decide which is best for them, and then take action. Too much work.

If you have multiple options, rotate them through different episodes. Offer the e-mail this week and the texting next week.

LOCATION

The fourth step is engagement location. Engage where they are.

If you listeners love chatting on Facebook, don’t try to get them to comment on your YouTube channel. When your listeners are comfortable e-mailing you, stick with it. Don’t waste your time trying to get them to text you if that isn’t their preferred method of communication.

You need to get out of your comfort zone and go play where your listeners play. If they are in Facebook groups, be seen in Facebook groups. If there is another podcast they love, find ways to partner with that podcast. Be where your listeners are.

BENEFIT

Finally, include a benefit to engagement. This is the fifth step.

A benefit could be a lead magnet or other piece of value they receive for engaging. Maybe everyone who e-mails you receives your checklist or cheat sheet.

Benefit could also simply be highlighting them on the show or answering their question. When you answer their question, give them love. Direct people to them.

When engagement benefits the listeners, they are more likely to engage.

8 IDEAS

If you would like a ton of engagement ideas, I have created a resource for you. It is 75 Ways To Drive Engagement With Your Podcast. You can get it at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/engage.

The ideas are separated into half a dozen different categories. Here are 8 of those ideas.

  • Run for office by meeting as many people as possible. People vote for those they have met.
  • Ask great questions.
  • Have listeners submit questions for question of the week. They get attention.
  • Create a crowdsourced episode.
  • Include a link to engage in your e-mail signature.
  • Ask your listeners to share.
  • Create community. Highlight members.
  • Create partnerships to promote each other.

Get more on the idea list at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/engage.

Come join me at Collaborate. It will be the best 3 days you could spend to make the next year larger and more successful that you can imagine. Get all the details at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/collaborate. I can’t wait to see what you accomplish.

 

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Creating Unique Content – PTC 308

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There is one way to stand out from the crowd in your podcast niche. Most people think the solution to creating unique content is creative or better content. That isn’t the case. Your content can be copied. You become unique by the way you present the content.

CONTENT IS KING?

You’ve heard it often. Content is king. Well, content isn’t king.

Content by itself won’t gain you an audience. Content isn’t king. Great content is king. Unique content is king. Your presentation makes that king one-of-a-kind.

I learned this early on in my radio career when my program director told me to stop copying everyone else.

On-air radio talent, a.k.a. DJs of disc jockeys, get critiqued on a regular basis by their program directors in meetings called aircheck sessions. In these one-on-one meetings, you listen to your show and your PD gives you suggestions to make it better.

Nobody likes to be critiqued. However, if you understand that your best interest is what it is all about, your show gets better.

We had just launched a new station playing alternative music of the early 90s. New Order, R.E.M., Depeche Mode, Natalie Merchant and 10,000 Maniacs, and so many others. It was a great time.

I had moved across the hall from our active rock station. At that station we were playing Metallica, Pearl Jam, AC/DC, Motley Crue and the rock tunes of the time.

Even though I had made the move to the alternative station, my style and delivery was still influenced by the DJs on the rock station. I was using the lingo, cadence and content that I had been using over there. It was natural to me, but didn’t fit the style of the station.

As we were listening to my show in that aircheck session, my program director pointed it out. She said, “That line is really a rock thing. Why don’t you leave it to them and do something unique? Be yourself.” That is when I took the first step in really developing my own style.

JUST A KNOCK OFF

Everything I was doing to this point was simply a derivative of someone else. I was a cliché, a poor knock off.

Why would anyone listen to me when they could get the real thing by listening to the original?

From there, I took my content and made it original. It was on the road to becoming great.

Over the years, my style and content developed. I became myself. That is when my show finally became #1. My content was original and fresh. Nobody else could copy it, because it was my authentic self.

GREAT CONTENT

Before you can get to your unique self and unique content, you need to have great content. People need to care first.

If your content isn’t great, nothing else matters.

The production of your podcast could be the best available. You could have all the bells and whistles available in your studio. The marketing of your podcast could incredibly creative and unique. However, if the content isn’t great, no one will care.

Once you have your great content, don’t simply go through the motions creating your podcast. Find a unique angle. Your take on the subject should be interesting, personal and full of stories. Make your content stand out using creativity and personal revelation.

It is just like this example. I could tell you to create unique content by being yourself. But 20 other podcast coaches could do that as well.

How many can tell you they have learned this example through 30 years of radio experience and by actually learning it first hand while transitioning from one radio station to another?

I have had the #1 radio show in the market for 20 years. In fact, more people listen to my show than any other show on the radio in the state. And I’m not even on in the mornings during the time when most people listen to the radio. I’m on a 10-year run.

Be you and win.

Content won’t attract an audience unless it is great content. When your content is great, you become king. But you won’t remain king unless that great content is unique content. Make it happen by being yourself.

There are five key areas of focus when creating great and unique content.

1. REPEATING YOURSELF

That’s right, of course, like I said, obviously.

If you find yourself saying “obviously” or “of course”, you are making one of two errors.

The first error is repeating yourself. If you are saying “obviously” because you feel everyone already knows the information, you are wasting your breath. There is no need to say it. Everybody knows it.

I may say, “The sun comes up in the East, of course.” Everyone listening to me knows the sun comes up in the East. There was no reason for me to point out the origin of the morning sun.

“Of course” gets thrown in, so it didn’t look like I was trying to teach you about the sunrise. I didn’t want you to think I just learned that. “Of course” plays it off.

Instead, just say, “Because the sun comes up in the East, …” or something similar. Acknowledge it without the qualifier.

CONFIDENCE

The second error is lack of confidence. You may want to sound knowledgeable to those who know the information. Yet, you know there is a segment of the audience that does not know the details. In this case, you’re just wasting words.

I may say, “The band will be at the arena Saturday night, of course.” Some may be aware of this performance. Yet, there may be listeners in the audience who haven’t heard the news. It makes sense to add the information.

The idea is to sound knowledgeable and credible to those that already know, while providing the information to those unaware. You simply need to restructure you sentence and eliminate the cliché.

“When the band is at the arena Saturday night, parking will be at a premium.” This sentence provides new information to both segments. I include the “arena Saturday night” portion for the new listeners while giving those already aware of the concert new parking information. Both receive a benefit.

When you include “that’s right” or “like I said”, you are repeating yourself. Your listener heard you the first time. Most people use these cliches to fill time while they think of the next thing to say.

Avoid going in circles. Your listener will quickly become uninterested. Your show loses momentum. Know where you’re going and keep moving forward.

2. ELIMINATE CLICHES

I hear so many cliches in podcasts today. Actually, they are all over business in general.

The definition of a cliché is “a phrase or opinion that is overused and betrays a lack of original thought. It is a very predictable or unoriginal thing or person.”

We had a leader of our radio division who would use one particular cliché on every conference call we had.

Every month, we would have a conference call to keep each station in sync. It would be run by our division leader. The call would then feature 4 or 5 other speakers covering various topics. The call would last about 30 minutes.

After every speaker would finish their report, our division leader would say, “Really good stuff.” When he would talk about new resources that were available to us, he would wrap it up with “really good stuff”. When he talked about new music coming out, he would call it “really good stuff”.

What started out as a compliment became a hollow nod that carried no weight. It was overused and lacked original thought. It was predictable.

He got so predictable, as the speaker would wrap up, we would say to ourselves, “that was really good stuff” right before our leader would chime in with the same line. It kept us entertained on the call, but added nothing to the conversation.

FIND THE CLICHES

What cliches are you using? There are so many. Many times you don’t realize it is a cliché until you start listening to your own show, or a coach points it out.

This is a big reason you should be listening to your show in real time like a real listener. Pick a show that is a few weeks old and review it.

The one cliché that sounds most out of place to me on a podcast is, “To be honest with you”. When somebody says “to be honest with you”, I immediately think, “were you lying to me before?”

What message are you trying to convey when you say, “to be honest with you”? I assume you are simply trying to add emphasis to what you are saying. In reality, the cliché has lost its power. It means nothing. Cliché.

There are many others. We are thinking out of the box or pushing the envelope. Let’s take it to the next level. Erik here to remind you something or another. You know what I mean? You know what I’m saying. Tons of clichés.

Take an older episode of your show and really listen to it. Find the clichés and eliminate them. Be original and create unique content.

3. AVOID ROUGH TRANSITIONS

And now it’s time for …

This phrase seems harmless. It looks like a logical transition from one segment to another during your podcast. Unfortunately, this phrase gives your listener permission to leave the show.

When you use “and now it’s time for…” or some similar phrase, it tells the listener that one segment is over and we are moving on to something else.

This phrase also signals a natural break in the show and the perfect time to exit. The transition is a lot like a commercial break in a television show. It is time to grab the remote to see what else is available.

LIKE THE SIDE SHOW

Famous American showman P. T. Barnum noticed that people were lingering too long at his exhibits. If he could get them through the exhibit faster, he could get more paying customers through in a day.

Barnum posted signs around the exhibit indicating “This Way to the Egress”. Unaware that “Egress” simply meant “Exit”, people followed the signs to what they assumed was a fascinating exhibit only to end up outside. He got people to leave sooner.

Take down the “egress” sign. If you truly want to hold your listener from one segment to the next, don’t send up the signal. Simply move to the next segment.

The phrase “now it’s time for …” is also unnatural.

Imagine you are at a cocktail party. You are discussing the baseball game that you saw over the weekend. After that topic runs its course, do you say, “Now it’s time to talk about my new car”? I doubt it.

You probably just roll right into, “Hey, I bought a new car last week.” It is a natural transition. Your friend doesn’t think, “Hmm, that was a pretty rough transition.” They have moved on right along with you.

As you wrap up one segment, move right to the next. You might end the first segment with, “If you take those steps, things should be back to normal.” Roll into the next with, “Jackie has a question about teamwork,” and play the call.

The next segment just starts. You’ve hooked them on the next segment without opening the door to leave.

Don’t flash the exit sign. Eliminate “and now it’s time for” to hold your listener for the entire podcast.

4. BE ORIGINAL WITH UNIQUE CONTENT

Hello Everybody in Radioland! Are we on 1930s radio?

To be engaging and unique, you need to be human. You need to be yourself.

As you record your podcast, use your natural voice and your own words.

Individuals who are new to broadcasting tend to want to sound like their broadcasting idols. They try to imitate those they have heard on the radio with their voice and clichés.

Unfortunately, new broadcasters tend to sound as if they are using scripted drivel done in some character voice that is forced and unnatural.

You don’t need to sound like Gary Vaynerchuk, Wolfman Jack, Howard Cosell, Don LaFontaine or Howard Stern. In fact, you shouldn’t sound like those guys. They are who they are. You should be who you are.

If you are naturally over-the-top, then be over-the-top. If you are not, don’t fake it. You’ll sound like an amateur and a fake.

Be natural. Talk with a little energy, but always deliver it as you naturally speak.

The days of “the voice for radio” are gone. You don’t need a big voice to be on the radio. You surely don’t need a big voice to create a podcast.

Your voice becomes unique by what you say, not how you sound saying it.

Be yourself. Use your own voice instead of trying to impersonate someone else. Use your natural voice and your own words.

5. USE STORIES

Finally, use stories to create unique content. Nobody can copy your experiences and stories.

Through your stories, your listeners get to know you, like you and trust you.

Through the details you include in your stories all your listeners to get to know what you value and believe. They understand your personality.

Make your stories rich with detail. Create images in the theater of the mind of your listeners.

Focus on these five areas to create great content. Avoid repeating yourself. Eliminate the cliches. Create smooth transitions in your content. Above all else, be original and tell great stories.

These five areas will help you create unique on every episode.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Protecting Your Podcast Voice – PTC 307

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your voice is your power. It is your tool. Without your voice, you have no podcast.

(We discussed an amazing event called Collaborate at the beginning of this episode. Get details HERE.)

My college professor reached out to me this week. He asked if I would give a presentation to his new podcast class about developing and protecting the voice when creating a podcast.

ILLNESS HAPPENS

Throughout the year, it is inevitable that you will get sick. Maybe it is just a scratchy voice. Maybe you lose your voice altogether. When illness hits, what do you do about your show?

I typically get sick every Spring and Fall. Allergies in my part of the country run rampant.

We get extreme weather changes. It can get up above 100 degrees Fahrenheit in the Summer and below zero in the Winter. Spring and Fall are yo-yos. Two weeks ago it was 84. This morning it was 24 as I was taking my son to the hockey rink.

The combination of crazy temps and the leaves falling from the trees spikes allergies.

When I get sick, it makes it difficult to record my show. My throat is sore and raw. There is usually a bad cough. The frog sound coming from my voice box is not anything I can use to record a podcast.

Luckily I am prepared. When I record my show, I typically record two or three episodes at a time. They are also prepared a week or two in advance.

In addition to working ahead, I always have an evergreen episode ready to go. This is in case of emergencies where I need an episode at the last minute.

THREE THINGS

There are three things you can do to prepare for disaster.

First, work a week ahead. When you are working on the podcast for the following week, you have some flexibility. If something happens where you can’t record for any reason, you already have the show ready for this week.

Second, create an evergreen episode. This is an episode with content that never becomes outdated. This is your “just in case” episode. You simply set it aside in case you need it.

Finally, you can record an evergreen “donut”. This is an open and close that allows you to put repurposed content in the middle. It is like you are putting it in the middle of the donut.

Michael Hyatt, creator of Platform University and other great programs, did this a few years ago. He went on a month-long sabbatical. In order to continue to publish episodes, he recorded a brief open and close to highlight previous popular episodes.

To do this, you would record an open just like your regular show open. However, instead of introducing new content, you say something like, “This week we will be revisiting the one episode of my show that has been downloaded more than any other episode.”

You could also create a show of highlights or “best of” questions. This could be any content you can gather from previous episodes.

Your close would be very similar. “I hope you’ve enjoyed this ‘best of’ episode. I will be back next week with an entirely new episode.” This closes the donut.

Now, if you ever get sick, you have an option to continue to deliver content every week. Consistency is crucial to creating relationships. Plan ahead.

So, how do you stay healthy? How do you get well if you get sick? What ounce of prevention can you use to protect your most valuable asset? Here are a few tips.

CARE FOR YOUR VOICE

Take care of your voice.

  • Wear a hat & avoid the head cold
  • Speak from the diaphragm when recording
  • Avoid excessive clearing of the throat
  • Warm up properly by slowly expanding your range
  • Use a nasal rinse

DRINK

When recording, stay hydrated.

  • Drink room temp water to avoid constriction from cold beverages
  • Avoid caffeine, because it also constricts
  • Avoid soda & syrup drinks to prevent the crud building up in your throat

GET WELL

If your voice gets strained, here are a few things to try.

  • Gargle with warm salt water
  • Use a humidifier to keep your membranes hydrated
  • Drink warm decaf tea with honey
  • Drink warm, diluted cocoa
  • Use a nasal rinse
  • Drink plenty of water
  • Experiment to find what works

Your voice is your most valuable asset. Do all you can to protect it. Stay healthy.

If you get sick, try these seven tips to get well.

Above all, don’t risk it. Plan ahead. Illness is inevitable. Have a show in the can or a plan to create some evergreen content should you get sick. Get ahead of the game.

Above all, do your best to protect your podcast voice and stay healthy.

 

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Power of Podcast Partners – PTC 306

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Whether you are looking to grow your audience or build a business around your podcast, there are few things as powerful as podcast partners.

Partners create a win-win situation where both sides benefit. You simply need to walk into the relationship seeking to help the other side win. Find the right people and you will be reaching your goals faster than ever.

COLLABORATE

I’m excited to once again be part of the legendary, virtual, live event called COLLABORATE. It is happening once again!

Get the full details and register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

You’re going to love this event. It is a cutting-edge, results-oriented experience. It was created by the amazing team at JV Insider Circle (JVIC), who also brought you the annual JV Experience (JVX) Summit, which is the world’s #1 joint venture summit.

In order to design the ultimate event, the JVIC team analyzed mountains of feedback and gigabytes of successful collaborative partnerships generated among attendees from their many past events, both live and virtual.

The result is COLLABORATE. It is an event with everything the revered JVX Summit has to offer, but supercharged!

See full event details, read the many testimonials and register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

3-DAY EVENT

During this 3-day live online event you will connect with hundreds of top coaches, entrepreneurs, authors, speakers, program leaders & owners of podcasts, radio shows, and other live or virtual events, who are all interested in promoting your podcast, products & programs. This is where you find real podcast partners.

You will have the opportunity to join the many Networking Circles and meet industry leaders & influencers from around the world. These are 20 minute breakout session with about 8 experts where you introduce yourself and see if you are a good fit.

If networking events make you uncomfortable, there is no worry. Iman Aghay will teach you exactly how to introduce yourself and how to describe what would make a good partner for you.

Your pitch is 2 minutes and you refine it in each circle of 8 people. There is no pressure. You don’t need to awkwardly walk up to anyone to strike up a conversation. It is all right there is a small Zoom meeting.

I met about 120 people at my first Collaborate. Of those, 40 were potential partners who fit what I do. At the last one, I was much more particular with whom I wanted to partner. I still found 20.

As you can tell, I am a huge fan of this event. That is why I have attended multiple times and became an affiliate. It did amazing things for my growth.

How powerful would that be for you?

During the event, you will get feedback and hone your pitches in front of small groups and live coaches. This will help you ensure your message is on target.

You will learn valuable knowledge and proven practical tools from guest speakers during the event. This is just a small part of the 3 days. You spend most of the time networking with others in a way that is step-by-step for you.

Get one-on-one coaching help to find more collaborating partners to promote your podcast, products & programs. You get 2 coaching sessions to ensure your partner pitch is fine-tuned.

GET IN NOW

You get it all for $47. Where else can you get this kind of powerful event where you can meet so many potential partners? Don’t miss this epic supercharged event!

Get registered at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/Collaborate.

Let’s talk about what collaboration can do for you.

PODCAST PARTNERS POWER

We already talked about how you can help each other. Find new potential partners and ask, “How can I support you?” Ask often enough and you will create some incredible relationships.

Create a calendar to properly promote each of you partners. Before you begin filling your calendar with partners, lay in your own promotions. Know exactly when you want to attract clients or launch your courses. Block out that time on the calendar. Then, fill it with partners.

There four big ways podcast partners can help you reach your goals.

PODCAST PARTNERS PROMOTE

  • Interview swaps
  • Promo swaps
  • Newsletter swaps
  • Facebook Live swaps
  • Social shares

PROMOTE PRODUCT, SERVICE, COURSE

  • Launch
  • Mentions
  • Highlights
  • Bonus offer

CONTRIBUTOR

  • Course contributor
  • Episode contributor
  • Email content

COLLABORATION

  • Connections
  • Ideas
  • Inspiration

FIND PODCAST PARTNERS

Come join me at COLLABORATE. You’re going to love this event. It is truly a results-oriented experience. If you want to supercharge your relationships and find podcast partners, this will be the best $47 you spend all year.

During this 3-day live online event you will connect with hundreds of top coaches, entrepreneurs, authors, speakers, program leaders & owners of podcasts, radio shows, and other live or virtual events, who are all interested in promoting your podcast, products & programs. This is where you find real podcast partners.

Get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate. I’ll see you there.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your Podcast Funnel Framework – PTC 305

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Do you have a funnel framework built around your podcast? Your show provides you a huge opportunity to make a powerful connection with your audience. But, the whole process of a funnel can be confusing.

As we go through this, I want to give you a free resource. For a limited time, you can get a free account for life to GrooveFunnels.

This includes GroovePages, which is a powerful funnel builder. You also get full access to GrooveSell and GrooveAffiliate. All 3 are free for life if you sign up now.

For your free GrooveFunnels account, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnel.

For the upgrade to a platinum account for life for a one-time price, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnelupgrade.

Let’s get rid of some of the confusion around funnels.

WHAT IS A FUNNEL

A purchase funnel is best viewed as a customer’s journey with you. First, they become familiar with you. The listeners then decide if they like you and trust you. Then, they might decide to buy something from you. Finally, they decide to go all in with your high end product.

In 1898, Elias St. Elmo Lewis created a model highlighting the stages of a customer’s relationship with a business. This model can be used with your podcast as well.

St. Elmo Lewis called it the “AIDA” model. It describes 4 stages every prospect encounters as they take the journey. “AIDA” stands for:

  • Awareness
  • Interest
  • Desire
  • Action

At the Awareness stage, prospects become aware that they have a problem and that a solution exists.

The prospect then becomes interested in a few products or services as the potential solution for them.

The next step is desire. This is where the prospect evaluates a particular solution.

Finally, they take action and decide whether or not to buy.

A conversion funnel is similar to a purchase funnel. Conversion funnel is the term used to describe the course a consumer follows online.

Both of these are described as a funnel, because fewer and fewer people make it to each stage. For instance, at the desire stage a portion of the prospects will decide your solution isn’t right for them. Therefore, fewer people move to the next step of the funnel.

YOUR PODCAST

So, how can you build a funnel with your podcast?

First, you need to get in front of new potential listeners as we’ve been discussing the past few weeks. This is phase 1 of Awareness. This is how people get to know you exist.

Next, your podcast demonstrates what you know and what you’re all about. This is phase 2 for you. This is where people decide if you are right for them.

Phase 3 is desire. You create desire by offering them additional help. Show them what you do and then how they can get more of this.

In phase 3 you would offer them a free resource in exchange for their name and e-mail address. This could be a report, checklist, or some other piece of value. You talk about it on your show and encourage them to take the next step in the funnel.

This free resource is typically referred to as a lead magnet. It is designed to attract leads for you. If you want a list of 21 lead magnet ideas, get it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/21lead. No e-mail address required. Just head over and download it for free.

To complete step 3, you need a landing page builder and a way to deliver your free resource. This is what resources like ClickFunnels, LeadPages and GroovePages will do for you. ClickFunnels and LeadPages will cost you a monthly fee. Or, you can get GroovePages free for life at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnel.

GroovePages is a full page and funnel builder. This will allow you to build brand websites with full navigation. With GroovePages, you can sell your products with 1-click upsells. You even get custom domains, free bandwidth and hosting. It comes with free upsells, downsells and order bumps to help boost your sales.

BUILD THE RELATIONSHIP

You now have their e-mail address and a way to communicate with them on a regular basis. You can continue to build the relationship using the great content on your podcast and the value you provide in your e-mail.

If they love what you’ve given them for free, they may take that next step with Action. That is phase 4. This is where they buy what you’re selling. This could be your e-book, course, product, service or something else.

This is where resources like SamCart, Shopify and GrooveSell come into play. Again, you can pay a monthly fee for SamCart or Shopify. Or, you can get GrooveSell for free for life at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnel.

GrooveSell is a complete and robust shopping cart and affiliate program. It is content delivery made easy. You also get great analytics and data.

GrooveAffiliate gives you a complete affiliate system. This allows you to connect with others where you help each other sell the other’s stuff for an affiliate commission.

Even if you don’t have anything to sell, you can sell affiliate products and make money. There is GrooveAffiliate Marketplace to help you find and sell products from other experts and make money. Just like I do here with this GrooveFunnels affiliate link. If people buy from GrooveFunnels, I make an affiliate commission.

These tools are free for a limited time. Eventually, it will be $99 per month. If you get in now, you get free lifetime accounts to GroovePages, GrooveSell and GrooveAffiliate. No credit card required ever.

This is how you use your podcast to move your prospects through your funnel. Now, you can add additional layers. But get these pieces to get started for free.

GROOVEFUNNELS

This GrooveFunnels opportunity allows you to get a free account for life. GroovePages is an incredibly powerful funnel builder. You also get full access to GrooveSell and GrooveAffiliate. It is free for life.

For free GrooveFunnels, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnel.

Now, if you would like to upgrade, you can get lifetime access to the entire GrooveFunnels suite. This is an amazing opportunity. It includes GrooveMail, GrooveMember, GrooveVideo, GrooveKart, GrooveWebinar, GrooveCalendar and so much more.

You can get the upgrade for a one-time payment and never pay a monthly fee. It is just rolling out with a big launch. Buy it now before it converts to a monthly payment and get lifetime access to all of these tools to build your business. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnelupgrade.

GrooveMail is a powerful, automated, behavioral-based email marketing system based on tagging. This allows you to send e-mail to all of those fans who gave you their e-mail address for your great resource. This is similar to ActiveCampaign or Aweber without the monthly fees.

You can build a membership site with GrooveMember. This would be like Kajabi. Except you aren’t paying the monthly fee when you buy GrooveFunnels outright.

Vimeo is a great tool to host videos for your marketing and courses. You can also do that with GrooveVideo. It is powerful video marketing built right into the platform.

Are you paying monthly for Zoom or GoToWebinar? You can save that fee. GrooveWebinar is a live webinar platform built right into GrooveFunnels.

EverWebinar allows you to create evergreen webinars. It too comes with a monthly fee. You can save that money by using GrooveEvergreen. It is an automated webinar system and it is included.

OTHER FEATURES

How do you schedule your meetings? If you are like me, you’ve probably been using something like Calendly. Well, GrooveCalendar is part of GrooveFunnels. It is a powerful scheduling system built right in.

There is also GrooveStream. Similar to StreamYard, it will allow you to live stream. You get help desk software with GrooveDesk, a survey feature with GrooveSurvey and a social proof widget with GrooveProof.

Now understand, they are still building out some of these features. Still putting the finishing touches on them. A few are still in beta. But they are all coming.

You can buy it now before it converts to a monthly payment. Get lifetime access to all of these tools to build your business. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnelupgrade.

If you added up all of the monthly payments you would be making for all of these third party applications, you would be spending over $17,000 per year.

Or, you can buy GrooveFunnels for one flat price that is a fraction of that. It is a seriously great deal. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnelupgrade.

I would give you the price, but it keeps going up the closer they get to a full launch. Eventually, it will be a monthly fee just like the rest.

However, if you get in now you can get lifetime access for one price and never pay again. Don’t snooze and let this slip by you.

If you are serious about building a business around your podcast, Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/funnelupgrade.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Why You Don’t Make Money With Your Podcast – PTC 304

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You get held back when you don’t know what you don’t know. There are 7 pitfalls that you need to avoid if you hope to make money with your podcast. If you are struggling to figure out how to make money with your podcast, be sure you have solved these issues.

Your podcast allows you a great opportunity to demonstrate your authority while talking about a topic that you love. How great is that?

If you structure the focus of your show properly, your podcast can be an amazing tool to drive your business and generate revenue.

FREE TRAINING TO MAKE MONEY

I want to invite you to a training on Tuesday where I will teach you 7 different ways you can easily attract your ideal clients using a podcast. Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Using what I learned attaining my MBA, I have spent the last 30 years in radio refining how to create effective marketing campaigns to attract listeners and clients alike. I have used those skills to teach podcasters how to do the same since 2013. Those proven ideas have now been distilled into these 7 concepts that I will teach you.

You can learn them all on Tuesday. I will offer a replay as well, but only if you preregister. Get in now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show?

Do you want to grow your audience in just a few minutes a day using time-saving tips to consistently produce and promote your content?

You can get all of that and more on Tuesday. It is a 60-minute training with a replay available. If it is time to let go of the trial and error, come get the step-by-step formula.

MORE THAN ONE WAY

Many people believe sponsorships and advertising are the only ways to make money with a podcast. Untrue. In fact, you shouldn’t clutter up your show with ads. Instead, use your podcast as a powerful marketing tool for your business. Today, I am going to teach you how to do just that.

Podcasting is huge. You have incredible power in front of you. Let me show you some numbers.

There are nearly 1 million podcasts today. On the other hand, there are 600 Million blogs and 1.3 billion YouTube videos. Where do you want to compete?

Podcast search engine Listen Notes reports there were 246,782 podcast debuts last year alone. Today, more than 90 million people in the U.S.— approximately 32% of the U.S. population over the age of 12 — have listened to a podcast in the past month according to Edison Research.

According to The Nielsen Company, the total podcast audience is growing at a compound average growth rate of 20%. And that could mean the overall audience for the medium could double within the next five years. Now is the time to stake your claim in your niche. Get noticed and build your audience.

Let’s talk about why many podcasts don’t make money. There are a few reasons podcasts don’t make money or attract clients.

WHAT ARE YOU SELLING?

The first issue is you don’t have anything to sell.

When podcasters contact me for coaching, our first step is a podcast strategy session. During that call, we define goals and the strategy to achieve those goals.

Though the questions vary, one seems to consistently come up. “How can I make money with my podcast?” I ask, “What are you selling?”

Can your listeners currently give you money for anything?

As coaches and content creators, you probably have something to sell. You just need more people to buy it.

ARE YOU ASKING?

The second problem is you are not asking for the sale.

Podcasters say, “Yeah, Erik. I have a course for sale. Nobody is buying it.”

Have you told anyone about it?

One of my buddies has a great course available. I had known him for six months before I knew anything about it.

Once you build your rapport through your podcast, the “yes” should become a formality if you actually ask for the sale and help your listener succeed.

THE PAIN

Next, podcasts don’t make money because you haven’t uncovered the true pain

It is much easier to “not sell” when you are solving a pain rather than offering a benefit. There is a saying that “more people buy aspirin than vitamins.” People are more willing to pay to get out of pain than experience a pleasure.

When you are solving that pain, you need to ensure you have uncovered the true pain.

On your podcast, you could be answering questions from you listeners. You will see some commonalities develop that uncover the true pain of your audience. It is like market research right on your show.

MORE REASONS

There are 3 more reasons podcasts don’t make money. I’ll be covering those in the free training on Tuesday. I will also give you 7 ways to make money with your podcast.

Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Would you like to have a clear, step-by-step blueprint to grow your audience? You will learn how to get that when you join us on Tuesday. You can build a plan to grow your audience that you can consistently implement in as little as 15 minutes a day.

Podcasting is only getting bigger. Now is the time to lay the foundation to be known as an influencer and respected authority in your niche. When you build you show the right way, you can consistently attract listeners who become raving fans, share your podcast, and purchase your programs.

Learn how on Tuesday. Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth. I can’t wait to see you there.

Do you need help with your podcast? Check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

[Coaching Session] Creating Revenue Ideas – PTC 303

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Would you like to make money using your podcast? Today, I am going to take you through an actual coaching session where we develop revenue ideas for a non-traditional podcast.

HOW TO MAKE MONEY

Most people think there are two ways to make money with your podcast. You could sell ads and sponsorships if you have a huge audience. Or, you need to be a coach or expert in order to sell your courses and services.

If you can be a little creative with your brainstorming, you can find many unique ways to make money with any podcast.

FLORIDA FOCUS

Brandon Marsters is the co-host of Florida Focus: A College Football Podcast. Find it at FloridaFocusPodcast.com.

Brandon and his podcast partner would like to make a little money with their show. Enough money to cover the costs of the show would even be good.

The show is currently making just a few dollars a month from Patreon. When I say “a few”, I mean about $12. Not quite enough to cover the expenses.

The show is into its third season with almost 90 episodes published. The podcast is all about college football in Florida. On this episode, Brandon and I create a variety of ways to leverage his podcast to make money.

There are a variety of unique ways to make money with your show. You simply need to be creative. These are just a few.

If you would like a free podcast strategy session like this one with Brandon, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. I would be happy to talk with you and see how I can help.

THE PLAN

That’s how it works. You simply need to be creative.

Based on what Brandon told me, it sounds like we could make money with his podcast by giving fans something they can’t get anywhere else.

He first needs to build his audience by creating listener interaction on the show.

Next, he can build his e-mail list in order to begin conversations with his audience. The list could be built using the free stuff he is giving to the Patreon members.

GIVE THEM WHAT THEY WANT

Once Brandon is engaged in conversation with his fans via e-mail, he just needs to find ways to give them what they want. Florida fans want experiences like meeting old players/coaches or tailgate parties. He could put on some events and charge money to get in the door.

Fans also want access. Brandon could get access to the news conferences by making connections with local media to use their content. He could then create a membership site to curate the info for fans.

Then the last thing – connect with people on social media. Direct message people to get them on the show. Let’s not make them jump thru hoops.

If we do those things, we can create unique opportunities for his fans and allow the show to make money without having a course or coaching program to sell.

You need to find things that are in your wheelhouse. If you enjoy live events, create a live event. If not, find something else. Maybe you enjoy writing. Create a paid subscription. Memberships, curated content and experiences are a few other ways to make money. Then, use your podcast to promote it.

FREE TRAINING

Making money with your show all begins with building an audience. I will show you how to do it. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Thanks for being here. See you again next week.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? Get a free podcast strategy session at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Secrets To An Effective Podcast Interview – PTC 302

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Do you conduct interviews on your podcast? When you spend most of your show interviewing others, it will sometimes become difficult to find time to promote your goods or services and demonstrate your authority. Let me show you how to build your authority with a podcast interview.

Your entire show doesn’t need to focus on your guest just because you conduct interviews. Carve out a little time for yourself.

EXPLODE YOUR AUDIENCE

Before we dive into reconstructing your podcast interview episodes, let me give you some free training.

If you would like to learn how to grow your audience and leverage your podcast, join me for a free training. It is called “How To Explode Your Podcast Audience In 6 Weeks Or Less”. It will be a live, hour-long training on Oct. 6 at 12 Noon CT.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to become a respected authority in your niche and leverage that authority to help you monetize your show?

Do you want to learn time-saving tips to consistently produce your podcast, find interesting guests, promote your episodes, record the podcast and edit your content?

In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast and build your authority.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

PODCAST INTERVIEW STRUCTURE

Let’s talk about the structure of your interview episodes. If you want to conduct an effective podcast interview, use the episode to demonstrate your authority and get people to take action, you need to follow 4 steps.

First, begin with the end in mind. What do you want your listeners to do when this episode is done?

Take my podcast for example. Let’s say I am interviewing a joint venture partner who has a webinar coming up that helps middle-age people transition into a career as a solopreneur. I want listeners to register for that webinar. We have a goal for the episode.

Second, we need to structure the podcast interview. I need to ask my guest questions that will get him to tell stories that get my listeners excited about his webinar. These could include stories about how he got started, what he would do differently if he started over and the best next step for my audience.

When you know the goal of the interview, it become a lot easier to structure your questions and know exactly what to ask.

After the interview, I then find some part of the interview that I could teach even more.

STRUCTURE EXAMPLE

Let’s say during the podcast interview, he talks about the benefits of being a solopreneur rather than an entrepreneur with employees. What could I teach around that?

If podcasters want to make money with their show, they need to turn listeners into clients. Then they can decide to become a solopreneur.

In my podcast, I could teach ways to attract your ideal clients using a podcast.

The fourth and final step is to assemble it in an order that makes sense.

First would be my recorded show open. This tells my listeners what the podcast is all about, who I am and who I help.

Next, I would add the episode intro. This tells listeners what this particular episode is all about and how they will be transformed by the end.

As I get into the content, I would teach my content. I will show listeners how they can attract their ideal clients using their podcast.

In order to attract clients, you first need to be an entrepreneur. Just our luck. I have our guest on the show today to show you how and why to become a solopreneur.

We then get into the podcast interview. Our conversation shows listeners the benefits of becoming an entrepreneur. Listeners learn why it is even better to be a solopreneur with no employees.

Finally at the end of the interview, we give our listeners a way and incentive to sign up for the webinar to learn more.

Now through the episode we have demonstrated our authority and expertise. We have conducted a great interview to allow our listeners to get to know, like and trust our guest. And, we have given our listeners a way to get even more help if they choose. Everybody wins.

PODCAST INTERVIEW NERVES

As you conduct a podcast interview, it is natural to be a little nervous. We are putting ourselves out there usually to a person we don’t know very well.

How can you curb your anxiety before you jump into your interview?

First, understand that interview butterflies are natural. Find some comfort in knowing that most every interviewer feels some nervousness the minutes before the talk begins. It is very similar to public speakers.

You’re not the only one.

FOUR STEPS

There are four things you can do to get over the jitters. These should help you a bit to calm the nerves before the podcast interview.

  • Prepare

    Make sure you have your interview plan ready. Be knowledgable about your guest. Have at your fingertips any details that you will need. Create a map and know where you are going. Ensure you know what you hope to achieve with this particular interview.

  • Preinterview – Explain the process

    Before the interview, have a quick chat with your guest. Let them know exactly how the interview will run and what they can expect. This will not only put you at ease, it will make your guest more comfortable and open.

  • Understand you are helping them

    Your guest is on your show, because there is some value to them. Guests typically do not appear on podcasts out of the goodness of their heart. They are interested in expanding their brand by being on your show.

You have something to offer your guest.

Podcast guests are marketing their goods or services to your audience. You are putting them in front of a group of people that can expand their reach. This is a huge opportunity and benefit to them. You aren’t simply taking from them. Find comfort in knowing that you are helping each other.

  • Really listen and be involved in a conversation

    Many podcasters get wrapped up in thinking of the next question and fail to listen to the current answer. Have a dialog instead of a lecture. Truly listen to the answers your guest is offering. Those answers tend to lead to amazing follow-up questions.

    By getting heavily involved in the conversation, you will take your mind off of your nervous butterflies.

REFINE

Next time you create an interview episode, be sure you are making time to demonstrate your authority. Show people what you are all about.

Start with the end in mind. Figure out what you want to accomplish before you even conduct the interview. When you start with an overview, it becomes easier to achieve your goal.

Use these four steps to ease your nerves and settle into the conversation.

If you would like to learn how to grow your downloads, join me for a free training. It is called “How To Explode Your Podcast Audience In 6 Weeks Or Less”. It will be a live, hour-long training on Oct. 6 at 12 Noon CT.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Keep Listeners Returning – PTC 301

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How can you keep you listeners returning week after week? We are going to talk about that along with marketing tips and podcast profits this week.

We are answering your questions on this episode of Podcast Talent Coach. If you have a question, e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I read all of those notes and answer as many as I can here on the show.

MARKETING

I’m looking for marketing tips on how to get the podcast noticed and ranked.

– Dirk

In order to get your podcast noticed, you need to get in front of new listeners.

So many podcasters try to grow their podcast audience by posting on Facebook and sending e-mail to their list. The problem with this tactic is that all of these people already know you. They are already aware of your podcast.

If you are active on Facebook in groups and are allowed to mention your show there, you could get in front of new listeners. Be careful with regard to the rules of the group.

Many group owners don’t want you to promote in their group. You will need to mention your show while you serve.

If someone asks a question in a group regarding podcast growth, I might say, “On my podcast, I often recommend podcasters find ways to get in front of new audiences.” By doing this, I mention my podcast while answering the question and serving.

There are many other ways to get in front of new listeners. This could include summits, podcast interviews, guest blogging, e-mail shares and others.

GROW YOUR AUDIENCE

If you would like to learn how to grow your downloads, join me for a free training. It is called “How To Explode Your Podcast Audience In 6 Weeks Or Less”. It will be a live, hour-long training on Oct. 6, 2020 at 12 Noon CT.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to become a respected authority in your niche that will help you monetize your show?

Do you want to learn time-saving tips to consistently produce your podcast, find interesting guests, promote your episodes, record the podcast and edit your content?

In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

BORED LISTENERS

I would really like to learn how to create content that will keep listeners returning. I haven’t started yet, but I’m worried of running out of ideas or guests to interview, or that listeners will get bored and not listen anymore.

– Elizabeth

Wow, Elizabeth. What a packed question. Let’s take these in parts.

First, let’s start with the last part. How do you prevent listeners from getting bored and not listening anymore?

Many podcasters make the mistake of trying to create content for others. You need to create content that you find interesting and engaging. The key to being interesting is being interested.

When you try to force content simply because you think your audience wants to hear that information, you will suffer three problems. The content will feel hollow, because you aren’t excited about it. Producing the content will start to feel like work, because it isn’t your passion. Finally, your audience won’t grow, because you will be creating average content.

Instead, create content that stirs your passion. You will have great stories. Your shows will bubble with excitement. Listeners will be attracted to the energy of your show, because it is designed specifically for them. If you love it, they will love it. Be interesting by being interested.

GET THEM TO RETURN

Next, how do you create content that will keep listeners returning? The first thing to understand is the difference between promoting your content and teasing your content.

Promoting your content is just information. In my free training I mentioned, you will learn how to grow your audience. That is only the info. It doesn’t pique your interest or create any excitement.

Teasing my training creates interest, excitement and fear of missing out. When I say, “In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast”, that creates some excitement.

A tease is more than the ingredients in the box. A tease is the benefit and transformation the information provides.

TOPIC IDEAS

Let’s talk about your ideas. If you are worried about running out of ideas, you may not be in the right niche. If you are creating a podcast around your passion, the ideas should come easily.

Here is how you can be sure you are in the right niche. Take out a piece of paper and start brainstorming possible podcast topic ideas. You should be able to come up with 40 or 50 ideas in about 10 minutes.

What do beginners need to know? Talk about the biggest mistakes made by people in your niche? What do people need to know about your topic.

Don’t worry about the quality of the topics. Just write. Let topics lead to other topics. If you concern yourself about evaluating the topic, you won’t open your mind to produce 50. Just write.

INTERVIEW GUESTS

Finally, how can you get guests when you have very little to offer?

It is a misconception that people won’t come on your show simply because you are new. You won’t always be new. When you are on episode 50, episode 2 will still be there.

Episode 2 may only have 23 downloads this week. A year from now, episode 2 could have hundreds of downloads.

Your episode can live for years. Smart guests understand that value.

When doing interviews, you won’t start at the top with the biggest guests. Let your guests build on each other. At the end of every interview, ask your guest if they know two or three people who might make great guests for your show and find a benefit by appearing on your show.

If they can provide you a couple names, ask them if they will make an introduction. A warm introduction is much more likely to land you additional interviews. This is especially true if your guest had a great experience.

In each of these points, don’t let that little voice in your head get in your way. Getting your listeners to return, running out of ideas, a lack of interviews and bored listeners are all just symptoms of the Impostor Syndrome. You’ll be great. Just get started.

PODCAST PROFITS

I’m at that critical place of needing to make my podcast significantly profitable in order to continue. As my wife told me, “You are spending an enormous amount of time for a freebie.” I’d like to set up an efficient process to provide paid consulting for listeners. I did a little free consulting to test the waters and it went well, but I let the hurdle of logistics get in the way of moving forward with offering paid consulting.

– Dean

So many people want to make the process much more complicated than it needs to be. Don’t get all hung up in the funnels and back end and all the jargon.

When I started, my first client was from Canada. He reached out to me looking for help to refine his content and make it more engaging.

I quickly created a coaching program. For $500, he would receive 4 coaching calls with me. We discussed his goals and I made him the offer.

When he accepted the deal, I emailed him an overview of the plan and an invoice for our coaching. He mailed me a money order. We started coaching.

He had discovered a blog I was writing. Then he listened to my podcast. In that content, I would mention my coaching. That got things started.

As I picked up more clients, I moved to having clients send me payments through PayPal. My systems grew as my business grew.

It was no more complicated than that.

If you want to scale and begin doing group coaching, webinars and joint ventures, you will need more back end systems. But, you don’t need all of that to begin. Just find someone you can help and give them a way to pay you.

If you have questions, e-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

GROW YOUR AUDIENCE

If you would like to learn how to grow your downloads, join me for a free training. It is called “How To Explode Your Podcast Audience In 6 Weeks Or Less”. It will be a live, hour-long training on Oct. 6, 2020 at 12 Noon CT.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to become a respected authority in your niche that will help you monetize your show?

Do you want to learn time-saving tips to consistently produce your podcast, find interesting guests, promote your episodes, record the podcast and edit your content?

In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your Solopreneur Podcast Business – PTC 300

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your podcast allows you a great opportunity to demonstrate your authority while talking about a topic that you love. How great is that? Are you ready to become a solopreneur?

If you structure the focus of your podcast properly, it can be an amazing tool to drive your business and generate revenue.

Using what I learned attaining my Masters in Business Administration, I have spent the last 30 years in radio refining how to create effective marketing campaigns to attract listeners and clients alike.

I have used those skills to teach podcasters how to do the same since 2013. Those proven ideas have now been distilled into various ways you can easily use to attract your ideal clients using your content.

Are you leveraging your podcast to its full potential to build your authority and grow your business?

Let me show you THREE powerful ways to attract your ideal clients using a your content without spending hours upon hours learning and creating. By spending a few hours a week, you will be publishing great content on a consistent basis and attracting your ideal clients.

You can do any of all of them. Your choice.

DEMONSTRATE

  1. Demonstrate your products, courses and books. Give them a sample of your stuff. Then, tell them where to buy it. This is like a long infomercial or review for your stuff without the slimy feel. You are offering help and showing your ideal clients how to get more. Do you have a book our course you could demonstrate or highlight?

Let me show you a case study that will show you how this works.

OSCAR

When Oscar Trimboli came to me for coaching, he had the desire to strengthen the connection between his podcast and his consulting business.

Season one of his podcast consisted of interviews. He was headed into season two and wanted this season to be more about teaching his five levels of listening.

Oscar Trimboli is a mentor, leadership coach, speaker, author and podcaster. His podcast and book are both entitled “Deep Listening – Impact Beyond Words“.

Oscar Trimboli has 30 years’ experience in bringing out the best in senior executives and next generation leaders.

Leaders seek Oscar’s help when they feel frustrated with their organizations’ results and their own personal performance.

Clients say Oscar quickly takes them from feeling disoriented and confused, to feeling energized and ready to create their legacy.

As we worked together, our challenge was to bring that power and authority to Oscar’s podcast.

Our goal was to create engagement with his audience and demonstrate his authority in the space. Over time, this would help him grow his consultancy.

He could demonstrate his authority on his show and gain new clients.

YOUR SUPERPOWER

To build his authority in his space, I suggested that Oscar interject himself more into the episodes, so listeners get to know him.

Oscar needed to interject more into his episodes so we get to know, like and trust him.

Oscar Trimboli is now the author of 3 books. He also offers the “Deep Listening – Impact Beyond Words” playing cards set that helps improve your skills as a listener.

Over the last 7 years, Oscar has coached, mentored and advised people in a wide range of roles from founders, CEOs and CFOs to a variety of other leadership roles in financial services, technology, professional services, education and not for profits.

He has been asked to speak to leadership teams and their organizations about the importance of clarity to create change, how to embrace the digital economy and the role values play in the achievement of your purpose.

His podcast is now focused on the same material. He demonstrates his authority in and mastery of the space. This allows potential clients to experience what his coaching, mentoring and consulting is all about.

YOUR COACHING AND TEACHING

The second way to attract clients …

  1. Highlight your coaching sessions in your content as an example for prospects. Show your potential clients exactly what you do and the transformation you offer. Tell them how to sign up. So many people forget the call-to-action. They don’t tell people how to sign up. They don’t want to see pushy. The truth is people WANT to work with you. Tell them how. Do you have clients, potential clients or members of your community who would love to be featured in your content and get your coaching? Here is a great opportunity.

ZOË

Zoë Routh is one of Australia’s leading experts on people stuff in leadership. She helps leaders and teams overcome silos and turf wars to work better together.

She has worked with individuals and teams internationally and in Australia since 1987. From the wild rivers of northern Ontario to the remote regions of Australia, Zoë has spent the last thirty years showing teams struggling with office politics and silos how to work better together.

Zoë uses her podcast to open doors to her ideal clients. Rather than asking them to lunch or making a cold sales call, she invites those she would like to work with to be a guest on her show.

Zoë uses the interview to begin the relationship and really give value to these CEOs before she even starts talking about doing business together. That is my favorite way to use your content to land clients. Interview them.

THE MEDIA

The third way to attract clients …

  1. Get media to talk about you by becoming an available expert in your field. Your content demonstrates to the media that you can hold your own as an expert. It is like “As seen on …” Tell people how to get more of you. All shows need great guests. What would being on some big shows do for your business? Your content is like your resume.

Publishing content is a powerful way to let your potential clients to get to know, like and trust you. Your content helps build your authority in your niche and turn you into an influencer.

SOLOPRENEUR

When you set out on your own, you are usually a solopreneur. You are running the show.

Entrepreneurs have a team of employees around them. A solopreneur doesn’t have anyone on the payroll. However, that doesn’t mean you need to do it alone.

There are many opportunities to find subcontractors and virtual assistants who can help you do the busy work while you do the important tasks. Maybe you farm out the editing and posting of the podcast or building of the website. This could free you up to land more clients.

STEVE ERIKSEN

Steve Eriksen is brilliant at this. I met Steve at Collaborate a few months ago. Collaborate is an amazing event where you can meet joint venture partners in your niche.

The next Collaborate event happens September 18th and 19th. You can find information at wwwPodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Steve Eriksen is The Midlife Solopreneur. He quit his 6-figure job in the middle of a pandemic, to help other solopreneurs get more customers, clients, or patients.

He discovered that his 2-year MBA simply taught him to be a good corporate employee rather than a successful entrepreneur. That started his now 20-year quest to find the most effective sales and marketing techniques for solopreneurs and small businesses.

After writing hundreds of successful ads and having seen from the inside what makes a successful 6- and 7-figure launch from both a marketing and technology perspective, Steve is now bringing his knowledge, experience, and expertise directly to solopreneurs who want to get better results.

Steve developed his “Trusted Advisor” methodology after seeing other solopreneurs literally being conned out of money for high-ticket programs that promised the world, but the solopreneur simply was not in a position to benefit from the program.

After he experienced several high-ticket “strategy sessions” which were no more than disguised hard sell sessions, Steve developed the “GIVE” framework of being Generous, being Invested in your clients, give Value and have Empathy with your clients.

With his heart-centered approach of being a Trusted Advisor and using the GIVE framework, Steve’s business has grown to include 4- and 5-figure clients within the first 2 months of quitting his job.

I have invited Steve on the podcast this week to show you how to overcome the challenges as you launch your solopreneur journey.

You can find more about Steve and his programs at https://MidlifeSolopreneur.com/ptc.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

From Overlooked to Overbooked with Shelley Roxanne – PTC 299

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Word-of-mouth is one of the best ways to get your audience to grow. You can create word-of-mouth in many ways. It isn’t only one friend telling another. Word-of-mouth comes from hearing about something from any trusted source.

WORD-OF-MOUTH

People can hear about your podcast from a friend, a family member or a conversation between two others. They also might hear your show mentioned on another podcast, see it mentioned on social media or see it mentioned in a blog post.

You can also get in front of new listeners by appearing on television, on stage or on summits created for your target audience.

To grow your show, you need to get in front of people who are not already aware of you and your show. When people talk about your show in a good way, it is very similar to an endorsement. You win by association.

You never know if you can land an interview on another platform unless you ask. However, don’t ask in a pick-up line sort of way. You need to create a bit of a relationship before you can invite yourself on the show.

FOCUSED APPROACH

So many podcasters and agents of podcasters reach out to shows in a shotgun style. They randomly fire and hope they hit someone.

I know this, because I often receive interview requests from people who make no sense for my show or my audience. Do you homework and build the relationship before you ask for the interview.

Last week, I interviewed Dan Miller. He and I had been forming that relationship for years. I was really on his radar in the past 6 months. We knew each other before we even began discussing an interview.

When you try to land interviews, target fewer with deeper relationships. Find a dozen people who could become valuable connections. These should also be people you can help as well.

Begin these relationships about 6 months before you are ready to launch your course, interview tour or event. Give the relationship time to grow.

It is much easier to find those people when you have a warm introduction. If somebody who I know introduces you to me, it is much more likely that you and I will foster a relationship. If I get a random e-mail from a person I don’t know, there is very little chance that will go anywhere.

Work daily to help people and grow your network. Be a connector for others and your network will become amazingly big. Just do the work.

SHELLEY ROXANNE

I had the pleasure of meeting Shelley Roxanne through Joint Venture Insiders Circle. You can find a link to that amazing connection group at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jv. This is a group designed to connect people who are working in similar spaces. We help each other grow.

Shelley Roxanne is a media expert and coach. Just like me, she has spent years in radio and is a #1 best-selling author.

Today, we get Shelley-fied. She is here to share her secrets to help you get on other shows. You will see why I love her so much.

You will learn how to go from overlooked to overbooked. Shelley helps you discover how to skyrocket your confidence, your income and your impact. You will learn how to get known as an expert in your field.

We talk a lot about letting people get to know you by telling your story. Grab a pen and paper. Shelley is going to tell you the what, when, why and how to tell your story when you are being interviewed.

Our conversation is packed with so many nuggets, you’ll probably need to listen to it twice. Shelley is also going to talk about working directly with her in her Overlooked to Overbooked Masterclass.

You can save $500 off of the tuition by using the coupon code EKJ20 at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/overbooked. The next class begins September 1. Head over to see the details.

GET BOOKED FOR WORD-OF-MOUTH

Are you ready to get booked on other podcasts? You see how interviews can supercharge your word-of-mouth. You just need to get started.

Find 6 podcasters you know, or friends who know those podcasters. Start creating the relationships and grow your word-of-mouth.

This isn’t going to happen unless you take some action. Start promoting your brand, message and podcast by getting seen on other platforms.

Expand your thinking beyond podcasts. Find tv, radio, blogs, summits and stages. Find every opportunity you can to help those content creators make their platforms and content even better.

If you would like Shelley’s help, head to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/overbooked. Get Shelley-fied today and go from overlooked to overbooked. You need to hurry. The next class begins September 1. See if there are seats still available.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Work You Love With Dan Miller – PTC 298

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your podcast is such a powerful tool to not only build a business, but create a life of your dreams. If you have a message or something you can teach, you can create courses or programs to help people do what you do. With the right approach, you can do work you love the rest of your life.

The problem many podcasters face is their frame of mind. Many think the podcast is the business. That is a mistake.

The podcast is the marketing vehicle that promotes the business.

CRUSH YOUR INTERVIEWS

Before we get into it, I would love your feedback. In return, I’ll give you my interviewing course for free. It is called “Crush Your Next Podcast Interview Like a Radio Pro Without Decades of Training and Hours of Preparation.” You can have it for free if you will answer 8 questions for me.

I am updating my Audience Explosion Blueprint program that helps podcasters grow their audience. I am planning to roll it out again in October even bigger and better. Can you help me with a little input?

Head to PodcastTalentCoach.com/research. Sign up for a time to chat with me. I’ll ask you 8 questions. It takes about 20 minutes. In return, you get my interview course for free.

WHY WE GROW OUR AUDIENCE

So, why do we grow an audience in the first place? We grow our audience, so we can spread our message and influence.

There are 3 steps to growing your audience. That formula is Promotion, Programming and Personality.

Your promotion gets you in front of people who are not familiar with you.

The programming is your content. That is what gets people to come check out your material.

Finally, your personality keeps them coming back for more. Use your personality to build relationships with your listeners.

Once you have an audience, you can begin leveraging that attention to build your business. You can demonstrate your authority on your show. Show people your expertise.

Once you have built the relationship and your listeners are familiar with your expertise, you can make an offer to help them reach their goals.

This isn’t an overnight process. Building relationships and growing a business takes time. Get rich quick always costs more than it makes you in the long run.

WORK YOU LOVE

Today, I am bringing you a very special interview with Dan Miller. Dan has been my virtual mentor for over a decade. I have been listening to his podcast and reading his books for years. Podcast Talent Coach started, because of the inspiration Dan provided.

He has a membership site called 48 Days Eagles. I’ve been a member since the early days of that group. Recently, Dan asked me to lead the small podcast group within 48 Days Eagles, and it has been an honor.

Dan Miller’s bio is one we would all like to have. It says, “As a career thought leader, New York Times best-selling author Dan Miller helps high potential individuals understand and apply their unique and most powerful talents and passions so they can make a larger impact, leave a legacy and thrive financially.”

Is that what we are all trying to do with our podcasts?

Dan hosts a weekly podcast called “48 Days to the Work You Love”. It is consistently ranked #1 under Careers on iTunes. The 20th anniversary edition of his book “48 Days to the Work and Life You Love” was just released earlier this year.

It is my honor to have him on the show today to share with you some great nuggets. You will learn how to identify your zone of genius. We discuss how to break through the upper limit challenge. Most importantly, Dan tells us how he makes money with his podcast.

FREE GOODIES

At the end of our talk, Dan will tell you how to get a free chapter of the book, how to take a free “life you love” quiz and how you can get some great bonuses if you’d like to purchase the book.

A big thanks to Dan Miller for joining us on the show. I really enjoyed our conversation.

If you would like those free tools and bonuses, head to 48Days.com/ptc. PTC for Podcast Talent Coach.

Start taking action today. Let’s see what we can build around your podcast.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Defeating Your Mindset Kryptonite – PTC297

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

This week, Sadie did it. She was a member of my last Podcast Fast Blueprint program. She finally got into the right mindset, had a breakthrough and launched her podcast.

The interesting thing about Sadie is that she has been in radio for about a decade. Yet her limiting beliefs were holding her back from launching.

She had been out of radio for a couple years when she moved to Puerto Rico for a bit. Now she was jumping back in and wasn’t sure she could do it.

When Sadie launched, she sent me a text. “Thank you for holding my hand during this weird time in my career. I had really lost a lot of confidence, because I had been gone for so long.”

If a radio pro like this fights the Impostor Syndrome, I can only imagine what you go through when it is time to launch anything. It gets scary.

So, how can you have that breakthrough? How can you find the right mindset?

MY MINDSET BREAKTHROUGH

I began my broadcasting career when I was 19. It was completely by accident. I was going to college to get my architecture degree. Since I was 12 I had been tailoring my education to be an architect or engineer.

In college, I had the same fear of public speaking as most people. In our design classes, we had to do presentations in front of a panel of judges. I absolutely hated doing these presentations.

During class, four or five students would present during the hour. It would take about a week to get through the entire class. That was the worst part.

The anxiety would build for presentation day only to not get your name called. I would have to live through the anxiety again in anticipation of presenting during the next class. It was viscous circle.

I never envisioned being a public speaker, radio talent or any other presenter.

My younger brother worked for a radio station at the time. I was home for the weekend doing nothing like most college students. That was when the phone rang. It was the manager of the radio station looking for my brother to fill in during a shift. My brother wasn’t home and I was offered a part-time job. That’s where it all started.

That part-time job led to an easy journalism elective. That turned into becoming the music director at the campus station for a little college spending money.

Next thing I know, I’m working at a real commercial radio station. I would become program director of a few stations. I’m on stage introducing concerts in front of 15,000 people. Not what I had envisioned. I didn’t even like talking in front of 12 people.

COMFORT LEVEL

Over time, I started to get comfortable talking on the radio. It took a little time. I eventually got there. I changed my mindset.

It took me years to figure out how to overcome those butterflies I would get each time I stepped in front of a crowd. There were tips and tricks I learned along the way to help me. It was a combination of things I learned over the years that helped me defeat the jitters.

It doesn’t need to take you years to get comfortable. Learn a few strategies and you could save yourself years of trial and error.

Identifying your limiting beliefs is your first step. Then, proper preparation for your show is next.

In this episode, I’d like to help you discover how you can identify the barriers that are stopping you from living your fulfilled life. You can make a breakthrough and launch your next big thing.

MERRI-JO HILLAKER

I asked Merri-jo Hillaker to join us today to share her journey and breakthrough wisdom.

Merri-jo is a lawyer by profession, graduating top 5 % of her Law school and then also in earning her Masters in Tax. She worked for the largest law firm in her home state of Wisconsin and within 3 years was hired away at the age of 28 to be the Vice President and General Counsel of one of the largest publicly traded company in the state.

She was living an amazing life while only in her 20s.

A few years later, after recognizing that upper echelon corporate America can truly challenge your ethics, and that it was never going to feed her soul, she bought a company and moved to Texas where she still lives today. Unfortunately, that company didn’t succeed as she had hoped.

After an incredible mindset shift of her own, she has now been an entrepreneur, a venture capitalist, turning $20,000 into $1.1 million, and started her own foundation. Merri-jo sits on four charitable Boards including Changing Environments, which she started in 2008.

MINDSET MASTERY

Merri-jo has started yet another company in the last couple year. She created Global Mindset Mastery Association to satisfy her desire to share her vast knowledge to support others to breakthrough their limiting beliefs.

She has the energy of a 20 year old, and a huge heart of contribution. You can see that by all of her Board memberships, mission work and commitment to make a difference for the less privileged.

Merri-jo has a mission to empower others to live the life of their dreams so they too can experience a fulfilled life, and make a significant contribution as the world is clearly waiting!

She is an incredible soul and we are lucky to have her with us today. Grab a pen and paper and be ready to take notes. This one is gonna be good.

We learn why she decided to leave an amazing job to dive head-first into entrepreneurship. She talks about her bankruptcy and eventual million dollar cash out. You will also get some tips on how to break through your challenges and shift your mindset.

Enjoy the conversation.

YOUR MINDSET BREAKTHROUGH

Merri-jo is incredible. Such an inspiration.

I love how she hits bankruptcy in her first venture and almost immediately gets back on the horse by investing $20,000 in another business. That’s when you know it is part of your being.

You can’t help but get inspired just being around Merri-jo.

I convinced her to give you a special offer for her Kryptonite Breakthrough.

To learn more about the program, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/breakthrough – Tell her you heard her here and she will give you a 25% discount off the course.

Text Purpose to 26786 for a free consult with Merri-jo Hillaker.

Next week, I’m scheduled to interview Dan Miller of 48 Days to the Work and Life You Love. We will get the insights on how he uses his 48 Days podcast to drive his amazing business. You’re sure to get some tips, tricks and inspiration from that one.

Check out Dan’s free masterclass “3 Building Blocks To Get Your Business Off The Ground“.

Thanks for being here.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Increase Podcast Downloads With One Strategy Change – PTC 296

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How do you increase your podcast downloads? That is the magic question. It seems everyone is asking. It also seems everyone has the magic answer. Unfortunately, many podcasts are trying to increase downloads with a flawed plan.

Today, I want to help you adjust your strategy in a way that will help you amplify your download growth in a big way.

LET ME INTERVIEW YOU

First, I’d like to interview you. Would you be interested in having me introduce you to the audience of this show?

I’m looking to interview you if you have used your podcast to attract your ideal clients and grow your business. I want to help you learn by bringing you real life examples of using your podcast as part of your business plan.

If you are interested, send me an e-mail at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I cannot interview everyone. So, tell me what would make you a great interview and we can talk about it to see if it makes sense.

Let’s talk about the growth of your podcast downloads.

BE REALISTIC

First, be realistic. The number of podcast downloads isn’t huge for many podcasts.

Let’s go back to math class. Do you remember the difference between median and mean?

Mean is the average. Add up all points and divide the total number of points.

Median is the middle. Stack them up smallest to largest. The median is the one right in the middle. There are 50% higher than the median and 50% lower.

I like median much better. The number isn’t as easily skewed by outliers. If you have 5 shows that have downloads of 50, 100, 250, 400 and 2,000, your mean or average would be 560. Add them up and get 2,800. Divide by 5 and get 560.

Now, 560 isn’t quite representative of those podcast downloads of 50, 100, 250, 400 and 2,000. 4 of those 5 podcasters would feel like they aren’t as good as everyone else.

The median is the middle number. When you put them in order of 50, 100, 250, 400 and 2,000, your median or middle number is 250. That is a more realistic representation of those downloads. 4 of those podcasts are much closer to 250 than 560.

Bunch of numbers, but let’s compare apples to apples. Don’t let a few big podcasts make you feel inferior.

THE REAL DATA

Rob Walch at Libsyn releases real download data from all podcasts hosted by Libsyn. This data will give you a realistic view of how your podcast compares to all other podcasts on Libsyn.

On Episode 172 of Libsyn’s The Feed podcast, Rob presented his monthly report for May 2020.

This data is based on episodes on Libsyn released in the month of May 2020. Podcast downloads are measured from the time of release in May to the end of June 2020. The average time each episode had been available was 45 days.

The median podcast downloads for each episode in this sample is 120. That was down from April 2020 mark of 123 downloads per episode.

This means if at the end of June your May episode had 120 downloads, you were better than half of the pool. Half of the podcasts also had more downloads than your show.

120 is the number. Not 7,000. Not 4,500. In fact, if you had 1,000 downloads per episode, you were better than 80% of the podcasts available on Libsyn.

This number has been declining over the years. There are a lot of new podcasts. Therefore, the median continues to decline as the new shows try to find an audience.

PATIENCE

The second thing I want you to do is be patient. Your downloads will not grow overnight. This takes time.

I know we live in an instant gratification society. We want to microwave everything and have it now.

Weight loss doesn’t work this way. Podcast download growth doesn’t work this way either. It takes time.

You should keep your head down and work for about a year on growing your podcast downloads before you start checking the stats.

I was talking with a client this week and he was getting frustrated with his slow growth. His numbers weren’t growing.

He has been doing the show less than 6 months. He has just over 20 episodes. And, he checks his download every day or two.

This is like stepping on the scale to check your weight everyday. The scale isn’t moving. You won’t see big jumps.

This is like watching your tomato plants grow. If you check on them every hour, nothing happens. If you check on them once a week, you see some change.

Give you podcast downloads time to grow before you start checking the stats. Just keep your head down and do the work. Trust that it is working.

If you can’t wait a year, make it 6 months. Just don’t check it all the time expecting the needle to show big growth. Grow slowly and be comfortable with that.

FIND YOUR PODCAST DOWNLOADS

So, how do you find those downloads?

I was on a podcast strategy call with a podcaster the other day. These strategy calls are free for you. I help you design a podcast strategy for the next year. If you would like to sign up, go to PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

So, I was on a call with this guy and we were talking about his goals. My first questions is always, “Where do you want to be a year from now?”

His goal was to grow his downloads. We determined where he is now and where he wants to be in 12 months.

Then, we talked about the activities he is trying right now. He told me he was posting it on his social media and sending out an e-mail to his list every time he published an episode.

And there lies the problem. Those people already know about him and his podcast. He is preaching to the choir. Those 2 activities are not going to attract new listeners to his show.

Here is the strategy for you. If you want to grow your downloads, get in front of people who are not aware of you or your show, yet want what you have to offer.

THE FORMULA

The Podcast Talent Coach Formula for building a successful podcast consists of 3 stages: Promotion, Programming and Personality.

There are three legs to the stool for your audience growth plan. Those three legs are personality, programming and promotion. Without one of the legs, your stool won’t stand up.

The promotion of your show creates the awareness.

Your programming creates great content that attracts people to the show.

When you add your personality to the information, the content becomes unique and keeps people coming back. It is not enough to simply bring people to the show. You need to keep them listening. In Episode 286, we discussed Personality.

Let’s talk about promotion. How can you get in front of people who love what you love, but are not aware of you or your show?

Get on “stages” to get in front of new audiences. This is how you get exposure.

Don’t get scared of “stages”. I don’t mean only actual live stages giving speeches in front of a live audience. That is only one piece of it.

By “stages”, I mean any time you can speak to an audience.

STAGES

Here are five different types of stages that can help you get in front of a new crowd and increase your downloads.

The first makes most sense for you. That is podcasts. Find ways you can get on other podcasts in your niche.

Look for podcasts in the niche that do something complimentary to you. If you have a weight loss podcast and focus on healthy eating, find a podcast on exercises. If you have a business podcast that focuses on courses, find a podcast that is centered around product launches.

The next is newsletters. If you are sending out a newsletter, highlight someone in your niche in exchange for them highlighting you in their newsletter. Help each other grow.

EVENTS

Summits are a great way to demonstrate your authority in front of a new audience. Summits are like online conferences. There are usually a group of speakers that present over a number of days.

When you present on a summit, you can teach and help people grow. You can often tell them how to find you and your show. Replays are also often available for those who sign up for the summit.

The fourth ways is a to crowdsource an episode. Get a few experts to share ideas on your episode. Then, get those experts to share the episode. Rather than an interview, all experts answer the same questions or teach a solution to the same problem.

The final way to get in front of new listeners is virtual events. These could be networking events, conferences, presentations and other events like these.

Look for many of these online. Just do a search with your niche. For example, I would search for podcast summit, coaching conference and online business networking. There are many ways to find these.

For the podcasts, newsletters and crowdsourcing, you simply need to connect with podcasters in your niche. Reach out and ask, “Can we have a chat to see how we might help each other?”

CONNECT FOR PODCAST DOWNLOADS

Remember to connect when you get in front of this new audience. You want them to come back to your material.

If your goal is to grow your downloads, get them to listen to your show. Ideally, you would capture their e-mail address. Then ask them to listen with a nurture sequence where they get to know you.

Offer something for free with an opt-in. Use that opportunity to grow the relationship.

Remember to also show them your personality. This is what makes you unique.

This promotion will make them aware of you. Your programming makes them say, “That sounds like something that would benefit me – I’ll check it out.”

Your personality grows your relationship and keeps them coming back.

Let’s get on a call and work out your strategy to grow your downloads. Apply at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. No charge. We’ll just see what we can develop for you and your show.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Overcoming Your Challenges With Mindset – PTC 295

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Webinar: https://awakecommunication.mykajabi.com/a/31490/rnQoqfQC

With the pandemic, this year has been quite challenging. We set goals at the beginning of the year. By the middle of March, our mindset was completely derailed. Now that we are half way through the year, how are you overcoming your challenges to get back on track?

MINDSET IS POWER

Our mindset is a powerful tool. Finding the right mindset to achieve your goals is important as you continue on your journey. But when there is so much uncertainty in the world, how do we get in that right mindset?

It is understandable that you aren’t sure where to turn. What is appropriate in this time of life. Is it appropriate to sell you services? When will it be appropriate to reach out with an interview request?

The problem we have right now is that everyone is in a different situation. People in one city may be in near lockdown trying to avoid the pandemic. Others may be nearly life as normal. The challenge is finding the acceptable path.

Getting in the right mindset will help you on your journey. Find the confidence to start. Then, move on from there.

The situation is different from one person to another. Where one might be open to a conversation, another may be completely concerned with just getting through the day. You need to start with the conversation to determine where they are and what they need. Just reach out to help.

With the unknown, it is easy to get stuck. It is easy to get paralyzed by fear, frustration and overwhelm. You need to find ways to overcome the challenges.

This is true if you are launching a podcast, reaching out for interviews, starting a business or moving your business to new heights. Get in the right mindset to move past those challenges.

MINDSET MENTOR

Do you want to learn how to find that mindset? Today we are talking with Evakarin Wallin. She is a professional mindset mentor and coach who can guide you to conquer your fears, frustrations and overwhelm. She helps you find the obstacles that stand in the way of creating the life and business you desire.

With close to 20 years of experience working with amazing clients, she has guided clients to achieve remarkable success.

You will learn how to use her expansion method to overcome your challenges and get in the right mindset to get back on track this year.

THE WEBINAR

You can find her at EvakarinWallin.com. She also has a webinar coming up Aug. 4th and 5th.

Let’s get you back on track.

One thing she mentioned that I love is that we are all different. What it takes me to get into the right mindset will be different for you. Find what works.

Pay attention to the mind and body. Don’t hold all of your stress and worry in your shoulders or stomach. Release it, so you can create great things through the remainder of the year.

You can find that webinar info at PodcastTalentCoach.com/mindset.

Thanks for being here. We’ll connect again next week.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Revisit – How To Start A Podcast – PTC294

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

This week I am traveling. I got caught with only my laptop. Which got me thinking … what do you need to start a podcast? Follow these 6 easy steps and learn how to start a podcast.

WHY NOW?

I have been chatting with many coaches and online entrepreneurs over the past few months. So many of them mention that they are starting a podcast in a month or two.

Perfectionism is the one thing that holds so many people back from starting anything. Dan Miller of “48 Days To The Work You Love” often says, “If you wait for all of the stoplights to turn green before you go, you will never get started.”

Things will never be perfect. Start. Launch. Learn. Refine. Improve. Continue.

NOBODY STARTS AT THE TOP

That is the only way you will achieve big things. Very few people start at the top.

Over the next few weekends, my son is attending a few team tryouts. He is a 16-year-old ice hockey goaltender. He is trying out for teams comprised of 16- to 20-year-olds. I’m proud of the way he is showing up and competing.

We understand it is a long shot that he will make one of these teams. However, he is learning so much about what it takes to be the best at this level.

You can do the same. But, only if you start. Take action and start the journey.

If you want one of the best podcasts in your niche, get started.

If you want a successful online business or coaching practice, get started.

SOME FREE TRAINING

This weekend, I was listening to a training by my coach. He said, “If your first effort fails, you don’t want to fail in front of a crowd of thousands. Get started with what you have.”

When you start your podcast, be happy that the audience is small. This is the best arena for learning. Episode 50 will be much better than episode 1. But, only if you actually start and record episode 1.

If you haven’t launched your show yet, I am holding a free, online training on Saturday, August 1. It is called “How To Launch A Podcast In 30 Days To Attract Your Ideal Clients.” If you would like to attend from the comfort of your home, you can get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/launchtraining.

During this free training, you will discover:

1- The 3 Ps necessary for every successful podcast

2- How to use a podcast to attract your ideal clients

3- A step-by-step process to launch your show in 30 days

A year ago, I recorded an episode that teaches you the 6 steps to get your podcast up and running in 30 days. Stop waiting for perfection and start.

If I can record an episode in my car with a pair of earbuds, you can use whatever you have at home. Just get started.

Today, I want to revisit that episode. It was originally released last September. This will help you get started.

If you would like my help getting started, be sure to get registered for the free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/launchtraining.

Enjoy the episode and thanks for being here.

– – –

START A PODCAST

It seems so overwhelming. Launching a podcast looks so technical and confusing. What do you need to start a podcast?

It really is much easier than it appears. You can truly have a show up and running in four weeks.

When I was launching my podcast, I had been in radio for a couple decades. I knew how to create a great show.

What I didn’t know was how to get it on the internet, on Apple Podcasts and out to the world. I knew how to create an .mp3, but how do I make that .mp3 an actual podcast?

I watched a ton of YouTube videos. It felt like the more I watched, the more confused I became. It seemed everyone had their opinions without a real “right” answer. I had almost too many options. Which were the best?

6 STEPS TO START A PODCAST

Here are six easy steps to follow to get your podcast up and running. Don’t overthink it. Done is much better than working for perfection.

1. Logo & graphics

Canva

Fiverr

99 Designs

2. Website

WordPress

Hosting

3. Microphone

AudioTechnica ATR2100

Samson Q2U

4. Recording software

Audacity

Hindenburg

5. ID3 tags

An ID3 tag is a data container within an MP3 audio file stored in a prescribed format. The information is used by software like audio players and podcast catchers. For songs, this data usually contains the artist name, song title, year and genre of the audio file. For podcasts, it contains show name, show title, host name, website, and artwork.

ID3 Editor at PA-Software.com

6. Hosting account

Libsyn

Blubrry

JUST START

Hook up your gear. Record your show. Add ID3 tags. Upload it to your podcast host. Post it on your website.

This just gets your podcast out to the world. However, it doesn’t ensure you have great content.

To connect with your audience, you need to define your listener, lay out your mission, develop a show clock and more. You can get my podcast launch checklist at http://podcasttalentcoach.com/podcastlaunch.

Create great content. Spend most of your time promoting your show.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

When To Use Podcast Seasons – PTC291

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

We are answering your questions on the show this week. If you have a question, e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I read all of those notes and answer as many as I can here on the show.

Today we will cover what goes in front of your show open, are seasons right for you and do you have the right niche.

WHERE TO PLACE THE ANNOUNCEMENT

When you have a special announcement that you want to get out to the audience, is it better to place that announcement at the very beginning of the podcast or play through the intro and then make the announcement followed by the episode? Sometimes those special announcements can feel like false starts and throws off the flow of the podcast.

– Greg

I agree, Greg. Sometimes that special announcement can feel like a false start.

This is a matter of preference and style. There really isn’t a right or wrong answer.

Think of the listener experience. When they show up and press play, they want to hear your show. How doesn’t the intro of your show add to that experience?

When you go to a movie, there are a few trailers prior to the start of the movie. After the trailers, here we go. Time to roll the credits and start the movie. It would feel odd if the movie started and then we rolled a trailer about 5 minutes into the movie. It is all about the experience.

On the other hand, think of Law and Order. In every episode of that police drama, it would open with the crime scene. You would see the detectives gather the details of the murder and then the opening would roll.

This tactic is all about hooking the audience early. You must be there right as the show begins to understand the plot. It is all about the audience experience.

Saturday Night Live does the same thing with their opening skit. Some shows air a little “previously on” in order to get the audience up to speed.

What do you want the audience experience? If the announcement is the most important piece of content you could share, maybe you want it right up front. If the outtake from the interview truly sets up the interview and piques the interest of the audience, maybe it goes up front.

Think of it this way … If a listener is brand new to your show and listening for the first time, would they understand the piece before your announcement? Usually, no. You haven’t build any know, like and trust yet.

“Hey, I’m doing a webinar next weekend – go sign up” doesn’t work if the listener has no idea who you are.

Saturday Night Live’s opening skit works, because you don’t need to see the intro to find it funny. The Law and Order open works, because you don’t need to see the intro to be sucked into the show.

Most of the time, you will be best served by playing the podcast intro, doing your own episode opening after that to set up this episode and then doing a little housekeeping.

WHEN TO USE PODCAST SEASONS

Some podcasts present their show in “seasons”. What are the pros and cons?

– Jon

If your content makes sense in seasons, then use that format. Most do not.

Podcasts about sports would make sense in seasons if they take the offseason off. However, podcasts about business typically do not make sense in seasons. Business typically doesn’t have a season.

There are some podcasts about business that take the month of December off or they don’t publish over the summer. That might make sense for seasons.

Seasons make sense for three instances.

– Your content is seasonal with a gap, like sports or education. The Glass and Out podcast is a show about coaching hockey. They take the summer off. This works perfectly for seasons.

– Your content has a storyline or theme that spans over 10 episodes, like true crime or chronological history. Serial is a good example of this. At the end of the investigation, the season ends.

– You create a few dozen episodes at one time that drip out over months. Book Tour podcast by John Grisham was recorded at each stop of his book tour. When the tour was over, the season was over. Broken Record with Malcolm Gladwell and Rick Rubin is recorded a few dozen at a time. They gather these together in a season. There is a gap between seasons.

If your content can be grouped together with a similar theme or common thread, and there is a natural gap, it makes sense to use seasons.

When your content is evergreen and listening out of order makes no difference, seasons probably are not for you.

FINDING CONTENT IDEAS

How do I create a format that lends itself to longevity making consistent content long-term? When creating a solo podcast, it is all dependent on the host to deliver something compelling that people want to keep coming back for. However, absent listeners sending questions, the interview model is the only one I can think of that won’t kill me trying to create content for it each week.

– Devin

You need to find the topic and niche that you can talk about for days. If you don’t have a niche that really fires you up, creating a show each week will feel like work. We don’t want that.

You can change your format anytime you’d like. It is your podcast. You make the rules.

I have done 291 episodes of this show. Over the years, I have interviewed maybe 6 people. I can’t remember exactly. Flexibility is my friend. I don’t like to be forced to record when my guest is ready.

However, I may start having guests on the show. I want to start talking to entrepreneurs who are using a podcast to grow their business. After 291 episodes, finding new ways to spin the topics becomes challenging. I will also be answering more of your questions. Just shoot them in.

That’s the great things about podcasting. If you don’t like it, change it.

There are various formats. Each take a little more work. A solo show is easiest and most flexible. On the other hand, it is all up to you to market the show.

The interview show is the most common. That format requires less show prep. You aren’t required to come up with all of the content. Your guests also help you promote the episodes.

There is also the magazine style show. This uses the host telling a story with various interviews dropped in to help draw the picture. This is like 48 Hours or 60 Minutes or The First 48. Interviews and clips are dropped in to tell the story.

The magazine format is highly engaging, but usually takes a team to pull off on a weekly basis.

Decide which format is right for you that you can produce on a regular basis.

To determine if you have the niche that is right for you, do a little brainstorming. See if you can come up with 50 different episode topics that interest you in 10 minutes.

If you can do that, you have the right niche. If that task is difficult, you are probably on the wrong path.

Check out Where To Find Podcast Content Ideas – Episode 289.

I would be happy to help you with defining your niche and show focus. Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What Must Be In Your Podcast Show Notes – PTC 290

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Today we will cover handling stagnant audience growth, eliminating the dreaded “uh” and “um”, and the “must haves” of your show notes.

We are answering your questions on the show this week. If you have a question, e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I read all of those notes and answer as many as I can here on the show.

FIX AUDIENCE GROWTH PLATEAU

How have you handled a prolonged stall/plateau of your podcast? Whether your regular audience is dozens, hundreds, thousands or even tens of thousands per episode, at some point for almost everyone your podcast hits a lull—where when you look at your episode numbers it either stalls/stops growing or even consistent drops in downloads.

In many cases it’s not that you’re not working as hard as you did before, promoting on social media before, having the same quality guests as you did before—but the plateau or download decline happens anyway.

-Patrick

It is all about getting in front of new audiences. If you have tapped the current pool, find another pool.

Remember when you were going to the bars with your friends all of the time?

My buddies and I always went to the same few bars to see the same few bands. We would always go to Arthur’s to see Hat Trick. They were the house band each weekend.

The bar was full of pretty much the same people every weekend. Hat Trick would play the same songs. We’d have the same drinks.

After a bit of time, we weren’t meeting anyone new.

One weekend, our friends invited us to just bar hop to a bunch of bars we’ve never visited. All of a sudden, we were meeting new people and running into people we haven’t seen in years.

You can do this same thing by connecting with new people who are talking to your ideal listener.

Get on other podcasts for an interview. Do a joint project with a peer and share it with your respective e-mail lists. Attend some virtual events in your space. Speak on some virtual stages. Be part of a giveaway or summit.

Simply find ways to meet new people. Your audience won’t grow if you don’t get in front of people who don’t already know you.

If you would like a great way to supercharge this, check out JV Insiders Circle. Find my affiliate link at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jv.

This organization is designed specifically to help online people find joint venture partners and get in front of new audiences. It is a very powerful network of people with large followings.

REMOVE THE UH AND UM

I could use some help. I am really good at speaking in person, but my podcasts … I’m not incredibly proud of the end results. I know I have to cut the uhhhs and umms and possibly too much repeating. How do I get better?

-Travis

The good news is you will get better. The bad news is it will take time.

Don’t spend a lot of time editing all of those little pieces out. Most won’t notice.

There are two easy things to get you on the path to improvement.

First, plan the show. Know where you want to go.

You say “um” and “uh” because you are looking for the right words. When you outline the show before you start, your brain knows where it is going. You spend less time trying to read the map and more time enjoying the scenery.

When I first started on radio, I would fly by the seat of my pants. I would think, “I’ll talk about seeing this band last month at the arena.”

When the song ended, I would jump on and talk about the band coming to town. However, I didn’t know where I was going. I hadn’t planned how to end it and get out of the bit.

It would end up being like that Chris Farley bit on SNL when he interviewed Paul McCartney. “Remember that time you said the love you get is the love you give? That was cool.” It was clunky and uncomfortable with no real end.

Start with the end in mind. Know where you want to go. Then, it will be much easier to follow the path to get there. The “uh” will diminish over time.

The next way to improve is to listen back to your show. Take notes. Find things you do really well and the things you would like to remove.

You can’t simply remove the stuff you don’t like. You need to replace it with something good. If you just take stuff out, you are eventually left with nothing.

As you learn to discover the good and bad parts before they happen, you train your brain to do more good and less bad.

If you find yourself always stuck on a word or using a crutch over and over, write down 15 different ways to say the same thing. Keep it by your monitor as you record.

When it comes time to say “You know what I mean”, you can replace it with one of the phrases on your list. Train the brain.

If you want help reviewing your show, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

SHOW NOTES

I’ve realized that I’ve put a significant amount of work into show notes along the way, but I’ve also realized I rarely read the show notes of the podcasts I listen to. How much time and effort is reasonable to put into show notes, and what are some “must haves” in show notes.

-Dean

Start with the end in mind. What do you want your show notes to accomplish.

Search engine optimization is a benefit of show notes. When you create a blog post over 300 words, you can get some good search juice.

If people are coming to your show notes, they are probably looking for something specific that you mentioned during the episode. Place those resources at the top of the notes. Make it easy to find.

People may also come to the notes if you have content that is technical or step-by-step. They want the easy download they can reference.

I often listen to podcasts about business. Many times the guest will give 5 ways to boost your traffic or 7 steps to audit your website or how to link your shopping cart to your membership site. Rather than writing all of that down, I prefer to go to the show notes to get the steps.

If the show is more about soft skills or entertainment, I don’t visit the show notes. There is nothing there I need.

What does your audience want from your show notes? Ask them. Send out a survey. This could be as easy as sending an e-mail to your subscribers or setting up a Survey Monkey survey.

Then, determine what you want your notes to accomplish. If you need SEO, make it rich with search terms. If you don’t even post it on your website, you may simply need an outline of the show.

Finally, decide how much time you want to spend on your notes. You may get more traction spending the hour you spend on show note in another area.

If you used that same 60 minutes by spending 45 minutes marketing your show and 15 minutes creating a simple outline as the notes, your show may grow much faster.

I would say the “must haves” in your show notes would be the things your audience expects. That would be links to things you mentioned, an easy way to play the show and an overview of the episode. After that, it becomes diminishing returns. You need to weigh the benefits against the time spent.

 

ASK YOUR QUESTION

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Where To Find Podcast Content Ideas – PTC 289

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Do you ever struggle coming up with podcast content ideas or run into a sort of writer’s block when you’re asking, “What am I going to podcast about today?” There are ideas all around you. It is simply a matter of knowing where to look and to turn ideas into topics.

Struggling with content ideas isn’t uncommon. I received a couple questions over the past couple weeks from podcasters looking for solutions to this very problem.

Here is the first: “How can I learn how to have a format that lends itself to longevity and making consistent content long-term? When creating a solo podcast, it is all dependent on the host to deliver something compelling that people want to keep coming back for. Absent listeners sending questions, the interview model is the only one I can think of that won’t kill me trying to create content for it each week.”

The second says, “I would really like to learn how to create content that will keep listeners returning. I haven’t started yet, and I’m worried of running out of ideas or guests to interview, or that listeners will get bored and not listen anymore.”

To find great podcast content ideas, you need to learn to be curious. Then you need to develop the habit of taking note of the things that you find interesting.

TAKE NOTICE

Be aware of your surroundings.

There are content ideas all around you. Don’t limit yourself to your niche. You can find topics in every walk of like.

For instance, I was watching my son at a ice hockey goalie camp the other day. The goalies were split into different groups according to their age.

There was this little goalie there that was probably 7. He was decked out in a custom helmet that was painted orange and black like tiger stripes. This little guy was probably all of three-and-a-half feet tall. He was awesome.

As I was watching him learn, I realized he was still trying to master the basics. He need to get a handle on the foundation of his crease movement, his skating and his angles. I remembered when my son was that age. What great memories.

That got me thinking about podcasters. What are the basics a podcaster needs to learn to build a foundation for their show? This could be the ideal target listener, the show structure, proper show prep and content creation. This could easily be a podcast episode for me.

I could talk about getting started or equipment you need to start or finding the right coach to teach you what you don’t know or how great gear doesn’t make you great or the 3 things I forgot I didn’t know or how to enjoy the journey.

I just took a 7-year-old playing hockey and turned it into 7 topics for my podcast about podcasting just by being aware and taking notice.

CURIOUS

Be curious. Notice of the things that happen in life. Take note when something makes you say, “Hmmm, that’s interesting.”

Take notes of the things that pique your interest. When things catch your attention, you need to write it down. Put it on your phone or on a pad or in a notebook. Create a system.

Then when it is time to create an episode, you can go to your notes. Pick one of the interesting things and brainstorm how that one idea can become a podcast topic.

If it is interesting to you, it will be interesting to your audience. The key to becoming interesting is to be truly interested.

WHERE TO FIND IT

You can find topics and podcast content ideas anywhere. You only need to be aware of what is happening around you.

Find ideas in content that you read, watch or hear. Again, this media doesn’t need to be in your niche. It can be any topic. Find the things that you find interesting. Be curious.

Look for questions that are asked on social media. These questions can easily be transformed into questions for your niche.

In one of the hockey Facebook groups I am in, someone asked, “How can I get my son noticed by college coaches?” This can easily become a podcast episode for me. I could use “How to get interviewed on big podcasts”, “How to get opportunities to speak on stage” or “Where to find partners to help you grow your business”.

As you can see, the last one really doesn’t have much to do with the original questions. I went from “How can I get my son noticed by college coaches” to “Where to find partners to help you grow your business”.

The root of the idea doesn’t matter. It only matters that I have developed a podcast content idea that interests me and will also interest my audience.

COLLABORATE

In fact, if you want great partners to help you grow your business, you need to check out Collaborate. It is an amazing event coming up with 500 online coaches, authors, and entrepreneurs in all niches looking for partners.

It happens July 9-11, 2020. http://podcasttalentcoach.com/collaborate

The last time I was part of an event like this, I connected with 40 different potential partners and networking is NOT my strong suit. I hate “networking” at conferences. This event makes it easy and dummy-proof. They basically give you the script to connect with others.

In that event, there were experts in all areas, including natural health, finance, marketing, online business, writing, leadership, mind & body, real estate, holistic medicine, life coaching, yoga, fitness, public speaking, YouTube, photography, music and more.

Take a look at it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate. It will be a great, virtual event that will allow you to connect with a ton of experts in your niche.

All of that just came from “How can I get my son noticed by college coaches”.

USE THE SEARCH OF OTHERS

You can find great ideas by searching suggestions.

In Google, start typing a phrase. Google will suggest possible searches for you. This will give you great ideas.

I started typing, “How to make”. Google suggested a bunch if possibilities. One was “How to make French toast.” One of my kids probably searched that the other day. Not sure, but it doesn’t matter.

What can I do with “How to make French toast”?

Take your suggestions, and turn one idea into 3.

I could turn “How to make French toast” into “How to make a strong podcast intro”, “How to make your voice sound stronger” or “How to make homemade sound baffles”.

Google suggestions are great when trying to come up with various podcast content ideas. Let the tool do the work for you.

TURN IT INTO 3

Turning each idea into three will help you create the best idea. If you simply go with the first idea, you won’t know what is possible.

When I used “How can I get my son noticed by college coaches”, the first idea I came up with was “How to get interviewed on big podcasts”.

Sure, that’s a decent topic idea. However, it is something I’ve done in the past. It is also something others have discussed as well.

By pushing to 3 ideas, I came up with “Where to find partners to help you grow your business”. It wasn’t a direct line from college coaches to podcast partners. But it is a much stronger topic with a great call-to-action.

FIND THE STRONGEST TOPIC

When you expand to 3 ideas, you get three steps away from the original starting point. There is much better chance you can find something strong.

I found the podcast question, “What are the pros and cons of using seasons for my podcast?” This could be turned into “What are the pros and cons of incorporating chit chat between hosts at the beginning of our show?”, “What are the benefits and drawbacks of using a mixer?” and “When should I use the outtake audio at the beginning of my show before the regular intro plays?”

How does “seasons” relate to “outtake audio”? It doesn’t. And, it doesn’t matter. I have a solid podcast content idea and that is the point.

Turn each idea into three and find the best.

There are ideas all around you. It is simply a matter of knowing where to look, taking note of the things that make your curious, and turning ideas into various topics. Develop the habit of taking note of the things that you find interesting.

Find great podcast content ideas this week and have fun developing unique and interesting episodes for your listeners.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Structure A Podcast – PTC 288

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

As I talk to podcasters and spend time in podcasting Facebook groups, I often find questions regarding how to structure your podcast. The questions span the spectrum from open to close.

How should the intro look? What needs to be included? Where should the interview happen? When do you make your call-to-action?

There is good news. It is your podcast and there isn’t one right answer. You can also change your show anytime you would like. Your structure isn’t set in stone.

YOUR GOAL

In order to determine how you should structure your podcast, you need to determine what you hope to accomplish. Many podcasters include elements in their structure simply because they heard it done on other shows.

I see this a lot when I’m coaching hockey. Coaches will run drills because they saw another coach do it. Unfortunately, they don’t understand the reason behind the drill.

A coach may be running a drill where two guys are battling for a puck in the corner. On the surface, it might just look like a battle drill.

On the other hand, if you had listened to the coach’s instructions you may have realized that the drill was intended to teach one of the players how to protect the puck along the boards to kill the clock.

Without understanding the reason behind an element on your show, you can’t achieve the goal the piece was designed to achieve.

Should you include an outtake before the standard intro of your show? It depends.

Should you include some chit chat on your show between co-hosts before the interview? Again, it depends.

What are you trying to achieve?

THE CLOCK

When you are building the structure for your show, use a show clock. This is the tool used in broadcasting to keep the show on track. It is like a rundown of when elements happen.

You can download my Podcast Talent Coach Show Clock worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/clock. This will help you lay out the structure for your podcast.

The biggest thing the clock will help you achieve is consistency. It really doesn’t matter much where things happen as long as they happen consistently on purpose. This is your show. Everything should happen for a reason.

START WITH AN OUTTAKE

Should you include the outtake audio before the intro? Only if it has a purpose.

Let’s say you are using a piece of the interview that happens later in the show. This outtake creates some intrigue and curiosity. It makes people want to listen to the full interview to see what it is all about. That is a purpose.

On the other hand, let’s say your outtake says, “Every online business should have a funnel that all starts with a strong lead magnet.” Yep. Right. Now what?

That clip doesn’t do anything to make me want to stick around to hear the interview. That was a statement, not a tease. Create anticipation and keep the conversation moving forward.

One of my all-time favorite tv shows was NYPD Blue. It always started with, “Previously on NYPD Blue.” Then, it would show a few clips of things that happened on past episodes.

Do you think those clips were random? No. They showed you clips from previous episodes so you would understand the storyline that was happening in this episode. You would say, “Oh yeah, I remember that character.” If you haven’t seen the previous episodes, it would get you up to speed.

Make your outtake serve a purpose.

PODCAST INTRO

There is a difference between your podcast intro and your episode intro.

Your podcast intro should be consistent from episode to episode. This is designed to tell your listener what the podcast is all about. If this episode is the first episode a new listener has ever consumed, the intro should bring them up to speed quickly.

On this podcast, I tell you each week you can turn your information into engaging entertainment and your podcast into powerful relationships. You can have more confidence in your content. You now know we aren’t talking about mics and mixers.

Your episode intro on the other hand changes episode to episode. This tells the listener exactly what is on this episode. “Today we are going to discuss your podcast structure.” Or, “Today we are going to interview my 2nd grade teacher.”

The podcast intro tells listeners why they should subscribe to the podcast. The episode intro tells listeners why they should listen to this particular episode.

Now you know the purpose of each. You should be able to decide how to structure each to achieve those goals.

CALL-TO-ACTION

Where should you incorporate your call-to-action and what should it be?

Again, what are you trying to accomplish?

When Dave Jackson and I review a show on the Podcast Review Show, we always ask the podcaster what their goals are. Many times they say, “Get more downloads.”

When we listen to the show, they tell listeners to follow them on Facebook, go review the show, leave me a voicemail and things like that. They rarely say, “Subscribe to my show and tell your friends.” Their call-to-action is rarely connected to their goal.

Decide what you want your listeners to do. Then, make that your call-to-action.

Be sure to get your important CTA in early. Many listeners don’t make it all the way to the end of your show. They stop listening when they are done doing what they are doing. If they listen while working out, they stop listening when they are done working out.

Include the call-to-action at the beginning of the episode. Then, include it again at the end. Both should be connected to your goal. Don’t confuse them with 13 calls-to-action.

My CTA for this episode is to download my Podcast Talent Coach Show Clock Worksheet. I put that call-to-action right up front. You’re getting it again right here. It is the only CTA. Get it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/clock.

I’m not asking you to rate and review the show, send me 3 carries pigeons with notes and vote for me in the next student council election. Just go download the worksheet.

OTHER ELEMENTS

There are many other elements you can include in your show. Again, it is your show. Add whatever you’d like. If you want a polka band in the middle, have at it. It’s your show.

Just be sure each element has a reason. My dad always loved polka music. It brings a smile to my face. Plus, I always loved being in jazz band in junior high. So, I’m including some polka music in the middle of every episode. Fine. At least you have a reason.

If you are adding “on fire” to the name of your cooking show just because all the cool kids are doing it, “Sushi Chef On Fire” probably isn’t the podcast name you need. Understand the purpose before you add anything to your show.

Go download my Podcast Talent Coach Show Clock Worksheet. Let it help you structure your podcast. Get it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/clock.

If you need help putting it all together, let me know.

You can find my contact info and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Power of Podcast Partnerships – PTC287

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are few things that will move any project forward faster than partnerships. When you connect and collaborate with people in your niche, you can help each other learn new things, find new audiences, and attract new clients.

When I first launched Podcast Talent Coach, I connected with Dave Jackson at School of Podcasting. In fact, Dave reached out to me. I wasn’t aware of the power of podcast partnerships yet.

Dave helped me get things moving in the right direction. We worked together to help each other grow. That was 8 years ago and the partnership continues today.

One of the best events I ever attended helped me connect with an amazing number of partners.

OPPORTUNITY

I have a great opportunity for you to connect with a ton of potential partnerships. Check it out at PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

It is a great collaboration event that will supercharge your growth. I’ll tell you more about it in a minute.

Let me tell you about this event I was part of about 6 weeks ago. It was called the JV Experience. Almost 400 experts came together to connect and help each other grow through partnerships.

Due to COVID-19, the whole event was virtual and online. It was a 3-day weekend. Instead of spending a weekend at a conference hotel somewhere, we spent the weekend on Zoom.

During the event, we learned a ton. If we were in the hotel conference room, we would spend the breaks out in the hallway connecting with potential partners. The problem with the hotel scenario happens when you’re an introvert. It is easy to use the restroom, check your e-mail and be invisible.

Online, the situation was much different. During the breaks, we were placed into breakout sessions with about half a dozen other experts. We each took 2 minutes to introduce ourselves and what partnerships we were seeking.

During the weekend, I met about 80 of the 400 experts in the breakout rooms. Of those 80, half made sense for a further discussion and possible partnership. I spent the next two weeks reaching out and having conversations.

Those conversations led to some great partnerships that turned into joint ventures, podcast guests and business opportunities.

It all stemmed from one amazing event. It is crazy how a few of the right partners can explode your projects.

5 WAYS TO PARTNERSHIPS

If you really want to grow your show and your mailing list, even build that business around your podcast, find 5 podcasters in you niche that could make great partners.

Here are five ways to help each other.

CROWDSOURCE

Create a crowdsource episode with experts. Find a question that will help your listeners.

Ask each of the five podcasters to answer the question. Combine them into an episode. Then, ask each of the experts to share the show.

COMMENT

All podcasts like comments and reviews. Leave a comment on or review for 5 shows in your niche that compliment your show. If you teach courses, find someone that teaches memberships. If you teach healthy eating, find someone who teaches healthy gardening.

Begin to create the relationship with the hosts. Get on their radar. Once you begin the conversation, take the next step.

HELP

Reach out to those five people and ask, “How might we help each other.” You are not looking to simply have them promote you. Find ways you can help each other. Create a true partnership.

You can create great synergy when you ask, “What are you working on and how might I support you?” Help them connect with experts you know. Turn them onto resources you use. Spread the word about their latest product.

Give and give again. The support will eventually come back to you. Just start making the connections.

SWAP

When you have a relationship built, offer to swap newsletter mentions. You could send the link to their lead magnet to your e-mail list. They could do the same for you.

You also might consider swapping interviews. Have a discussion around a topic and both of you use the same conversation for your episodes to promote the other. Find ways to help each other grow.

FUN CHALLENGE

The last idea is a bit crazy and fun. Challenge a peer in your niche to something fun. This could be a challenge to see who can get the most Facebook friends in a month. Or, who can get the most comments on an episode in four weeks.

There are a few things the challenge should include.

Make the challenge fun. If it is serious, it won’t attract as much attention.

It should incorporate the listeners. You want your audience to have a vested interest in the challenge. Get them to follow along.

Make it last around four weeks. You want to give it time to gain some attention and word-of-mouth. Create a storyline around it that lasts 3 or 4 episodes. Make sure it is public, so your listeners can follow the progress on each show.

Finally, there should be something at stake. Maybe the loser has to e-mail their list promoting the winner. Or the loser has to do a Facebook live video wearing a t-shirt promoting the winner. Something that gets noticed.

MORE NOTICE

There are many other ways to partner. You could participate in summits, giveaways, live events, podcasts, YouTube interviews, Facebook lives and many other things.

Now, you could spend time searching for other experts that can help you grow, finding them one by one. You’re not sure if they are looking for partners. It is unclear what they have to offer. Will they actually do the work to promote you?

Rather than spending all of that time and energy, you could participate in an event just like I did. And you can get into this one for a crazy deal.

COLLABORATE

I would like to introduce you to a new, live, virtual event called COLLABORATE. I’m so excited about it because it’s a cutting-edge, results-oriented event created by the amazing event team at JV Insider Circle (JVIC). This is the same team who also created the annual JV Experience (JVX) Summit that I attended and made such great connections. JVX is the world’s #1 joint venture summit.

In order to design the ultimate event, the JVIC team analyzed mountains of feedback and gigabytes of successful collaborative partnerships that was generated amongst attendees from their many past events, both live and virtual. The result is COLLABORATE, an event with everything the revered JVX Summit has to offer, but supercharged on a whole new level! This is gonna be great.

COLLABORATE is a live virtual event where you get to connect with hundreds of top entrepreneurs, coaches, authors, speakers, program leaders along with producers of podcasts, radio shows and live & virtual events from around the world.

These people are all interested in creating alliances with you and promoting your products & programs. On top of that, you’ll learn valuable, actionable knowledge. You will get tools and the support you need to catapult your business into the next stratosphere.

GET REGISTERED

Get the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

The inaugural COLLABORATE event is designed by the innovative events team who also created the world’s #1 joint venture event, JVX SUMMIT.

The connections I made at the JVX were priceless. I connected with 40 potential partners in my niche alone. It was an amazing and very productive weekend.

389 people from around the world attended their last virtual event. If you would like to create amazing partnerships, don’t miss this event. Get your ticket now!

WHAT YOU GET

Here is what you can expect:

Networking Circles. This is where you can connect with industry leaders, experts & influencers from around the world to create your partnerships.

Hot Or Not. This is an opportunity to test your products or programs by getting IMMEDIATE feedback from 100’s of coaches & experts! It is like a focus group on steroids.

Niche Circles. In these small groups, you can get feedback to hone your pitches & messages in front of live coaches.

Knowledge Sessions. You will learn valuable knowledge and gain actionable tools from guest speakers during the event.

JV Shark Attack. This is just a lot of fun and a great way to learn. You have a chance to have your products & programs promoted by key industry leaders if you’re selected. If you are not JV ready yet, this is a great way to learn by watching other people pitch their joint venture opportunities.

Special Exercises. There will be uniquely designed exercises to help you connect with partners and build your business.

Special Activities. You will participate in one-of-a-kind activities created to give your business a mega boost.

There is also much more. There are more sessions & activities being developed between now and the event.

MAKE CONNECTIONS

COLLABORATE is more than just another live online networking event. It is a connecting event.

Not only will you have plenty of connecting time, you will be guided through fun exercises and activities to make sure your products or programs are sizzling hot with clearly communicated benefits and all the factors to make them winners.

Nothing is being left to chance when it comes to helping you walk away with the best joint venture partners. You’ll come away with a full list of powerful alliances and industry influencers ready to promote your products or programs just like I did, even if you’ve struggled with this in the past.

Here is the best part … you can get the whole weekend for just $47. How crazy is that?

Imagine what one partner could do for your podcast. Would that be worth $47? And I connected with 40 at the last one without even knowing what I was doing.

I CAN’T WAIT

I was bummed that I would need to wait an entire year before I could do it again. They got so much great feedback on the connection circles from that event that they are creating Collaborate as a way to help people connect even further. It is going to be amazing.

If you want to connect with hundreds of top entrepreneurs, coaches, authors, speakers, and program leaders along with producers of podcasts, radio shows and live & virtual events from around the world, don’t miss Collaborate.

I can’t wait to see you there. Get registered at PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Please be aware that links in this post and on this site may be affiliate links. I could earn a commission should you choose to make a purchase. However, I only recommend things I trust and that I believe are valuable.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The 3 Secrets to Grow Your Podcast Audience – PTC 286

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Almost every podcaster who comes to me for coaching has the same struggle. They want to know how to grow your podcast audience. There are 3 keys to grow your audience.

There are many gurus and YouTube videos that will tell you have to drive more traffic and get more listeners. What they don’t tell you is how to keep those listeners.

If you have listeners coming in the front door, but you are doing nothing to keep them, your audience won’t grow. It is like bringing people into your party, but not having any food or entertainment to keep them. Why would somebody stay at your lame party? It is the same with your podcast.

AUDIENCE EXPLOSION BLUEPRINT

I am launching a new coaching program to help you grow your audience. This will teach you what all the other gurus miss. And since it is new, you can get in at a great deal.

The program is called Audience Explosion Blueprint. It is a step-by-step live coaching program to explode your podcast audience in 6 weeks or less.

You can get the full details and enroll at PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience.

Do you want to build a podcast audience that you can monetize?

Would you like to build the right audience in a way that doesn’t take hours of your time every day?

Do you want to design a marketing plan around your strengths that fits your personalityand defeats the Impostor Syndrome?

Audience Explosion Blueprint is a program designed around my 30 years of experience building successful radio stations, coaching talent, developing marketing campaigns and growing audiences. Unlike all the gurus on the internet only teaching you how to get new listeners, this program will help you attract the right audience and keep them listening by developing your show and personality like a radio star.

THE PROGRAM

In this program you will get access to:

  • 6 Live group coaching/training calls including Q&A sessions to plan, create and launch your audience growth blueprint for your podcast, including access to the recordings of the presentations in case you missed any live sessions.
  • Lifetime access to a full, online training portal containing worksheets and other tools to show you how to organize your blueprint, execute your plan in just a few minutes a day, and methodically grow your downloads (including all updates).
  • Transcription and audio recordings of the modules.
  • Life time access to Audience Explosion Blueprint Facebook group to help you continue to develop new audience attraction ideas.
  • Daily e-mail reminders during the 6 weeks of coaching to help you consistently take action and execute your plan.
  • 1 one-on-one call with me to ensure your plan is clearly defined and efficient.

By the end of this program you will:

  • Have a clear, step-by-step plan to grow your audience of ideal listeners
  • Consistently attract the right listeners to your podcast every week
  • Execute your plan in minutes a day
  • Have more time to spend creating great content and monetizing your show
  • Have more time to spend with your clients, building your business, and enjoying life

WHO IS IT FOR?

This program is for a podcaster who is willing to consistently take action a few minutes each day to work to grow your audience by following a plan. This program is not for those who expect to build their audience to thousands of listeners in just a few days, like a “get rich quick” scheme.

Because this is the first time I am launching this, you get in for half price. It is a steal for six weeks of training. Registration closes on June 22nd, because we need to start the coaching. Sign up today before it is too late.

Get enrolled at PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience.

THRE THREE LEGS OF THE STOOL

You see, building your audience requires you to attract new listeners who are not already familiar with you. Then, it also requires you to keep those listeners coming back for more to grow your audience.

You need to build awareness, get them to come listen to your show, and keep them coming back episode after episode while you go find even more listeners. If you miss one piece, your growth plan falls apart.

There are three legs to the stool for your audience growth plan. Those three legs are personality, programming and promotion. Without one of the legs, your stool won’t stand up.

It is not enough to simply bring people to the show. You need to keep them listening.

The promotion creates the awareness. Your programming creates great content that attracts them to the show. When you add your personality to the information, the content becomes unique and keeps people coming back.

YOUR NICHE

How many people have a podcast in your niche? Let’s say you create a podcast around making money online. How many podcasts talk about creating an online course? Probably thousands.

There are three steps to making money with an online course. Determine your expertise, create your course, and get people to buy it.

All of the experts have a little difference in their program. Russell Brunson is all about funnels and the marketing. David Siteman Garland talks about accelerating your creation process. Jeff Walkertalks about launching the course and the promotion piece.

Each of those experts talk about a piece of the process. But, it is all about making money online.

What makes each of them different? It is their personality.

Russell and his wresting background and hyperactivity is much different than Jeff Walker and his down-to-Earth Rocky Mountain laid back approach. They are both different than DSG’s quirky approach.

To be unique, add your personality to your content. It is your secret ingredient.

DEFINING YOUR PERSONALITY

The first step to define your personality is to describe the persona you want to project on your show. How do you want to be perceived by your audience?

You might want your persona to be quirky, or fun, or inspirational, or in-your-face, or supportive and loving.

Don’t pick a persona that isn’t you. Be yourself. If you are naturally supportive and loving, you cannot be the in-your-face host. That isn’t you.

It might be possible to adjust from in-your-face drill sergeant to tell-it-like-it-is inspirational host. You could move from the knowledgable nerd to be the quirky expert. Those moves aren’t a big swing.

Next, list twenty adjectives that describe that persona. If you want to be the quirky expert, what words describe that person? It could be odd, off-the-wall, unexpected, unconventional, wacky, unorthodox, experienced, skilled, well-read, and clever. List 20 that describe your persona.

Finally, select five words from that list that you would like to highlight and bring to life on your show. One or two of these words might need to be developed a bit. At least 3 and probably 4 should already exist in your personality.

You might be a little off-the-wall, wacky, experienced and clever. On the other hand, you might need to develop unexpected.

SHOW PREP

In your show prep, you then build a few opportunities to create something unexpected. You might take a story in an unexpected direction. Some sound effects might be added in a unique way. There might be an unexpected question you ask during an interview.

A little unexpected will go a long way. Be sure it isn’t forced. Add it where it naturally fits and the reputation will grow.

We are already a personality. Each of us has a unique personality. You just need to define it.

This is something you have probably never done. If you need to find someone who knows you really well to help you, ask them.

The key to defining your personality is to decide which aspects of that personality you will choose to highlight, stress and grow on your show. You don’t need twenty. You only need the right five.

CO-HOSTS

Defining personalities and roles is especially important when a show has multiple hosts. If two hosts have the same personality, opinion and perspective, one of you isn’t necessary. If all you say is, “Yeah, what he said,” you’re not needed on the show. You are wasting time.

Think of any show that has multiple characters. They are all different.

Consider the show Friends with Monica, Phoebe, Rachel, Chandler, Joey and Ross. Each are different characters. The three ladies are the smart one, the superficial one and the dingy one. The guys are funny one, the ladies man and the nerd.

You say, “Yeah, but that is a tv show, not real life.”

Let’s consider other shows. On the Tonight Show with Johnny Carson, Johnny was different than Ed McMahon. On the Elvis Duran Morning Show, he has 10 people and they are all different. Elvis, Danielle, Froggy, Skeery, Ghandi and Dave Brody all have different personalities. Howard Stern is complimented by Robin Quivers. Even on a sports show like Mike & Mike, one was a player and one was a scholar.

Think about the original cast of American Idol. If you had to describe each judge with one or two words, what would you choose? Simon was the rude one, Paula was the dingy one and Randy wanted to be everybody’s friend.

Do you think those three faked their way through the show or is Simon really a blunt, sometimes offensive, tell-it-like-it-is individual? Those are their true personalities. The producers cast the show in that way.

THE 3-PERSON SHOW

Many 3-person shows have that set up. One is nice, one is the nerd and one is naughty. Or one is the dork, one is the doll and one is the disruptive. Everyone has their role true to their personality.

Work this week to define your personality. If you would like help growing your audience and developing your show to keep your listeners, check out the Audience Explosion Blueprint.

It is a step-by-step live coaching program to explode your podcast audience in 6 weeks or less. Since this is the first time I am launching it, you get in for half price. Enroll today to grow your audience before we close it down on June 22nd, because we need to start the teaching.

You can get the full details and enroll at PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Keys To Podcast Client Attraction With Ed Erickson – PTC285

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When it comes to using your podcast client attraction, you must make time during your episode to demonstrate your authority and invite your clients to work with you.

RESOURCE FOR CLIENT ATTRACTION

I have a great resource for you this week to help you with your client attraction.

When trying to get someone to work with you, have you every heard, “Ohhh, that’s a bit expensive for me. Anything you can do on price?”

How many times have you heard some version of that from prospects? Prospects whom you know desperately need your solution.

Here’s the thing. Your solution isn’t too expensive. They aren’t understanding the value they will get – and that it far exceeds the cost.

And that’s on you. But there’s some good news…

There’s a much better way that will get your prospects to see the value – and it doesn’t involve cutting the price.

My friend, Ed Erickson, is hosting a free online training session, where he’s going to show you the three key things you can change that will not only obliterate price objections, but will lead to your prospects clamoring to pay premium fees for the privilege of working with you.

There are 3 session times available – so pick the one that’s best for you. You can register at PodcastTalentCoach.com/essential.

NO LEADS

I was on a coaching call the other day when the podcaster asked why his podcast wasn’t attracting any leads for his consulting business.

When I listened to the episode, he did a great job interviewing his guest. However, he didn’t mention his website or consulting one time during the entire episode. He wasn’t doing anything to create client attraction.

You need to make sure there is time for you. Just because your episode is an interview episode, that doesn’t mean the entire episode needs to be the interview. You can use part of the show to teach a little bit and demonstrate your expertise.

This question has come up two other times over the past week. How do we let people see our expertise when we are interviewing somebody else?

FIND THE ROOM FOR CLIENT ATTRACTION

This past week, I have been part of two different groups of podcasters in a bit of mastermind setting. In both groups, somebody asked how they could better use their interviews to attract clients.

As I mentioned earlier, when it comes to the price of your product or service, your solution isn’t too expensive. They simply aren’t understanding the value they will get from your stuff.

You need to demonstrate your expertise. That is how you get your listener and potential client to see that your product or service far exceeds the cost.

So, when you have an interview on your show, take some time to discuss the topic.

Before the interview happens, you could show your listeners what you know by teaching a little bit around the topic. You could answer a few questions from listeners about the subject. A case study is a great way to demonstrate your knowledge.

After the interview, you could take time to include your big takeaway from the discussion. Present a quick recap of the discussion. Link the conversation to a case study or real world example from your product or service. This is another great place to demonstrate your expertise.

SOLO SHOW

If you do a solo show with no interview, it is much easier to show your stuff. You could answer questions from the audience. Telling your stories is a very powerful way to demonstrate your authority.

When you are doing a show by yourself, ensure you that you continue to offer your message on a consistent basis. Just remember to mix it up in the way your present it every week.

Think of the Dave Ramsey Show. Dave talks about his baby steps on every show. Every call he takes relates to the baby steps in some way. Over and over again, it is the same thing.

However, the context around the baby steps changes. Those unique stories keeps the content fresh. Be consistent with your message while varying the context.

ACTION

Finally, include your powerful call-to-action in order to get your clients to come work with you. Just telling them you are a coach or have a book isn’t enough. You need to ask them to buy it to create client attraction.

Include the call-to-action at the front of the show and again at the end. Many of your listeners will never make it all the way to the end of the show. They stop listening when they finish doing whatever they are doing. That could be driving, exercising, mowing or something else.

If you wait until the end of the show before you offer a call-to-action, you will miss a big opportunity to help your listeners.

TEACH THEN INTERVIEW

This episode is a great example of teaching around an interview. Today, we talk with Ed Erickson, head of Erickson Business Coaching, about client attraction.

As an EMyth Certified Business Coach, Ed helps owners get control over their business. He helps develop the skills, mindset, and leadership traits to transform businesses. The result is a business that achieves the owner’s goals and creates the life they want to live.

Ed Erickson has worked in and owned small businesses for over 20 years. He has seen first hand many of the challenges owners face. And has spent a lot of time trying to figure out how to fix them.

Today, he helps us learn how to take our podcast audience and build a business around that audience. We learn the biggest mistakes to avoid and where to find our ideal clients.

TRAINING

It is such a great conversation with Ed. If you are trying to build a business around your podcast, client attraction is a critical piece to your plan.

Find the true problem your audience faces. Determine what they want and need to solve that problem. Offer them the solution, not the tool. Define your ideal clients. Finally, determine your solution and message that will help them achieve their goals.

If you want to learn more about client attraction, get signed up for the free training. Ed is hosting that free online session, where he’s going to show you the three key things you can change that will not only obliterate price objections, but will lead to your prospects clamoring to pay premium fees for the privilege of working with you.

There are 3 session times available – so pick the one that’s best for you. You can register at PodcastTalentCoach.com/essential.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What You’re Missing For Audience Growth – PTC284

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Most podcasters think the key to audience growth is attracting more listeners. However, that is only half of the equation. You have to work to keep the listeners you already have.

FIX THE LEAKS

If you are trying to fill a bucket with water, it becomes very difficult when your bucket has big holes in the bottom.

There are 3 keys to keeping your listeners and achieving audience growth.

  1. Be unique and make them remember you.
  2. Give them a reason to come back.
  3. Get them to actually listen.

Today, let’s talk about being unique. Your listeners will remember you by the stories you tell. That is how they get to know, like and trust you.

You can get my Podcast Talent Coach Story Development Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/story.

IRELAND BOYS’ AUDIENCE GROWTH

My son watches a show on YouTube created by Ireland Boys Productions. These are videos created by a two brothers and their friends. They do crazy stuff like spending 72 hours in a WalMart, sneaking pumpkins into shopping carts of other people and ordering the entire Popeyes Chicken menu.

IBP has posted 201 videos and has 3.78 million subscribers. There have been 6.1 million views on the WalMart video.

These videos aren’t short, either. They are 20-30 minute videos.

These kids even go on tour, because they have created a tremendous following.

The brothers make their fans part of the show. Their viewers get to suggest crazy stuff to do on the show. You can even buy their merch on their website.

Most importantly, their fans know their story. Watching their show, you meet their parents. You see where they live. You see the awards YouTube has given them for their online success.

It is all about their story and the plot of the episode. Each time, you wonder if they will succeed or get busted by store security.

WHO AM I?

When I started in radio, I just copied the other big personalities on the radio. I was using their phrases and mannerisms. I wanted to be them.

One day, I was reviewing my show with my program director. She was helping me find ways to improve my show.

As we were listening to the show, she stopped the audio. She asked why I was using a particular phrase. It was a phrase that was used by the morning guy on our sister station. It was the rock station I was on before I got the gig here.

When she asked, I had no answer.

She said, “Why don’t we leave that to the other guys. You be you.”

That was the day I started being true to myself and defining my own story and personality. I started sharing who I am with my audience. That began my climb to the top.

YOU’RE NOT GARY

Many podcasters hear Gary Vaynerchuk and try to be Gary Vee on their podcast. So, they start dropping F-bombs and living the hustle.

The problem is … they aren’t Gary Vaynerchuk. They weren’t born in Belarus. These people didn’t immigrate to the United States unable to speak English.

Podcasters who want to be Gary Vee didn’t spend their youth working in their fathers’s liquor store. They didn’t grow up learning how to sell by hustling baseball cards. You can’t be Gary Vaynerchuk unless you’re Gary Vaynerchuk.

Stop trying to be Gary Vaynerchuk and start being yourself.

WHO ARE YOU?

What is your story? Where did you come from? What makes you unique?

Let your personality come out on your show. Make a list of your unique characteristics that make you different from everyone else.

Maybe you’re brash, or caring, or cold, or inspiring. People might find you matter-of-fact, or welcoming, or take-no-prisoners, or comforting.

Define your personality. Then, put all of your content through that filter.

Be true to yourself and your listeners will remember you.

With your content, tell your stories. Use your personality to make your listener feel something. People remember emotions. Get them invested emotionally. This is critical to your audience growth.

When you tell stories on your show, define what do you hope to make the listener feel with your story. Always start with the emotion.

FIND THE EMOTION

Once you know have defined the emotion, you will know how to tell the story.

The more stories you tell, the more your listeners will get to know you. They will get emotionally invested with your show. Your listeners will remember you and come back time and again.

As you are working for audience growth, be sure you are working to hold onto the listeners you have.

You can get my Podcast Talent Coach Story Development Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/story.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Don’t Blow Your First Impression – PTC 283

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You can’t catch up to a slow start. Your listeners need to know this podcast is just what they need. That comes with proper prep. Don’t blow your first impression.

MY HOMEWORK

I have been listening to quite a few new podcasts over the last few weeks. Staying at home has given me more time on my hands.

These podcasts range from solo shows to partners to interviews. Topics are all over the board.

Some of them have been personal prep for shows that will be interviewing me. I want to ensure I know what the show is about before I appear.

Many of these podcasts start cold. They jump right into the content. Then, they end cold. The host thanks the guest and the show ends.

When you boil it down, I learn very little about the host, the show or the business. There is no plan for the show. It is obvious they are missing the prep.

Over my 30 years in radio, one thing I learned is that you always have new listeners joining the show. Even if you have been doing the show for ten years, somebody is discovering it for the first time with this episode. Get them up to speed quickly.

PODCAST INTRO

Your podcast intro needs to do three things to make a solid impression. First, your listeners need to know what content you offer. They need to know how they will benefit by listening to this show. Finally, your intro needs to tell them who are you and why should they listen to you.

Many people forget that last step. The host talks about the content on the show. However, they give the listener no real reason to believe the host is an expert in the field. That could be a research expert or a results expert.

EPISODE INTRO

Once you have your show intro created, create an intro for this particular episode.

If your listener knows the podcast is interesting, tell them why they should listen to this particular episode. Include those same three points. What is the content, how will they benefit and why are you the expert here?

HOW DOES IT END

When you prep, start with the end in mind.

I have a free show prep worksheet that will help you develop the content on your show. You can download it at PodcastTalentCoach.coach.com/prep.

Frame your content with this worksheet before you write your introduction. Prep so you understand what you will deliver before you sum it up in the intro of your episode.

YOUR PREP

Here are the questions you need to answer as you prepare.

What are the interesting topics you hope to address on this particular episode?

What do you hope to accomplish? This includes both the topic and the show overall. What point do you want to make or what do you want your listener to do with the show is over?

How will you treat each specific topic you hope to address? What will you do with the content? (Answer the question, demonstrate the answer, play some audio, show charts to support your answer, etc.)

Create an outline for the flow of the show topics. (This is important for the show introduction.)

What supporting information will you need for the show? (Organize and highlight for easy access during the show.)

Now, write the introduction for the show.

Download your Podcast Talent Coach Show Prep Planning Worksheet here:

PodcastTalentCoach.com/prep

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

An Inch-Wide Engagement – PTC 282

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

What is the one thing you struggle with most with your podcast? If you are like 90% of the people who come to me for coaching, it is growing your engagement.

That might mean growing your downloads. It might be getting more feedback from your listeners. Engagement might mean attracting more clients.

Connecting with our listeners is an important part of what we do. You need to ask yourself what you’re doing to create engagement.

YOUR PLAN

Have you created an engagement plan? Are you taking consistent action?

You can get my list of 75 free engagement tips. Find it at PodcastTalentCoach.com/engage.

These tips will help you engage your audience with your content. There are ideas to increase your podcast downloads. You also get a few ways to encourage the audience to visit your website.

Before each coaching call, I get a form that talks about your goals and current situation. Then, I listen to the show to determine what needs to happen to accomplish those goals.

Get coaching details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

I was on a coaching call the other night. The form listed the struggle as growing downloads and increasing engagement.

As I listened to the show, the host did a great job interviewing his guests. The content was great. The production value was solid.

However, the show was missing any element that encouraged engagement. The only call-to-action was “subscribe and review the show”.

THE BENEFIT

Simply asking your listeners to subscribe isn’t going to move the needle. There needs to be a benefit. What’s in it for me?

Start the relationship with your listener. Provide value. Serve. Then, ask for the subscribe. Give them a real reason. “In every episode, we deliver … If you want to continue to get this, subscribe.”

Be sure to get my list of 75 free engagement tips. Find it at PodcastTalentCoach.com/engage.

IDEAS

Here are four of those ideas.

– In your show notes, add a link with an upgrade/resource with each episode.

– Ask questions on other podcasts to get in front of other audiences.

– Offer a bonus for people who share your podcast.

– Create a contest or giveaway

– Don’t blow your first impression.

Ready to get your 75 FREE engagement tips? Learn to engage your audience with your content, increase your podcast downloads, and encourage the audience to visit your website.

Download the list at PodcastTalentCoach.com/engage.

Next week we will dive into your first impression. You can’t catch up to a slow start. We will create your intro next week.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Podcast Revenue Roadmap – PTC281

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Are you ready to take the information you share on your podcast and turn it into a product you can sell? Would you like to make a some money with your show, generate revenue and monetize all of that hard work.

Today, we are going to lay out the roadmap from your content creation to your monetization. Without a plan, it will be difficult to reach your goal.

Imagine being able to leverage all of that great content you are creating each week, use it to attract an audience and then have them buy your information product to help you generate some revenue. That’s the plan we will create today.

EVENT THAT CHANGED MY LIFE

Last weekend, I attended a virtual event that changed my life. I know that sounds over the top. But, it’s true.

It was called JVX Live and was put on by the guys over at Joint Venture Insider Circle. The link is in the show notes at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/podcasts.

Have you ever met a person who showed you what is possible and exactly how to get there? You thought, “Wow! How did I not know about this?” That’s what happened.

Over the years, I have been climbing the hill step-by-step and learning a ton. At this event, it felt like I jumped on the learning gondola that supercharged my growth like you wouldn’t believe.

Here, I was surrounded by people who coach just like me. During the event, we would be split into small groups of 8 where we could talk about what we did and meet the other people. We were all looking for great business relationships.

PARTNERS

Of the 300 people in attendance, I was eventually in small groups with about 80. Out of those 80, I found 40 that I personally spoke with who might make great affiliate and joint venture partners for me. It was fantastic.

We all shared ideas and helped each other grow. It was amazing. Now over the past week, I have been on the phone and Zoom calls talking with these people, learning so much and discovering how we might help each other.

The connections were so energizing. Every time I would tell someone I help coaches and experts demonstrate their expertise and attract their ideal clients with a podcast, they would say, “Oh, I have 3 or 4 people to introduce you to.”

The power of the collective mind is amazing. In addition to meeting and learning, I have found a ton of free resources for you that I will be sharing over the coming weeks. The sphere has just grown exponentially. And, you get to benefit from all of it. How great is that?

Before we get into creating your podcast revenue road map, I want to give you three incredible, free resources that are going to help you immensely in this journey. They are all at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/roadmap.

FREE GUIDE

The first resource is my free guide “Six Ways To Make Money With A Free Podcast.” This guide will give you some great ideas along with a dozen examples.

FREE SHOPPING CART

The second is a free shopping cart. If you want to sell digital products online, you need a system that can be your checkout page and deliver the goods.

This is where I really struggled when I started. I didn’t understand the difference between your shopping cart and your payment processor. Your shopping cart is where people come to shop for your goods and buy them. The payment processor is like PayPal or Stripe. That is the system that actually processes the payment. You link the two together to sell your digital products.

Now, you can get this shopping cart for free. It is called GrooveSell and it has been developed by Mike Filsaime.

Mike is a digital marketer. He helped build Video Genesis, one of the first digital products I ever bought back in 2013. Over the years, he helped build WebinarJam, EverWebinar, Kartra and others. He is amazing.

He has now built an amazing shopping cart platform that rivals One Shopping Cart, Infusionsoft, Ontraport, Samcart and others. It even has affiliate systems built in that are similar to ClickBank and JVZoo.

GrooveSell is usually $99/month just like the others. However, he has given me an affiliate link that will allow you to get it for free for life.

What’s the catch? First, he wants to help a ton of people during this crazy time. So the offer is for a limited time. He also wants people to test drive the system and report any bugs. Mike wants to make sure it is perfect before his big rollout. You can help him and in return get the system for free.

THE FEATURES

The link for GrooveSell is also on the page at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/roadmap.

With GrooveSell, you get:

– Unlimited Products and Funnels

– Flexible Pricing Structures

– Powerful checkout options

– The most powerful Affiliate software on Earth

– Dynamic thank you pages

– Upsells, Downsells, and Order Bumps

– 1-Click Upsell

– Robust Integrations

– No Monthly Fees

– ZERO transactions fees

And, you can use your own PayPal, Stripe or other account.

There are other products Mike sells in the suite. However, this one is free for you with no “gotchas”. Check it out at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/roadmap.

COLLABORATION CIRCLE

The final opportunity is also free. It is a way for you to find partners to help you grow just like I did. Where my event last weekend was 3 days, this event is once per week for 2 hours. You get in small groups and see how you can help promote each other and grow. Make it on the weeks you can.

The group is call Collaboration Circle. It is free to join. You can find my referral link at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/roadmap.

Three great, free resources that will help you get on this path. Get them while you can.

YOUR REVENUE ROADMAP

Now, let’s talk about your own Podcast Revenue roadmap. We need to define your goals before these tools will help you get there. The key is to start with the end in mind and work our way back to build our roadmap.

Look into the crystal ball 12 months from today. Where would you like to be? How many downloads? What would you like to be selling and how much would you like to be making?

WHAT IS FEASIBLE?

Now, let’s take those numbers and see if that is feasible.

Let’s say you would like 1,000 downloads per episode and making $100,000 per year. Some tasty numbers.

Where are you today? Maybe 120 downloads per episode and $0 as an example.

So, if we do the math we see we need to grow your downloads by 880, or about 17 new downloads each week. What can you do to find 20 new listeners this week while keeping the listeners you already have? That doesn’t sound so difficult. It just takes consistent action. 4 new listeners a day.

To hit $100,000, we also need to create $8,333 per month or about $1,925 per week. That might be a little more challenging. What can you offer your audience that they would buy?

WHAT CAN YOU CREATE?

Think of the things in your niche that you have purchased. Directories, lessons, software, books, accessories, tip sheets, apps, instructions, resource guides. If you are like me, you probably have a bookshelf or file on your computer full of them.

What could you create and sell at a reasonable price that your audience wants and needs? Digital products are the best. You do the work once and make the sale over and over again. No inventory. There is no additional production. Every new sale is almost pure profit.

If you could create a digital product that sells for $20, you would need to sell 97 per week to hit your $100k. That’s pretty steep.

What if you created a $100 course? Could you sell 19 of those per week? Still a pretty big hill. This is why you need to work backwards into your numbers. $100k sounds great. However, you need the audience to convert to sales.

Could you create a $497 group coaching program and enroll 2 people per week? Combine that with 6 sales of your $100 course and 20 copies of your $20 step-by-step guide. Now you’re talking $103,000 per year. Find your sweep spot and spend time there.

START THEIR JOURNEY

Once you have defined what your audience wants and needs to solve their problems, what free item could you give them to start them on their journey.

Ideally, each level builds on the previous level. Your lead magnet, or free piece of content, would be a small sliver of your digital product. It could be a free chapter of your book or one particular step of your process. This gets your listeners started on the path to see what is possible.

Lead magnets solve one specific problem. We talked about this in detail in episode 235. Check it out if you need help here.

Where you lead magnet gives your listener a taste, you $20 step-by-step guide shows them the full process and teaches them “what to do”.

Your digital product shows your listener “what to do”, your $100 course shows your listener “how to do it”.

The course is part of your group coaching. Your course shows them “how to do it”. Then, your coaching then helps people implement your how-to course.

It climbs the value ladder. Each rung of the ladder offers a higher level of help with a little higher price tag.

YOUR PODCAST

So, how does your podcast fit into all of this? Your content is the step right before the lead magnet.

On your podcast, teach your listener what is possible. Here, we are showing you what is possible with your show in terms of generating revenue.

It just like like me showing you what is possible with selling your digital products. Then, I send you to my website to get my “Six Ways To Make Money With a Free Podcast.” The lead magnet solves one specific problem. It helps you come up with a way digital product you can create and sell.

Start with the end in mind and work your way back to your content. Once you have the group coaching defined, turn that into a course. Peel off a piece to create a digital product. Use little pieces of the digital product for various lead magnets. Then, use each lead magnet for an episode.

If you talk about Jeeps, create a way for Jeep enthusiasts to find the best off-roading in every state.

Let’s say you talk teaching piano. Create a way to learn 3 of your favorite songs in 30 days.

If you talk genealogy, create a program that teaches people how to track their family tree and hold a huge family reunion.

Do you talk bullying? Create a program that teaches parents how to help their kids develop strong self confidence.

If you love music history, create an affiliate program that helps people visit the historic musical sites around the country.

GET STARTED

Start creating your roadmap. Once you have your plan created, you will know exactly what you need to talk about on your show.

Get those free resources at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/roadmap.

Let’s get started today. Most importantly, enjoy the journey.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

 

 

  • Links may be affiliate links. If you make a purchase through one of these links, I may make a commissions. However, I only recommend products and services I believe in and trust. Monetary numbers are examples only. No promises or guarantees are being made. Demonstration purposes only.
Podcast

No Ads Allowed – How Quin Makes Money – PTC280

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You have worked hard to develop some great content. The show is beginning to attract an audience. How can we turn this great podcast into a business and multiple revenue streams?

Let me give you a free resource. It is a video and accompanying checklist called “6 reasons your podcast isn’t making money”. It also includes ways to avoid those pitfalls. Visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/pitfall to get it for free.

NO ADS

First, let’s make one thing clear. As you develop your podcast, understand that it is difficult to have the show itself be your sole source of revenue. Sponsorships and donations can only take you so far. Your inventory and sources will be limited.

The commercial on a podcast is the idea that comes to mind most frequently. However, there are a few issues with commercials on your show.

First, many people are turning away from traditional radio and to podcasts to get away from the long commercial breaks. Listeners are tired of interruption marketing that really doesn’t pertain to them and sells products and services that do not interest them.

THE CEILING

Another issue with advertising on your show is your limited inventory. How much advertising can you possibly put into a show? There is a ceiling with regard to the revenue you could earn.

Commercials on your show also turns your show into a commodity. Advertising converts your listeners into price. How many listeners do you have? Let’s put that into the formula and figure out the price for your commercials.

You don’t want to be a commodity. You have something special to offer. Don’t let advertising turn your show into something similar to salt or gasoline or cotton balls.

As we have discussed before, sponsorships are a tough sell. Most traditional buyers want to buy podcast ads just like they buy radio ads. They simply are not the same.

With broadcasting, the ads are reaching a broad audience. Therefore, only a small portion of that audience will be interested in the product advertised.

An ad on a podcast, if positioned properly, should appeal to the entire audience. Therefore, it should be more valuable. Yet ad agencies expect to pay the same price as radio ads. You are fighting an uphill battle.

Making your podcast your lone revenue source is possible. However, it is limited to the biggest of the big podcasts. Most podcasters needs another revenue stream.

How do we create other revenue streams using our podcast?

REVENUE STREAMS

We need to be creative. Once we start creating some unique ideas, you will see many others begin to open for you.

In this episode, we are going to devise various opportunities to generate revenue using your free podcast. Each of these ideas uses a different approach. You can tailor each approach to your niche and passion.

The foundation of the book “Free: The Future of a Radical Price” centers on using a free product or service to create demand for a paid product or service. The concept is similar to the lead magnets you see quite often in online business.

You are producing a podcast that is free for your listeners. How can we use that free product to create demand for a paid product or service?

We are not going to cover all of the ideas in Anderson’s book. There are 50 different business models. Let’s look at a couple ideas.

Section one is called “Free 1: Direct Cross-Subsidies – Any product that entices you to pay for something else.”

This section will give us a few business models to discuss. These should give you a few ideas to get your creative juices flowing to create multiple revenue streams for your podcast.

BUSINESS MODELS

1. Give away services, sell products

Book example: Apple Store Genius Bar tech support

Podcast example: Your podcast explains how to set up and use products and then sells those products online

Podcast example: Your podcast provides content and information, sell books, CDs and DVDs about that information

2. Give away products, sell services

Book example: Free gifts when you open a bank account

Podcast example: Giveaway e-books, sell individual coaching

Podcast example: Giveaway podcast info, sell webinars and seminars

CASE STUDY & INTERVIEW

Quin Amorim generates revenue with both ideas. However, he doesn’t allow ads on his podcast at all. He joins us today to discuss his business and podcast model.

Quin Amorim in an online entrepreneur who started with drop shipping back in 1997. He has now evolved to private label brands and selling professionally online using Amazon FBA and Shopify eCommerce stores.

His first online sale was on eBay in 1997. In late 2014, Quin switched to Amazon FBA, where he has since created several brands of his own “Private Label”. He also manages several multi-million dollar accounts with his team.

The Prolific Zone is an agency that Quin founded to work with startups, professional Amazon sellers, International eCommerce companies, and supplement companies. The agency even performs product research for a couple of fortune 500 companies.

He is now the host of QA Selling Online Podcast & Fail Fast Podcast.

In this episode, Quin tells us how he uses his podcast to drive his business without allowing ads on his show. He doesn’t even promote his own agency on his show, and he will tell you why.

GENERATE REVENUE

It is difficult to have the show itself be your sole source of revenue. Sponsorships and donations can only take you so far. Your inventory and sources will be limited. Find other unique ideas to generate revenue just like Quin.

You could use your podcast to drive traffic for your Fulfilled By Amazon business. You could use a similar idea for an Ebay business or affiliate links to create revenue streams.

Grab that free resource I offered you. It is a video and checklist that contains 6 reasons your podcast isn’t making money, along with ways to avoid those pitfalls. Visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/pitfall.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Growing Your Influence – PTC279

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Over the past few weeks, I have had the opportunity to implement a few new strategies to grow my sphere of influence. One of them grew my mailing list by 500 people. What are you doing to grow your influence?

SPHERE OF INFLUENCE

We all know we need to nurture our listener communities. That is how we grow our audience. We find new people to listen to our podcast.

But, what are you doing to nurture the relationships in your peer community? What are you doing to connect with those other people of influence in your niche that can help you grow?

To supercharge your growth, surround yourself with other winners who do what you do. It is critical to your success.

In his book “The Ultimate Sales Machine“, Chet Holmes wrote about the Dream 100. Many people use it and teach it today.

You have probably heard of Pareto’s Principle. It is also known as the 80/20 rule. 80% of your results comes from 20% of your effort. 80% of your sales come from 20% of your clients.

Basically, a very small number of inputs is responsible for a very large percent of the outputs.

Chet tells a story of a magazine that used this principle to double its sales in a year.

A review of their client database showed that 95% of their sales came from 167 of the 2,200 of their clients.

The magazine set out to spend all of their efforts on these particular clients. 28 of these advertisers were enough to double the sales over the previous year.

Rather than using the shotgun approach and hit as many as they could, they used the sniper approach to find the right clients.

That is the way to grow your audience.

If you try to find listeners one by one, it will take you forever to build a big audience. However, if you connect with the influencers who are already talking to your ideal listeners, they can help you reach listeners truckloads at a time.

Partnerships are incredibly powerful.

PARTNERSHIPS

I am in an online group for joint venture partners. We partner with each other to collectively grow.

In the group, I connected with my first partner. She was running a giveaway. You may have received the e-mail giving you the opportunity to get over 40 free gifts.

The giveaway is comprised of multiple content creators. We all offer up something of value, like a course or software of templates. We then all offer the free gifts to our tribe. By doing so, we all grow our e-mail list.

Over the course of 2 weeks, I added 500 new people to my e-mail list. How great would it be for you to be able to have conversations with 500 additional people? That is the power of partnerships.

I am now part of a podcast summit. In this one, a group of podcasters will get together to teach online.We all present for 30 minutes and teach something powerful. At the end, we offer a free resource which helps build our e-mail list.

At the end, the hosts and I had a great time hanging out. Now, they want to do more ventures together. This is how we grow.

I am also in a live joint venture group. In this group, we get on a call every week. We are divided into small groups, so we can share what we are doing and what partnership opportunities we have available. It is networking on steroids.

If you want to see how my joint venture groups work, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jv.

YOUR GROWTH

Now, who can you connect with? Who is an influencer that would make a great partner for you?

Let’s say there are 2,000 ways you can grow your audience. You could do ads, speak at events, send out e-mail, participate in Facebook groups, appear on podcasts, write a blog, post YouTube videos, write articles for magazines, teach at a community college, hand out flyers at events and so many others.

Or, you could find the few actions that can drive a majority of your growth. You could find the 20% that generates the 80%.

If you could find 100 people who are talking to the audience you want to reach, and you could tap into those resources, you can supercharge your growth. That is the magic of the Dream 100 that Chet taught.

This week, make a list of people who are talking to your ideal listeners.

Make a big list. Don’t stop at 6. Try to get to 100. Big fish and small fish. The top 100 people talking to your ideal listeners.

Next, send an e-mail to them. Include three things.

Tell them what you love about what they do. Be specific.

Ask them what they are working on.

Then, ask them how you can support them.

You are not asking for anything. You are simply offering to help them with their projects. Offer value and help.

This is how you start the relationship. This is how you start to build your Dream 100. By taking these steps, you will begin to supercharge your influence.

Get started this week.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Find The Confidence For Your Topic – PTC278

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You have found a topic that you love. It is a subject you can talk about for days on end. Where do you find the confidence to put it out there for the world to see … and judge … maybe love … and probably critique? Confidence is elusive. I want to help you find it today.

Can I tell you how pumped up about podcasting I have been lately? I have been talking with a ton of podcasters over the past few weeks. Some haven’t launched yet. Others have just started. I have talked with podcasters who have been doing it for years.

IMPOSTOR SYNDROME

One common theme that continues to come up is confidence. The Impostor Syndrome. Who am I to have a podcast? Who will ever listen to me?

I was on a call with a doctor the other day. He has been practicing for years and is just getting ready to start a show. He is a little active on social media. However, he doesn’t see the engagement he would like to see to have the confidence to launch.

Doc is starting to hit that point where we all wonder if the work is worth it.

He said, “Will I prematurely quit or double down the efforts and work through the process to success. The passion is the gas in the tank. I need to find that again.”

That is critical. Just like I told him. Surround yourself with people who will inspire you and rekindle your passion. That is what these conversations have been doing for me. I love helping people find their passion.

Will anyone care about your passion as much as you do?

WHO WILL LISTEN?

I was talking with Jeff this week. He has a passion for music and music history. However, he has a desk job. He is struggling with a way to make his passion for music the subject of his podcast and the basis for a new business.

Jeff has the same fear. He told me, “Who is going to listen? Who cares what I have to say? Will they get value from what I discuss?”

Does that sound familiar?

As we talked, we developed the idea of creating a show that highlights the amazing music landmarks around the country, like Graceland and the Hollywood Bowl. We could then develop a way to create a business to serve people who wanted to experience more.

You have it in you to create what you love.

Will it be scary? Absolutely. Can you find the confidence to launch it? Absolutely.

YOUR CONFIDENCE

Surround yourself with people who can support you who are also going through the same things you are going through.

I have a free webinar coming up on Saturday, April 25 that will help you with all of this. You can get details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/whynow.

We will talk about why now is the perfect time to launch. We will also discuss the 7 ways you can use a podcast to attract your ideal clients, how easy it can be and how you can find people to connect with that can support you.

There are around one million podcasts out now. However, there are only about half a million that are active. If you don’t find the confidence and support you need, it becomes a tough journey. It doesn’t have to be that difficult.

I would love to help you through this. You can find the confidence. Get details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/whynow.

Whatever your passion, you can create a powerful podcast with it.

POSITIVE CHANGES

Shelley F. Knight is a once upon a time nurse, clinical hypnotherapist and writer. She provides an eclectic blend of clinical and spiritual expertise in her specialist subjects of Positive Psychology, Spirituality, and End of Life.

Shelley is the author of Positive Changes: A Self-Kick Book, and is a freelance writer for international magazines.

She is now host of Positive Changes: A Self-Kick Podcast and went through these same issues.

When she was launching the podcast, she fought impostor syndrome. The little voice in her head was asking the same questions we all hear. Who will listen to me. She even has a published book and still fought the voice.

I had a chance to talk with Shelley about her journey, and I want to bring that to you today to help you on your journey.

HER JOURNEY

In this discussion, you will learn how Shelley went from a clinical hypnotherapist to a podcaster. She talks about why a podcast is better than a book and what she gets out of a podcast that she doesn’t get from her writing.

We also get into how she overcame the impostor syndrome, what her production process looks like and how she found someone to help her produce the show.

I hope this discussion helps you find your confidence to embrace the topic that you love in order to create the podcast of your dreams.

A big thanks to Shelley F. Knight for being part of the show. The link to her site is right here:

http://shelleyfknight.com

Come be part of the free webinar I am offering coming up on Saturday, April 25. We will talk about why now is the perfect time to launch.

We will also discuss the 7 ways you can use a podcast to attract your ideal clients, how easy it can be to produce your show on a consistent basis and how you can find people to connect with that can support you.

You can get details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/whynow.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Building Podcast Authority With Cindy J. – PTC277

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

I had the opportunity to do a Facebook Live the other day with Cindy J. The Visibility Wiz. We talked about podcasting and why now is a great time to begin building your authority in your space using a podcast.

In this interview, we discussed a few different things regarding podcasting and building an online business.

We talked about why now is the right time to have a podcast. We also discussed why podcasting is a great way to demonstrate your authority and be a leader.

It is a crazy time in the world right now as we battle the coronavirus. We talked about how to address the state of society on your show.

I am part of Cindy J’s Business Success Giveaway. This is an opportunity for you to get over 40 free gifts to help you build a business around your podcast.

You can get 40+ free gifts here: (deadline is April 17, 2020)

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/40Gifts

In the giveaway, I have three tremendous, free resources for you. Here are the descriptions of those free gifts.

 

21 Simple Steps To Create A Powerful And Profitable Podcast In Less Than 30 Days

Are you ready to launch your podcast?

Get a 21-step checklist to launch your podcast, plus a step-by-step video to walk you through it. Get started creating your podcast today.

This is everything you need to go from idea to published.

Have your podcast published in 4 weeks. By following these easy steps, you’ll be publishing your podcast in no time.

 

7 Ways To Attract Your Ideal Clients By Using A Podcast

Your podcast allows you a great opportunity to demonstrate your authority while talking about a topic that you love. If you structure the focus of your show properly, your podcast can be an amazing tool to drive your business and generate revenue.

Here are 7 ways to attract your ideal clients by using a podcast along with a case study to show you how it can be done.

 

Grow Your Coaching Business By Avoiding The 6 Pitfalls Why Podcasts Don’t Make Money

You have tried to grow your coaching business and make money with your podcast, but nothing seems to be working. You have searched the internet and see many with the same question.

The gurus make it sound so easy. Launch a podcast, create a course, sell it to your audience and vacation in the Bahamas while working your four-hour workweek. What else could there be?

There are a few reasons you are not making money with your podcast. Your audience size probably isn’t one of those reasons.

This quick course will teach you how to avoid the 6 pitfalls that prevent most podcasters from making money with their show. Learn how to avoid the trouble and use your podcast to demonstrate your authority and grow your coaching business.

 

Jump in to get the 40+ free gifts. The giveaway ends on Friday, April 17, 2020. Get in before they are gone.

Here is the link:

http://podcasttalentcoach.com/40gifts

Now is a great time to build your authority with a podcast. Get started today.

You can find Cindy J The Visibility Wiz at CindyJHolbrook.com. Her podcast can be found at www.BizSuccessIn15.com.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How Zoë Routh Attracts Ideal Clients – PTC276

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

On this podcast, I haven’t interviewed many people in the past. However, lately I have been asked quite often how to make money with your podcast. On this episode, I would like to show you how one entrepreneur uses her podcast to connect with her ideal clients and drive her business.

ZOË ROUTH

Zoë Routh is one of Australia’s leading experts on people stuff in leadership. She helps her clients, including leaders and teams, overcome silos and turf wars to work better together.

She has worked with individuals and teams internationally and in Australia since 1987. From the wild rivers of northern Ontario to the remote regions of Australia, Zoë has spent the last thirty years showing teams struggling with office politics and silos how to work better together.

Zoë is the author of three books: Composure – How centered leaders make the biggest impact, Moments – Leadership when it matters most and Loyalty – Stop unwanted stuff turnover, boost engagement, and build lifelong advocates. Her fourth book, People Stuff – the power of perspective for better leadership, is due out mid 2020.

Her past leadership roles include Chair of the Outdoor Council of Australia, President of the Chamber of Women in Business, and Program Manager at the Australian Rural Leadership Foundation. Zoë is also the producer of the Zoë Routh Leadership Podcast.

Zoë is an outdoor adventurist and enjoys telemark skiing, has run 6 marathons, survived cancer, is a one-time belly-dancer, and loves hiking in the high country. She is married to “a gorgeous Aussie and is mother to a few garden-wrecking chooks”.

You can connect with her here:

https://www.zoerouth.com

https://www.facebook.com/zoe.routh

https://twitter.com/zoerouth

https://au.linkedin.com/in/zoerouth

INTERVIEW

In this discussion, you will learn …

  • How to use your podcast to demonstrate your authority and attract your ideal clients
  • How to overcome the impostor syndrome and beat back that little voice in your head
  • Where most people struggle when dealing with “people stuff”
  • The “people stuff” you can use to help your audience
  • Why now is a great time for podcasters
  • How to keep your podcast production efficient and prevent your show from eating your entire week
  • How the advice “they’re not listening and you don’t matter” changed Zoe’s life
  • Where to start attracting your ideal clients

If you would like to get more information about my coaching, head to PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

4 Ways A Mastermind Can Supercharge Your Podcast – PTC275

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

A mastermind group can be very powerful for your podcast. If you bring a powerful group of people together, the collective mind can create big things.

NAPOLEON HILL

Napoleon Hill first coined the phrase in 1925 in his book the Law Of Success. He expanded on the idea in his 1937 book Think And Grow Rich.

Here is an excerpt from Think and Grow Rich where Hill explains the concept …

The “Master Mind” may be defined as: “Coordination of knowledge and effort, in a spirit of harmony, between two or more people, for the attainment of a definite purpose.”

No individual may have great power without availing himself of the “Master Mind.”

The two characteristics of the Master Mind principle, one of which is economic in nature, and the other psychic.

The economic feature is obvious. Economic advantages may be created by any person who surrounds himself with the advice, counsel, and personal cooperation of a group of men who are willing to lend him wholehearted aid, in a spirit of PERFECT HARMONY.

This form of cooperative alliance has been the basis of nearly every great fortune. Your understanding of this great truth may definitely determine your financial status.

The psychic phase of the Master Mind principle is much more abstract, much more difficult to comprehend, because it has reference to the spiritual forces with which the human race, as a whole, is not well acquainted.

You may catch a significant suggestion from this statement: “No two minds ever come together without, thereby, creating a third, invisible, intangible force which may be likened to a third mind.”

Many people have used Hill’s mastermind concept to create great things. The book goes into the idea in greater detail. Today, I want to give you four specific ways a mastermind can supercharge your podcast.

MENTAL

  • Like minded people who understand you
  • Think bigger
  • Support
  • Energy and motivation
  • Impostor Syndrome into confidence
  • Habits
  • Focus and clarity
  • Power of helping others

RELATIONSHIPS

  • Connections
  • Create an instant network and extend your current network
  • Exclusive community
  • New friendships

GROWTH

  • Collaboration
  • Shared goals to improve
  • Pushed and challenged
  • Honest feedback
  • Work through problems out loud
  • Progress

KNOWLEDGE

  • More ideas from more contributors for variety solutions
  • Different opinions
  • New & better perspective
  • Insights
  • Brainstorming
  • Been there, done that experience
  • Shared resources
  • Specific knowledge of others

NOT ALL EQUAL

Not all masterminds are the same. A powerful mastermind needs a leader. This is someone you respect who can hold all members accountable.

A good mastermind also needs structure. Members need to agree when to meet, how to meet and why to meet.

The group requires respect, trust and a desire to contribute. Without a common purpose, it will be difficult for the group to succeed.

A successful mastermind also requires all members to have skin in the game. Every member needs to have incentive to show up and be present every single time. If members have nothing to lose, the effort will be less than optimal.

The mastermind also needs commitment with a timeline, so separation isn’t awkward. There will always come a time when it is time to separate. Plan for it at the beginning.

JOIN US

I am combining my coaching with the power of a mastermind into the Podcast Grad School Mastermind. This will be a small group of 8 podcasters with common goals helping each other succeed.

It will include a weekly call where we all come together. These calls will include 30 minutes of teaching to empower you with new knowledge. That will be followed by a hot seat for each member to work through your challenges with group contribution.

You will also be a member of a private group to allow you to collaborate between calls.

As a member of the Podcast Grad School Mastermind, you will get a bi-weekly one-on-one laser coaching call. You and I will get on a call every other week to personally help you with your goals.

This group will help you demonstrate your authority and market your business through your podcast in order to get more clients.

To get you the attention and accountability you need and deserve, the group will be limited to 8 people.

You need to be a good fit for the group. A podcast should be part of your content marketing. You need to be open-minded and willing to accept constructive feedback with the goal to improve. As an ideal member you should also have a desire to use your podcast to drive your business while helping others do the same.

If you would like to apply for a spot or get more information, head to PodcastTalentCoach.com/mastermind.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Make The Best of Challenging Times – PTC274

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

With the coronavirus, times have definitely changed. People are staying home. Some have lost their jobs. A lot of business has moved online. How do you make the best of challenging times like this?

OPPORTUNITY

Let’s keep things in perspective. Yes, times are hard for some people. However, there are also opportunities.

The biggest opportunity is to prepare for the future.

The virus may go away in the next few months as weather in the Northern hemisphere gets warmer. It will probably take a little longer for the economy to recover. I can’t be sure. I’m not an expert in either space.

CONTROL

What I do know is that I am an optimist. I also like to control what I can control.

If you are going through challenging times, my heart is with you. Things will get better. We’ll get through this.

If you are on the other side, don’t get sucked down by association. Just because others are struggling, you don’t need to feel guilty for not struggling. We need to be empathetic rather than sympathetic.

Empathy is the ability to understand and share the feelings of others. Sympathy is a feeling of pity and sorrow for another’s misfortune. Empathy involves lending a hand and pulling them up. Sympathy is all about living in the sorrow with them. Be empathetic and let your positivity rub off.

AVOID THE NEGATIVITY

Brian Dixon is co-founder of hope*writers, an online community of writers helping each other. He is the author of Start With Your People. Brian said, “Don’t write for your critic.” That is powerful.

Your tribe wants to hear from you in an authentic way. There may be a critic that hammers you for being positive and discussing something other than the crisis. However, most will appreciate it.

Over the past few weeks, my strategy calls with podcasters has actually increased. More podcasters are at home. There is less opportunity to be involved with activities outside of the house. This is a big factor driving my calls.

I have continued to deliver my regular e-mails with ways to make your podcast powerful. I have only received positive comments.

People want what you have.

If we look forward to July or August when we are all headed back to work and our lives have resumed to close to normal, will you be prepared?

TO DO LIST

Here are 9 things you can do during challenging times or whenever you find yourself with some downtime. This could be during slow times of the season, when you’re at home sick or if your business is seasonal. Use these steps to continue to move forward.

1. Be human. Understand what some people are going through.

2. Be positive. While some are going through really tough times, others are not. Be careful that you don’t pull the others down into stress and despair by only focusing on the negative.

3. Plan for the future. We will not be here forever. Market for the future. Keep creating your relationships for the future.

4. Keep publishing. People have time on their hands right now. They need to take their mind off off the stress. Keep going with your content.

5. Get ahead. Create some evergreen episodes that you can have ready in case real life hits you.

6. Book interviews. Many of your guests have some free time now that they are not visiting clients or speaking at events.

7. Start writing a book. If you have time on your hands, make good use of it.

8. Make your offers. Many people are looking for things to do.

9. Be generous. Offer some free resources for your audience.

NOW IS THE TIME

Now is NOT the time to put your head in the sand and think nobody wants to hear from you. During these challenging times, your people need you more than ever.

Many are sitting at home healthy and bored out of their mind. Adjust your approach to give them something to do. Highlight your older episodes, so they can catch up.

Then, use your free time to prepare for later in the year. Create your plan for the rest of the year. Create lead magnets and figure out how you will release them. Record some evergreen episodes. Book and record interviews.

Keep your focus on the future. If you get bogged down by the current state of society, you will come to a halt. You will find it hard to get started and catch up when things get back to normal.

Get through the challenging times by focusing on 6 months down the road. Where do you want to be? Start doing the work now to get there.

If you need help creating that plan or just getting out of your own way, reach out. Let’s get on a call and talk about it. The call is free. No charge. Book your time at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. I’ll help you get through it.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Why Your Content Is More Important Today – PTC 273

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

It has been a crazy time in the world lately. When we face trying times like the Coronavirus Pandemic, we are hit with the unknown. We feel like we have little control. You and your show need to be an escape for your listeners.

ESCAPE

The news we hear contains a lot of fear and speculation. We hear about people fighting over toilet paper. My local WalMart just got a shipment of toilet paper in yesterday. There was an armed guard in front of it to ensure people didn’t hoard it.

These are definitely crazy times.

This craze is exactly why our content is important. We need to give our listeners a time to escape from reality for a bit. We need to be the vehicle that helps your listener put their mind elsewhere.

I was on the radio when 9/11 happened. It was early in the morning when the attack hit. My morning guy was actually on the air at the time.

By the time I was on in the afternoon, the news was becoming clear that New York City needed help. Many people felt helpless and didn’t know what to do.

We set up a drive-through donation area with the Salvation Army where people could make donations of medical supplies. The Salvation Army loaded the supplies into a truck and took them to NYC.

On the radio, we needed to decide if we were going to continue to recap the events of the day or return to playing music.

We realized listeners were getting updates from every direction. The news was becoming overwhelming. Our listeners just needed some semblance of normalcy. They needed someone to tell them it was going to be ok.

So, that’s what we did. We returned to playing music. We acknowledged the tragedy and told listeners where they could get info. But, we spent most of our time taking their minds away from the stress.

That is what you do. Take their mind away.

COMPANIONSHIP

People listen to your show for companionship. They don’t want to be alone doing whatever they are doing. Driving, walking, exercising, working or whatever. You are their buddy keeping them company.

When stressful times like this happen, people just need to think about something else. Help take their mind off of the worry and unknown.

Be a friend to your listener. Acknowledge the stress and pain. Then, move on to something else. People need normal. Too much negative news and stress is unhealthy. Take them to another place and time.

We talk a lot about being a friend and creating strong relationships. People do business with those they know, like and trust. In times like these, you can build that trust.

Be there for your listeners in the way they need. That doesn’t mean piling on the bad news and speculating what might happen. That means being an empathetic friend who can have a few laughs thinking about something else.

TOUGH DECISIONS

If you have ever lost a loved one, you know what I mean.

I lost my dad this past summer. Seeing him every day in the hospital was mentally fatiguing. I found it hard to focus on anything else.

That hospital brought back memories of losing my mom almost 20 years to the day earlier. It was like a double whammy. The unknown of if he would ever leave the hospital. Could he understand what I was saying? Was the medication working? I kept going through it over and over in my mind.

My son had a hockey tournament while dad was in the hospital. We needed to decide if we would make the trip or stay at home while dad was in the hospital. It was tough.

When my mom was in the hospital, she fought through a tremendous amount of unknown before she finally let go. I left work many times, because they thought that day would be the day only to find out she stabilized.

I knew it could be a long time before we knew what lay ahead for dad. Keeping up this cycle of “what ifs” in my mind was taking the toll.

We decided to make the trip. Being part of that hockey tournament and getting my mind off of things was just what I needed. Getting away from all of it gave my life a bit of normal.

When I got back to town, things were just as I left them. Dad was still in the hospital in the same state. The questions were still there. The doctors were still trying.

Without that trip taking my mind off of things for a bit, it would have just been weeks of worry, concern, unknown and pain. That isn’t healthy for anyone. My mind was able to relax for just a bit. I could think about other things.

That is what you can do for your listeners. Be that getaway. Help them escape.

FUTURE

So, where do we go from here?

Keep producing your show. Acknowledge and move on.

People need you to be your consistent self. Send the message that things will be ok. This is there normal lives. We are living our life rather than letting external forces we cannot control dictate what we do.

Help your listeners get through this by being you. That is what your listeners need.

This week, recognize the state of our society. Then, do your show. Your listener need you to be consistent.

Be a friend. Help your listener escape. It might just get your mind off of things for awhile as well.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Better Interviews In Less Time – PTC 272

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcast interviews can eat up a lot of your time. Creating intriguing conversations requires many moving parts. In this episode, you get five steps that will help you save time creating your interview episodes.

Many podcast episodes I hear start with a generic question like, “Tell the audience a little about yourself.”

You can’t afford to slowly wade into an interview. Your audience isn’t going to wait around for a lot of useless background information. You have less than five minutes to make your listener want to hear the whole episode.

Start your interview with the strongest question you have.

If you would like help creating powerful interview questions, you can download my free “17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions” at PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview. These 17 questions can be customized for any interview and guest.

Podcast hosts tend to spend a lot of time researching their guests. They read the blogs and books. These hosts scour the guests’ bios. They will listen to previous interviews and learn all they can.

When you spend a lot of your time researching your guests, you eventually suffer from the curse of knowledge. You forget what you didn’t know when you started. You forget what the listener doesn’t know. That creates a gap between your questions and the listener’s knowledge.

I was on a call with a coaching client the other night. We were working to develop a plan for his podcast production. He feels like he spends a lot of time scheduling and preparing for the interview. Then, he spends a lot of time conducting the interview. Finally, there is a lot of time spent on editing, posting and promoting the episode, only to do it all over again for the next show.

He and I talked about his process and where he might save some time creating these interview episodes. As we laid out the plan, I realized that many podcasters could save time creating their interviews by focusing the same five specific areas.

Let’s go through each of them to cut your episode production time in half.

RESEARCH

1. Know the one thing

Your listeners will remember one thing about your episode. As much as we hope they remember the whole story, all of the details or the full list of 25 tips, your listeners remembers the moral of the story. The one thing.

Rather than spending hours researching your guest, decide why you want her on your show in the first place. It could be she created a new hack, she have a unique process, or she was the first person to do something. Maybe she made $100,000 in her first year of coaching and we want to know how.

This will save you a ton of time researching your guest. We don’t have time in the interview to tell their life story. Your listener isn’t tuning in to get her life story. Your listener should benefit in some way by listening to your conversation. Determine what that benefit is. Then, deliver.

PREPARATION

2. Prepare 3 to 5 powerful questions

You will probably use 3 questions.

Once you figure out the one thing you want your listener to take away from your conversation, decide what questions help tell that story.

You won’t need a whole list of questions. You only need a few. These questions should help your guest tell their story. Stories are much easier to remember. Teaching through stories is very powerful.

Ask great questions that help your guest tell stories with great details. Make it memorable.

My list of “17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions” is all about telling stories. All 17 questions help you set your guest up to look great and engage your audience.

THE INTERVIEW

3. Listen and ask great follow-up questions

Help your guest tell their story and get to the one thing.

Use the curiosity of a listener – ask what they would ask.

Now that you have your 3 questions, ask and listen.

This is where you avoid the curse of knowledge. Because you haven’t done hours of research, your curiosity will kick in. You will now begin asking questions that your listener is asking in his head.

These 3 questions will walk your guest right down the path of telling her story. You might use 3 questions in chronological order. Where did she start? What did she learn? Where does she go from here?

You might use a “struggle to success” framework. “What did life look like before the breakthrough?” “When did you realize the breakthrough?” “What is life like now?” “How can I do the same thing?”

Among the primary questions, you will sprinkle in follow-up questions that refine the story. These will be questions like, “How did that happen?” or “What do you mean by that?” or “How did that feel?”

When you are listening like a listener, you are more engaged. Your listener is more engaged. Your guest is more engaged. Everybody wins.

The best part, you just saved a bunch of research time.

EDITING

The last two areas deal with editing. There are two thing you can do to save a lot of time when it comes time to edit your show.

4. Leave large gaps of silence to speed up editing

When you leave large gaps of silence, you can easily find those edit points by simply looking at the waveform.

Before you start the interview, tell you guest to feel free to stop and begin answering a question again. But if they do, you would like them to pause for five or ten seconds. This will help with editing.

You should also tell them you will do the same if you need to start over with a question.

This not only helps with editing, it puts your guest at ease. They will rarely use this option. Their answers will be much stronger, because they aren’t as concerned about messing up.

5. Leave the ums and thinking silence in the conversation

When you leave in the “ums” and short bursts of silence, you let your listener fill in the blank and predict the answer. This makes the interview much more enjoyable and engaging for your listener.

Leaving these in also makes the interview sound more conversational. People use “um” and bits of silence in everyday discussions. They should be part of your conversations as well. You should only be concerned if the “ums” are distracting or the silence becomes too long.

Silence is a powerful attention grabber. When people hear silence in audio, they automatically pay attention, because it is unusual.

When you don’t spend so much time trying to find and remove all of these little nuances, you will save amazing time editing your show.

SAVE TIME

There are five areas that can save you hours every week when you are creating your podcast interviews. Give them a try and let me know how much time you save.

Download the “17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions” at PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Better Audience Engagement – PTC 271

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Would you like to create a deeper connection and relationship with your listener?

There is one adjustment you can make to your podcast to help you achieve your podcasting goals. Whether you’re hope to motivate your audience to action, entertain them with a story or simply get them to listen again, one change to your approach can help you succeed.

This small modification to your approach will have a big impact on creating a trusting relationship with your audience.

It is this. Treat your listener as an audience of one.

FREE WORKSHEET

I have a powerful free resource that will help you define your ideal target listener. This will help you frame you content, words and communication style.

You need to communicate differently with a 25-year-old single guy who is willing to spend money on a BMW than you would with a 51-year-old married female who has grown children and is saving heavily for retirement.

You can get the free download at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

NO GROUPSPEAK

When creating a podcast, it is critical to your success to address each member of your audience as an individual rather than a group, regardless of the size of your audience.

Many podcasters and broadcasters address their audience as a group. “Hello, everyone.” “Good evening, Ladies and Gentlemen.” “You guys are the best.”

Your listeners are not engaged with your show as a group. They are each listening as individuals with unique imaginations. You need to treat them that way.

Addressing your audience as a group is impersonal. Your listener doesn’t feel special. Speaking to a group allows each listener to feel like you are speaking to someone else. It is typical for your listener to feel like it’s alright to not take action, because another member of the group will handle it.

RADIO BEGINNINGS

This style began back when radio began. When radio broadcasting started, station owners needed something to broadcast. The content was typically stage performances broadcast over the airwaves.

The “Ladies and Gentlemen” salutation was meant for the live audience in the theater. It was not intended for the listening audience at home.

At the time, radio was the primary source of entertainment at the family home. Prior to the introduction of television, families gathered around the radio in the family room each evening for their entertainment. Addressing the audience as a group made sense. Listening was taking place as a group.

As radio broadcasts moved from stage performances on the radio to “made-for-radio” dramas that were produced in a studio rather than on the stage, the salutations didn’t change. The live audience was no longer present.

The audience however was still gathered together in the family room. The announcer continued to address the listening audience as a group, simply because it had always been done that way.

THEN TELEVISION

When television was introduced to the family room, long-form radio programming moved to television. Great radio stories like The Lone Ranger, Abbott & Costello and The Green Hornet left the radio for the promised land of television. Radio was quickly being replaced as the nightly family activity in the home.

Eventually, the radio performance was replaced with a disc jockey playing recorded music for the listening audience. Radios also progressed with the introduction of the transistor. Small, portable transistor radios took the place of the large console radios that once occupied the family room.

Listening moved from being a group activity in the family room to being a personal experience with these portable radios. Even as listening changed, most on-air personalities continued to address their audience as a group. It had always been done that way.

NOW PODCASTING

Today, podcast listening has become even more personal. Podcast listening typically takes place alone in a car or with headphones. People are no longer listening as a group. They are alone with your voice.

Even if your listeners are with others while they are listening, each individual is creating unique images in their head. Those images are different from the images created in the imagination of any other person in the audience. Audio is a very personal medium.

Since they are listening as individuals, you should address them as such. Your show should be a one-on-one conversation with your listener.

If most of your listeners are listening alone, it sounds out of place when you say, “Hello, everyone.” Your listener is then saying in their head, “Everyone? It’s just me. Who are you talking to?” “Everyone” is directed at no one. Adjust your language to fit your audience.

If I describe a car making a left turn at a busy intersection, you will envision it much differently than any other person listening to the same story. Television leaves very little to the imagination.

Audio helps create wonderful stories and stirs the imagination. The more personal and individual you can be with your stories, the stronger your connection and relationship will become.

TAKE ACTION

Finally, when you address a group, it is easy for your listener to shirk their responsibilities while expecting somebody else to take care of the tasks.

Let’s say you want your audience to visit your website. You say, “I would really appreciate it if you guys would log onto my website this week and let me know what you think.” Who exactly do you want to take action? You’re addressing the entire group. I don’t need to do it. There will be plenty of others that take action. It won’t make much difference if I don’t do it.

Unfortunately, most listeners are thinking the same thing. When you check your web stats, they’ve barely moved. Very few have taken action. Why? Because you didn’t address them individually. It was easy to assume somebody else would handle it.

THREE STEPS

There are three steps to treat your listeners as an audience of one.

First, get rid of the groupspeak. Change your nouns and pronouns from plural to singuar. Instead of using “ladies and gentlemen” or “you guys”, use “you”, “me” and “I”. Talk to one person. Most everything you say will apply to one person just like it will apply to a group of people.

Second, be personable. Reveal things to your audience that you would reveal to your friends. When you have trust in your listener, she will begin to feel appreciated. Your relationships will become stronger and more meaningful.

Finally, be real. Speak like a real person and not an announcer. Replace announcer words with words real people use. Instead of using “good evening” like a network news anchor from 1975, use “hi” like you would use when you call a friend.

If you hope to make your call-to-action effective, you need to create strong relationships with your listeners. If you want to create strong, meaningful relationships with your audience, you must treat each person in your audience as an individual.

Make each listener feel special. Talk directly to them one-on-one. Use words that sound like you are speaking to one person. Be personable. Be real. Create wonderful relationships as you create multiple audiences of one.

Get the free resource that will help you define your ideal target listener. You can get the free download at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

More Podcast Audience Growth – PTC270

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

We are all looking to grow our audience. Who doesn’t want more podcast audience growth? You need a strategy and multiple ideas.

MULTIPLE STREAMS

Multiple streams of income help grow your revenue. Those streams also protect you from any one source going away. If all of your revenue comes from one source, you are at risk of losing most of your revenue if that source disappears.

The same is true with your audience growth. If all of your new listeners are coming from the same source, your growth dries up if that source goes away.

I have a free resource for you. If you would like 75 ways to drive engagement with your podcast, visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/increasedownloads.

Finding ways to get in front of new audiences is a great way to grow your show. A podcast with a similar audience is ripe for collaboration.

LARRY THE CABLE GUY

I was on a free strategy call the other night with a podcaster. We were discussing how she could use a podcast to promote her books and speaking opportunities.

A podcast is a great way to promote your services and demonstrate your authority.

We talked about her concept, and we realized she didn’t really want to do all of the work to create a podcast from scratch. She really wanted to get a jump start by partnering with an established brand.

That brought to mind Larry the Cable Guy. Back in the early 90s, Dan Whitney was getting his start in stand up before he became better known as Larry the Cable Guy.

If you check out YouTube, you can find stand up routines by Dan. His career was just like every struggling comedian until he found his unique bit and partners to help him grow it.

One of my radio buddies was friends with Dan. Chris and Dan were both coming up through the comedy circuit as Chris was getting into radio.

Dan would call into Chris’ radio show and do his “Larry the Cable Guy” bit. It was commentary on society and hilarious.

This turned into Larry doing the same bit on stations across the country. By being featured on many radio shows, Larry’s comedy career took off.

Larry didn’t need to create his own radio show. He just found established partners who could help him jump start his career.

FIND A PARTNER

As I was talking to this podcaster, and we realized she didn’t want to start from scratch, I told her the story of Larry the Cable Guy. She has a friend who would let her do a feature on his show each week. This is a perfect way to get started.

When Cliff Ravenscraft was doing the Podcast Answerman Podcast, Erik Fisher would do a technology segment on the show each week. Erik now has BeyondTheToDoList.com. Finding a podcast partner is a great way to create audience growth.

BENEFITS

There are a few benefits of using a partner for audience growth.

  • Somebody else creates the bulk of the content
  • No need to edit. You can just show up, record and be done
  • It is a jumpstart. You start a few rungs up the ladder
  • You get in front of a whole new audience

DRAWBACKS

There are also a few drawbacks of this strategy

  • You don’t control the entire content of the show
  • Somebody else’s platform gets the benefit from promotion
  • You don’t control the promotion of the show
  • You don’t control the brand and image of the show

AUDIENCE GROWTH STEPS

If you want to try this approach, three steps.

  • Find someone with an audience you’d like to attract
  • Determine how the main host will benefit from your feature
  • Create a simple agreement in writing, including how often, how long, when you record, compensation (plug your site, etc), how the agreement ends, what happens if one party doesn’t live up to the agreement.

 

FREE RESOURCE

If you would like 75 ways to drive engagement with your podcast, visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/increasedownloads. These ideas will help you create audience growth for your podcast.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

4 Ingredients To A Powerful Podcast Brand – PTC269

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your brand needs to have an identity. In radio, we called it stationality. It was the personality of our station. The rock station had a different stationality than the pop station. Our country station had a different stationality than the news/talk station.

The rock station had that swagger. They were the rebels and trouble makers. You didn’t want to mess with those guys. They were the rule breakers.

The news/talk station was serious. They Knew what was happening in the news and in politics. They were plugged in with the movers and shakers in town. There wasn’t much sense of humor there.

As you develop your show brand, you need to decide what your personality will be. Then, be consistent with it.

There are four ingredients to a powerful podcast brand.

1. YOUR ONE THING – OWN YOUR CATEGORY

When you begin to define your brand and strategy, be specific. What is the one thing for which you will be known? What is the one thing that will make you stand out and be remembered?

You can ask yourself, “When people think of my brand, they think of _____.” It will be very difficult to become a memorable brand if you fill in that blank with some generic term like computers or cars or health.

Be specific, be focused, be consistent and own your brand.

Great brands own their category by consistently communicating one focused message.

Think of the best known brands in America.

The best-known soda in the world is defined by “the real thing”.

Who serves more hamburgers than anyone in the world?

Save 15% on your car insurance.

You’re a great athlete … just do it!

Coca Cola, McDonald’s, Geico, and Nike all deliver focused and consistent messages and thereby become solid brands.

If you study the great brands, you will notice they stand for one specific thing. McDonald’s isn’t simply “food”. It isn’t even “fast food”. McDonalds is hamburgers. Sure, they have other items on their menu. However, they are not known for their apple pies or chocolate milk. McDonald’s is known as a hamburger joint.

2. I’M NEW HERE – BE CONSISTENT AND WELCOMING

Include your brand statement in your show open. New listeners will be saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s goin’ on?” They should know in the first 30 seconds of your show.

The opening of your podcast should explain the purpose of your podcast and let your listeners know exactly what to expect as if this is the first time they have ever heard the show.

A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.

First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show. It is like the intro to a late night talk show.

“From New York. It’s the Late Show with David Letterman. Tonight, Tom Cruise. Larry The Cable Guy. And Katy Perry. Letters from the mail bag. Tonight’s Top Ten list. And Paul Shaffer and the CBS Orchestra. And now, former New York City Medical Examiner … David Letterman.” You know exactly what is coming your way, even if you have never seen the show before.

Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place. Those regular listeners will find comfort in the opening of the show they hear each time they tune in.

Fans will also feel like they are “in the know”. This is similar to singing the theme song of your favorite sitcom. As soon as you hear the first few notes of the theme song, you know you’re on the right channel. Your show intro should elicit the same response.

As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.

3. YOUR STYLE – ADD YOUR PERSONALITY

In order to give your show personality, it needs to be unique. Have a distinctive voice. You can do that by adding context to your stories. What shaped your beliefs? What does your background include?

Create everything you do in your own style. You can only stand out among all other shows when you create your own unique style. You must then make sure everything you do is consistent with that style.

Many new broadcasters try to emulate the style of their hero or mentor. They attempt to imitate the styles they hear from other broadcasters. Unfortunately, copying doesn’t create a unique style. Copying typically creates a watered-down version of some other style. When creating your content, be yourself and find your own style.

Some of the greatest broadcasters didn’t start the ascension to the top until they abandoned the attempts to broadcast in the style they thought others desired and began being true to themselves.

BIG NAMES

Oprah Winfrey quit trying to be a traditional news anchor. She also quit doing the typical tabloid, daytime talk show. When she began to create the show she always desired, she went to the top of the game.

Howard Stern began as a radio DJ sounding like every other radio DJ. He was playing the records and spouting the lines written by management while going nowhere. When Stern decided he was going to do radio his way, he began to make a name for himself. He also went to the top.

Rush Limbaugh followed a very similar path. He had a cheesy radio name. He followed the format designed by somebody else. Limbaugh made every attempt to fulfill the typical radio DJ stereotype. He also got fired again and again. When he decided to broadcast in his style and true to his beliefs, he began his rise to the top.

Adam Carolla made his climb when he took full control over his style and show. He was climbing the DJ ladder in Los Angeles. Carolla had some decent television work. He then decided to create his own show in his own style via podcast. That began his rise as one of the biggest podcasters in the world.

All of these broadcasters made the decision to stop copying others. They all created shows that were true to their style.

They each also stay true to their style in everything they do. You will never hear Rush sound like Howard. You’ll never mistake something Oprah says as something Adam might say. Being true to their style isn’t something that takes conscious effort. It comes easy to each of them, because it is true to who they are as people.

4. BE YOURSELF

Don’t force your brand. Be yourself.

A great podcast is a great relationship. It is just like creating a great brand. In order to develop that solid relationship, you must be yourself. You can’t fake it.

When you try to be someone or something you are not, you will not sound authentic. Eventually, the truth will come out.

Have you ever met someone you had admired from afar, only to have them do something that didn’t fit with your image of them? Maybe it was a baseball player, or a movie star, or a politician or a musician.

You met them with great expectations of an encounter with your hero only to find out they were rude and average. It turned out they were only being who they thought they should be for the public when really they were someone completely different in real life.

Everyone has their flaws. That is what makes them human.

Howard Stern has flaws. He makes his flaws part of his show.

Domino’s Pizza admitted the errors of their ways with their cheap, low quality pizza. They laid it out for the world to see in their marketing.

Your listener will accept your flaws. They will feel like you are “one of them” when you admit your flaws upfront. Don’t be afraid to expose yourself.

When your listener discovers you are something other than the character you portray, the bond of trust will be demolished. Your relationship will be forever damaged.

Build a solid brand. Be yourself.

YOUR BRAND

Own your category. Be unique. Be clear and consistent. Ensure you are welcoming. Include your personality. Be yourself.

Podcast

Your Episode Launch Checklist – PTC268

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

 

When it comes to creating engagement with your podcast, it all starts with the proper preparation. Before you even start recording the episode, you need to determine what you hope to accomplish. This can be accomplished with an episode launch checklist that will help you reach those goals.

The most important piece of your planning is what you will do with the material. How will you make it interesting and unique? Determine where your content will go and how it will create engagement.

12 QUESTIONS

There are twelve questions you should answer before you begin recording.

1. Why is it relevant?

2. How will they care?

3. What is the source?

4. How does source lend credibility?

My example: Steve Goldstein – Amplifi Media

5. What is intriguing?

6. What emotion will it stir?

7. In what context will it be set?

8. Where will the story go? What details will you use?

9. What will they remember?

10. Where will the conversation go next?

11. How will you market it?

12. Write the intriguing intro.

Answer these 12 questions before you record and launch the episode. It will help you reach your goals and create engagement.

I would be honored to help you shape your content. You can get a free strategy session with me at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

CLEAR CALL-TO-ACTION

The most important part is deciding exactly what you want your audience to do. Then, make sure it is clear to those listening to the show. You should ask them to do only one thing. Don’t make the call-to-action confusing by asking them to do too many things.

If you want to create more engagement with your audience, define what you would like them to do. Be specific, make it easy and ask them to take action.

Don’t let one of the questions hold you back. If you get stuck on one or two, skip it and move to the next. The more questions you answer, the stronger your content will be.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Podcast Interviewer or Interviewee? – Episode 267

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

A podcast interview is powerful for the growth of your podcast. This is true when you are the interviewer on your own podcast. It is also true when you are the interviewee being interviewed on another podcast. There are benefits to both of the interview.

Before we get into the episode this week, I want to talk about you. I want to interview you on the Podcast Talent Coach podcast. If you use your podcast to drive your business, let’s talk. Visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/guest.

Interviewer

Benefits

  • Adds content to your show.
  • Your guests are content experts beyond your level of knowledge.
  • Lessens the amount of show prep you need to complete.
  • Adds authority by association.
  • Adds another level of depth to your content.

Negatives

  • Need to schedule time.
  • Not as much control over the content.
  • Requires work to find great guests.
  • A little extra technology required.
  • Some guests like to control the conversation.

Interviewee

Benefits

  • You get in front of a different audience.
  • Adds authority by association.
  • Conduct the interview and you’re done – no editing.

Negatives

  • Tough to get on the good shows.
  • You do not control the final output.

Tips

Create a speaker sheet. Find someone to help on Fiverr or a similar service. See my sheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/guest.

Find complimentary podcasts and do interview swaps. You each interview the other on your show.

I am looking to interview podcasters who use their podcast to grow their business.

As a guest, I can talk about the power of podcasting, how a podcast can demonstrate your authority in your space and how to make money with a podcast. Those topics are on my speaker sheet.

If you are interested, visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/guest. Let’s see if it makes sense to swap interviews.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Start Now – PTC266

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

What does success look like for you over the next 12 months? Have you broken your goals down to specific steps? Start to take steps toward reaching your goals.

Now, this episode isn’t all about setting goals. We are not going to talk about SMART goals and the five goal-setting steps. You know your goals need to be Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Relevant and Time bound. It is also wise to write them down and create an action plan. You can find that information anywhere.

GOALS

What I want to talk about today are the specific actions you can start to take that will get you to your goals.

I was in a coaching session with my business coach the other day. We were talking about where I want the business to go. We were discussing my goals for the next year.

As we talked about my goals for 2020, I realized I don’t need as many coaching clients as I thought. As we worked out the numbers and the structure of the business and what I can offer, I really only need a few great clients to reach my goals.

I can continue to help as many podcasters as possible with my podcast and free worksheets. I can continue to offer my Dollars and Downloads course for those not yet ready for coaching. A few of the right clients will help me reach my goals for 2020.

At that point, my coach and I broke down the year in terms of the number of new clients I would need to find, how many products I would need to sell and what I would need to create to reach the goal.

Have you translated your financial goals into number of business transactions that would need to happen this year. You cannot possibly begin taking steps toward your financial goals without defining those steps.

My coach and I worked together to put the money on paper in terms of business action steps and clients.

KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

When I was getting my MBA, we learned a lot about the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) that drive businesses. There are a few indicators that will help you determine exactly what will drive your business.

A KPI is defined as a quantifiable measure used to evaluate the success of an organization, employee, etc. in meeting objectives for performance.

They are the quantifiable, outcome-based statements you’ll use to measure if you’re on track to meet your goals or objectives.

KPIs are not the overall goal of earning a specific amount of money. They are the steps you can control to help you reach those goals.

For instance, I know that 2 out of every 3 people I help during a free podcast strategy call will turn into a client. They recognize the value of the help I provide and they are at a point in their journey where coaching makes sense.

Therefore, if I know how many active clients I need each month, I can then determine how many free strategy calls I need to complete each month as well.

To gain strategy calls, I need to connect with people. If I can determine which actions attract strategy calls, I can then determine how much action I need to take.

Let’s say I average two strategy calls every time I am a guest on a podcast. I can then work back to figure out how many podcasts appearances I need to make in order to get hit my number.

Those are key performance indicators. It is all about taking the right action. Start using them to reach your goals.

IDEAL CLIENTS

My coach and I determined how many free strategy sessions I need to conduct to find the ideal clients that get the most benefit from my coaching.

Ideal clients are key. Not every podcaster is the right fit for my coaching. There are specific podcasters that can truly use my coaching to really improve their podcast and business.

There are some podcasters that benefit greatly from my coaching. They have a fantastic business helping their clients. They use their podcast to attract new clients and build their authority in the space.

On the other side, there are many podcasters I help with my free strategy session that are not a great fit for my coaching program. Those podcasters get a great deal of benefit from the session by defining their strategy and improving their show. Their show simply isn’t at the level where it can support coaching.

It is just fine that these podcasters aren’t ready. They will eventually be in a place where they are ready to start. We just work together to figure out where they are today.

PARTNER

That is the benefit of having a coach or accountability partner. An outside perspective can ask the questions you don’t see, because you are too close to the situation.

If you would like to see where you are, check out my free strategy session online at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. You can get the details and schedule your free session right there.

You need to take time this week to not only set your goals, but truly define the areas that will really move the needle for you. Define the Key Performance Indicators that will move your podcast and business toward your goals.

Looking back at my process, the most productive week I ever had occurred when I was specific about the very next steps I needed to take. Then I put them in writing to help me start.

That week, I accomplished more than I had in the previous 2 months. It was all because I determined what actions would make a difference, I wrote them down, and then did the very next thing on the list. Focus and start.

YOUR KPIs

As you develop your KPIs, you should have around six. That number will vary depending on the size and scope of your business.

There are four characteristics of every key performance indicator. The should be

  • Measurable
  • with a target
  • from a source
  • and a reporting frequency

Your KPI must be able to be measured. “Be better at returning calls” isn’t specifically measurable. 10 clients is measurable.

It should have a target. 10 calls each week has a target with respect to number and time.

A good KPI has a source. You know exactly where they data will come from and how it is measure. “Connect with 10 clients each week” doesn’t have a clear source. You don’t really know what that means.

When your KPI is “10 face-to-face meetings with clients each week”, you know exactly how to measure that KPI. You know the source of the data.

Finally, you need a reporting frequency. It does you no good to set a KPI if you don’t plan to review your progress on a weekly or monthly basis. Inspect what you expect.

EXAMPLES

There are various examples of strong KPIs.

With regard to sales, you might measure the number of qualified leads in your sales funnel.

A customer KPI could be the number of clients that renew each month.

Marketing KPIs could be monthly website visits or Facebook posts each week.

You need to track these KPIs over months. As you start, these will adjust quite a bit. You won’t know what has impact on the results until you track it.

I know that 2 out of every 3 calls result in a client, because I tracked it over time. The results of a few months gave me an indication of that cause and effect.

Take time to begin tracking your results. If you post a call-to-action on Facebook once a day, what does that do for your results? When you bump it up to twice a day, is there any effect on the results?

Determine what your next steps need to be. Then, start by working backwards.

START WITH FIVE YEAR GOALS

Where do you want to be in five years? Define your long-term goals first.

Use the SMART method to get clear. You might consider creating realistic goals along with some stretch goals.

Five years is a long time. You can get a lot done in 1,825 days.

Many of us overestimate what we can do in one year, but underestimate what we can do in five. Think big.

How much do you want to be earning? What do you want your work life to look like? What does your family look like? How does your health look? Where are you in your spiritual walk?

GOALS NEXT YEAR

Next, where do you want to be next year? Be clear on the goals and lay in some stretch goals.

If you want to make $24k over the next year, $2,000 a month could be realistic. Maybe $8,000 a month is possible if a few key things happen. That would take you to $100k next year. That would be a nice stretch goal.

Just like the saying says, “Shoot for the moon. Even if you miss, you’ll land among the stars.” It has been credited to Norman Vincent Peale. I’ve heard the great Les Brown say it. Regardless of where it originated, there is truth in it.

Shoot for your stretch goal. You may just outperform your realistic number.

QUARTERLY GOALS

Now, let’s break the yearly goal into four parts. What do you need to accomplish in each quarter of the next 12 months to get you to your yearly goal?

You eat an elephant one bite at a time. Break your yearly goal into quarterly milestones. Be clear and specific. “Get more clients” is not a goal. How many do you need. If you need 24 over the year, can you land 6 per quarter or one every other week?

As you break your goal into smaller steps, you will see if your goals are feasible with the tools and time you currently have. You may find that you need to add help or give up something in order to make the goals happen.

WEEKLY GOALS

Next, we take the quarterly goals and break those into week-by-week goals. You have 13 weeks in the quarter. What needs to happen every week to make the goals a reality?

Be sure to build in some “catch up” time. Again, we overestimate what we can accomplish in a short time. The shorter the time, the more we miss the estimate. Build in time to catch up each week.

THIS WEEK

Now that you have your weekly goals, what are the things that need to be completed this week? Create the task list and start.

TODAY

Take a look at this week. What are your objectives today? What is the next most important step? Start there.

REVIEW

Review each step of the way. Are your goals realistic? Can you really put in that much time everyday, every week and every month to make your goals happen?

Review your KPIs on a regular basis and adjust where needed. Make sure the key performance indicators are truly indicators. If you adjust them, ensure there is an effect on your results.

CONSISTENT ACTION

Finally, stick with it. Focus. The only way you will achieve your goals is with consistent action. Take steps forward every day.

To help you take those steps, find an accountability partner. Maybe join a mastermind. Hire a coach. Enlist a partner. Whatever it takes to keep you moving forward toward your goals.

Setting goals and writing them down won’t be enough. Focused action on the next step is the key to making your goals a reality. Start and then stay accountable to action.

I’d love to help you. Check out my Free Strategy Session where you and I will sit down for 30 minutes to lay out an action plan for your show and business. Get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Podcast Profit Path – PTC265

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Let’s talk about creating your plan to make money with your podcast. What would it mean to you to generate some profit from your podcast?

You could be looking to make this a business and career. You might want your podcast to be your side hustle. Maybe you are just looking to make a few dollars to cover the costs of this crazy hobby.

Whatever the goal, you need a plan. You cannot succeed unless you know what the destination of success looks like and then develop a plan to get there.

There are four steps to creating your plan. And then there is some special sauce that can make it incredibly powerful.

THE AUTHOR

I was on a coaching call with a client the other night. He is an author. Doesn’t that sound impressive? We worked together to refine his plan and get him closer to doing this full-time.

When I tell you he is an author, I actually mean he self-published a book. The book is available on Amazon, and anyone can buy it. It looks a lot like every other book on Amazon, especially when you buy it on Kindle.

It has never been easier and cheaper to self-publish. The book gives him big credibility.

However, the book shouldn’t be the way to profits. It is took difficult to sell enough books to make a living.

That is where we started on his plan.

We talk about this show being a way for you to learn how to transform your information into entertainment so we can turn your podcast into powerful, profitable relationships.

People do business with those they know, like and trust. The content I give you each week is designed to move your listeners along that continuum.

We want your listeners to first become aware of you. Then they decide they like you. Finally, they trust you enough to do business with you.

Those three elements are part of the process to developing a business around your show. Attract an audience. Create a relationship with them. Turn that relationship into a trusting friendship and help them solve their problems.

We fold those steps into your plan to generating money with your show. Without a plan, you could end up anywhere. A plan helps you focus on the destination.

4 STEPS

There are four steps in creating your money plan. First, build your audience. Second, create a relationship with that audience.

Next, build a framework to move your audience from casual observer to consumer of your content to client. Finally, offer to sell them something they want and need in order to solve their problems.

AUDIENCE

The first step in the path is your audience. You need to define your ideal target listener.

We talked about the benefit of creating a target listener in various episodes.

When you are hyper-focused on one, single individual, you can define exactly what they want, need and desire. You can articulate their hopes, dreams and fears. You will know exactly what they need and are willing to pay for.

Focus on a single person makes your content much more relevant. You can frame it from their perspective. Your focus allows you to speak their language in their terms.

When you know everything about your target listener, you will know exactly where to find them. That makes your marketing easier and cheaper.

You won’t need to fish in the ocean. You can look for your ideal fish right in the middle of their school. It will be easy to see where they are all congregating.

When the message is laser focused, the conversion rate is much higher. The message is relevant to a greater share of the audience. Your content means more.

Define who do you help, what do you help them do and why.

My “who” is podcasters.

My “what” is transforming information into entertainment. Making their content more engaging.

My “why” is all about growing a business. It is to help podcasters create powerful, profitable relationships. I want to help them make money by creating engagement with their audience.

RELATIONSHIP

That relationship is the second step in your profit path.

Once you gain attention by knowing exactly whom you are targeting, you then need to begin the relationship. Begin helping her.

How will you attract your target audience other than with your podcast? How will they begin to know things about you?

People get to know you by the things you share. Tell them what you believe and value. This will happen through the stories you tell on your podcast, on social media, in your e-mail and various other ways you connect with your audience.

FRAMEWORK

Now that your audience knows a little about you, they want to see what you have to offer. She wants to know how you can help her achieve her goals.

What could you offer your audience for free to help them solve their problems and overcome their struggles?

Create a lead magnet that you can offer your listener in exchange for her name and e-mail address. This will allow you to begin sharing even more information with her.

Your lead magnet should be short and easy to consume. It should also solve one specific problem.

Examples of great lead magnets are worksheets, checklists, top 10 lists, a list of resources and case a study.

Help her solve a problem that she knows she has. This begins to create goodwill and strengthen your relationship.

PRODUCT OR SERVICE

Now that you have created a relationship with your listener, it is time to offer her even more help. This is a chance to go a little deeper with you.

How can you turn what you have to offer into a product or service?

As you try to create this product or service, look for two things.

Find your lead magnets that are getting the most traction. If they are getting downloaded a lot, this is a sign that your listeners want more of that.

You should also see what your audience is asking. If there are frequent questions, that is another sign. If you are asked the same question three or four times, there is a good chance you could turn that into a product or service.

SPECIAL SAUCE

As you have developing these four steps, there is one thing you can do to make it easier to succeed. The special sauce is focus.

When you focus on one thing, it makes it much easier to accomplish that thing. Focus prevent a bunch of projects that are half way complete.

Start one lead magnet. Promote it for a while to see if it gets any traction. Center your content around that topic. Focus.

Once you have determined whether or not that lead magnet has any potential, you can then start a second.

Offer one product or service until you determine if it a viable product.

Focus will help you reach your goals much faster.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your Podcast Business Framework – PTC264

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Are you like most podcasters who contact me for help? Are you trying to make money with your podcast?

STRATEGY

When podcasters reach out to me for my complimentary podcast review and strategy session, I ask them a few questions to see where I might be able to help most. One of those questions asks about the biggest struggle they are facing.

I recently went through all of the questionnaires looking for commonalities. The struggle mentioned most often had something to do with making money with their podcast.

It reminds me of listening to a presentation by Brendon Burchard. He was describing a session at his Experts Academy. One of the speakers asked the audience how many had a website. He then asked how many wanted to make money with that website. Finally, he asked how many of you have something to sell.

That is typically the problem with podcasts. People want to make money with their podcast, but few have anything to sell.

If you have listened for any length of time, you know I am not a fan of relying on sponsorships or ads to generate revenue. I feel they clutter up your show. People are leaving radio and coming to podcasts to escape the ridiculous number of ads.

THE PROFIT

I cut the cable. If we are watching tv, my family now subscribes to a few streaming services.

The other night, we wanted to watch The Profit. It is the CNBC series where Marcus Lemonis finds struggling businesses to invest in.

We have always watched it on Hulu. Now it seems that the latest episode is on Hulu. The rest of the episodes are now on the NBC streaming service.

I clicked on NBC. It made me go to the website to enter the activation code. When I did that, the site wanted me to link it to my cable subscriber. I skipped that step, since I don’t have a cable subscriber.

NBC then generously gave me 3 credits to use to watch their programs. I figure after these 3 credits, it will be a pay-for-play service like the others. I get it.

While I am watching one of my 3 free episodes of the Profit, I get the same stupid commercial breaks I would get if I was watching the show on free TV.

Why do I have to sit through commercials when I am paying them a fee? I am trying to escape commercials. Needless to say, I won’t be subscribing to NBC after my 3 free credits are gone.

If people are leaving broadcast and coming to podcasting and other on-demand services to escape commercials, why would you want to clutter up your show with them and risk sending them elsewhere?

THE INTERRUPTION

Seth Godin calls it interruption marketing. Companies interrupt whatever the listener or viewer is doing with a marketing message that may or may not be appropriate or pertinent. How many Audible and Blue Apron commercials can you sit through?

The other reason you don’t want to rely on commercials is because it makes your show a commodity. Your 1,000 listeners are the same as 1,000 listeners to any other show.

Ad buyers place their ads using a CPM model. They pay a certain price per 1,000 listeners. In radio, buyers will tell us they want to come in at a particular CPM. Our 1,000 listeners are the same as every other station.

Do you want your podcast treated that way? Are listeners to another show just as passionate and valuable as your listeners? Can you live on $40 per thousand listeners?

In order to make serious money with sponsorships, you need a pretty sizable audience. Most podcasters are not in this stratosphere.

Whether you want to turn your show into your career or simply want to cover the costs, I have a few ideas that can help get you there.

THE PROCESS

Let’s look at the facts. You have a podcast that is free to listeners. How can we take something that is free to consume and convert that into some revenue?

There are many ways to take the attention you are generating and leveraging that attention to make money. The first step is the gain the attention. We talked about building your audience in the episode last week.

You don’t need to have hundreds of thousands of listeners. You simply need to have passionate listeners that want more of what you share. Then, develop a product or service to sell. This way, the more you sell, the more you make. You control the output and the quality of help your listeners receive.

Are you teaching your listeners? Are you providing them with tools and information they can use? Are you interviewing interesting people that share great information that might be stretched into something more?

Perfect. Turn that in to a product or service.

PROFIT IDEA

I was on a coaching call with a podcaster struggling with making money. She has a podcast where she talks about healthy diets and how people can eat better. She loves teaching, talking in front of people and giving presentations.

We talked a lot about the people who reach out to her for advice. Many of these people had similar questions and similar struggles.

After we peeled the onion and discovered a few different layers, we determined she could start small group coaching to generate a few hundred dollars a month.

When people think of coaching, they think of some intricate system to market the program, bill the participants, and conduct the training.

I suggested she send an e-mail to the few hundred people on her list. If she could find 5 people willing to pay her $97 per month for group coaching, she could earn $485 per month.

In the e-mail, she could simply say, “I am starting a small group that I will coach each week providing A, B and C. We will get on a call each week to discuss it, answer questions and help with struggles. We will create some accountability to help you eat healthier and lose weight. Participation will be limited to 5 people and cost $97 per month. If you are interested, reply to this e-mail.”

When the people respond, have them send you $97 via PayPal. Then, set up a private group call on Google Hangouts, Zoom or the free platform of your choice.

At the end of the month, you ask, “Who want to go again?” Sign them up and recruit more with your e-mail list.

You only need 5 people and you’re making money each month. Don’t make it more complicated than it needs to be.

THE FRAMEWORK

That is just one example of using a model called “Give away products, sell services”. She is giving away recipes, spreadsheet tools and other .pdfs. Then, she sells her services.

1. Podcast example: Giveaway lead magnets, sell individual coaching

2. Podcast example: Giveaway podcast info, sell webinars and seminars

I am putting together a new project to help you make money with your podcast. It will include a lot of examples and ideas like this.

Do you have a few hundred people listening to your show? Have you started gathering their e-mail addresses using an e-mail service?

Let’s get started. If you want to make money with your podcast, you must have something to sell. I can help you do that.

THE WORKSHOP

Money doesn’t fall off of the money tree. You need to leverage your audience and give them an opportunity to get even more value from you.

You can watch the free videos. Find them at PodcastTalentCoach.com/MoneyProject. You can learn all about the project there and get started with the free videos.

I can wait to help you make this year the year you start generating some money with your show. But, you need to take the first step. Go watch the videos at PodcastTalentCoach.com/MoneyProject. I’ll see you over there.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Now, understand I cannot guarantee you are going to make a million dollars. I can’t even guarantee you are going to make one dollar.

I don’t know you, your abilities and talents. I don’t know your level of commitment or how much you take action.

So, I cannot promise you that. In fact, it is against the law here in the U.S. for me to guarantee anything like that. Your results will vary.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

7 Ways To Grow Your Audience This Weekend – PTC263

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are things you can do this weekend that can grow your audience. Some tactics will have immediate effect. Others will grow your audience over time. Each tactic incorporates one powerful ingredient.

Word-of-mouth.

Word-of-mouth has worked for me time and again. You can start using it this weekend.

RADIO AUDIENCE

It was the spring of 1999. The company I worked for had just purchased a few more radio stations in town. Our general manager was going to let me program one of those stations as a Top 40.

Now, the biggest station in town was a Top 40 that had been around for about 20 years. They were the big dog. Everyone listened to that station. Getting people to change would not be easy. In fact, it had been my favorite station as I was growing up.

The station couldn’t just be better. We had to do something different.

We signed on the station playing Top 40 music that leaned a little rhythmic. Along with the biggest hits on the chart, we were playing the rap and hip hop that wasn’t being played anywhere on the radio in town. It got high school and college kids talking.

Our on-air team consisted of me in the afternoon and a 20-something kid at night. The rest of the day was nothing but music. We had a promotions director who helped a ton, but wasn’t on air. The 3 of us had to take down Goliath.

Since there was only 2 of us on the air, we started using our listeners as the voice of the station. Our listeners introduced new music. High school kids hosted our Top 9 at 9 countdown. Listeners were on the air all the time requesting songs and giving a shout out to their friends.

The week after we signed on our station, they big heritage station was having their annual outdoor concert. We set up shop along the only road in and out of the amphitheater. We were shaking hands and thanking people for listening all day long.

By campaigning along that road, we upset the big station. So much so that they came down to run us out. That was no problem. We had hired an airplane to pull a banner and fly over the event. The banner said, “Channel 977 – Move To It”. More importantly, the other station stood on stage and told the crowd to NOT look at the plane. More word-of-mouth.

Whenever we were on the streets for events that summer, we were recording more listeners to put on the air. Our entire goal was to make listeners feel like they controlled the station and really had input in what we were doing. They talked about it all the time.

One year later, we were the number one radio station in town. A few years later, that heritage station changed their name and their musical focus. Our listeners did it all.

PODCAST AUDIENCE

I took that experience and used it when I was launching my podcast.

As the podcast was taking off, I was networking with other great podcasters in the industry. Not only was I getting my listeners to talk about my show, other podcasters who came before me were helping.

That’s the difference between radio and podcasting. You have to choose between two stations. Radio is 24-hours a day. If you are listening to one, you are not listening to the other.

With podcasting, you can always listen to two podcasts … or three or four. Podcasts are only a few hours a week at most. There is still plenty of time to consume others. Podcasters are always much more willing to help each other.

When I ask people how they discovered me and my show, many tell me they heard someone else mention it. It may have been on a podcast, on social media or during a conversation.

Word-of-mouth is powerful. Use it to your advantage.

GROW YOUR AUDIENCE THIS WEEKEND

Here are seven things you can do this weekend to start growing your audience.

1. Deliver quality content in your newsletter that could be used and shared.

Ask listeners to bring along a friend & spread the word.

Deputize your audience.

2. Network with as many influential people in your niche as possible.

When others in your niche talk about you, it can give you instant credibility. This doesn’t necessarily need to be a podcast. This can be a website, publication, or any other well-known individual in your niche.

3. Create a flashback segment from an old episode on your current episode.

There are two ways to increase downloads. One is getting more listeners. The other is to get currently listeners to listen more. By getting current listeners to check out past episodes, this is a great way to increase overall downloads.

4. Do Facebook Live “ask me anything” sessions.

Demonstrate your expertise.

5. Get media to talk about you.

Become an available expert in your field. Send them a note about something newsworthy in your industry. Then, tell them you are available if they need an expert to expound on the details in the news story. Make it easy for them.

6. Create a survey for your super-fans to determine what they desire

7. Partner with another podcast.

Just like I did when I launched my show, reach out to other shows in your niche. Especially those that compliment your show. Trade resources with another podcast. Guest host for another show.

GET STARTED

Some of these can have an immediate effect on your downloads. If another podcaster or a news outlet mentions your show, your downloads can jump quickly. Creating content that can be shared and doing Facebook live sessions will take a little longer, but will create a solid brand for your show.

If you want to create revenue with your podcast, you need to first build an audience. This is where you start. Take action this weekend on two or three of these. See what is possible.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Why Is The Bullseye Worth So Much? – PTC262

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

My “why” really hit me last Wednesday night.

SALSA

It was early evening while I was sitting at the kitchen table eating some chips and salsa. Well, it is tomatoes and other ingredients and seasoning that I affectionately call garbage dip and pass off as salsa.

The chips were those little Tostitos that are about as big around as a golf ball. I don’t know why we even buy those. I have to eat them two at a time. Why not just get the bigger chips to start?

I have my laptop open enjoying some snacks when my daughter arrives home. After she sets her stuff down and hangs her coat, she comes over to give me a little sideways hug while she is standing next to me.

Well, I thought she came over for the hug. I quickly realize she is also there to snag some chips and salsa. Maybe the hug was just a bonus.

Emma is getting ready to finish her senior year of high school and head to college. She hasn’t decided the school or the major yet.

She wants to do everything. And usually does it.

MASTERMIND

It is a brief chat before I head down to my office for my mastermind call.

It is during that call with my mastermind partner Jon that things take a turn.

Jon and I spend most of the hour updating each other on our progress over the last week and goals for the upcoming days. We are working on books and courses and coaching. Things are good. Jon always inspires me to do my best work.

Toward the end of our call, I’m telling Jon about a few clients I’m working with and how we are defining the “why” behind what they do.

That’s when Jon asks, “What is your why? Why do you coach these people?”

I told Jon I love coaching. That’s why I coach podcasters. That is why I coach hockey. That’s why I love teaching my kids.

I get inspired when I help people reach their goals.

He says, “Yeah, but why do you run this business? Why do you need a business to coach people?”

It took me a minute. That hug from Emma probably made me better understand it.

MY DAD

This coaching business means I can spend more time with my kids. My parents split up when I was five or six. I was so young that I can’t remember exactly when.

My dad started taking us on the weekends. Over time, that became Sundays. Eventually, we were only getting together when I played hockey.

When I coach, I can coach from anywhere. I can do what I love while being anywhere my kids are. If Emma is performing somewhere, I can be there. If Simon is playing hockey somewhere, I can be there.

And, I can still serve podcasters and do what I love.

By running this business, I can be for my kids what my dad wasn’t able to be for me. That’s my “why”.

It took some chips and salsa along with my accountability partner to put it into words.

This weekend, Emma and I are going to the theater to see a production of Die Hard. Yep, the Bruce Willis movie turned into a stage production. We’ll see how that goes.

Even if the show turns into a melodrama, at least I’ll have a few more hours with my little girl before she conquers the world.

2020

That takes me into 2020. I’m putting the final touches on a really cool project. I’ll be rolling it out in a couple weeks.

The project just needs a little more feedback to ensure I have all the bases covered. I can’t wait for you to see it. Watch your e-mail for more details.

So, what is your why? Go a little deeper. Move beyond the superficial “why” like “I love to coach people.” Find the real meaning of what you do.

German philosopher Frederick Nietzche said, “He who has a ‘why’ can endure any ‘how’.”

What make you energized and excited? What makes you inspired?

How will you know when you arrive at success?

Once you have defined that true why, you can transfer that to what you do.

Your purpose is defined by your talents, values, passions and expertise.

Where do your strengths lie?

What things that come naturally?

YOUR 3 LEGS

In his book “Wisdom Meets Passion”, Dan Miller talks about the three legs of the stool that are necessary for any passion to become a business. He says without any of the three, the stool falls over.

We cannot just hope our passion will produce profits. Your idea needs three components.

What are you deeply passionate about?

What displays your strongest strengths?

Now consider your model for creating income.

It can be boiled down to these three points.

What are you good at?

List the things you love to do.

What does the world need and is willing to paid for?

Where those three come together is your superpower.

What do people ask you about? Take note when people say, “How do you do that and make it look so easy?” That is a big key. People ask me all the time how I speak in front of large groups or on the radio to thousands of people.

YOUR NEXT YEAR

I can’t wait to help you supercharge your next year. Keep an eye on your e-mail for more info on my new project. I would love to have you be part of it. I am building it to allow me to spend as much time as I can with my kids while serving podcasters across the globe. The best of both worlds.

When you are this hyper-focused, you can define exactly who you will target. You will know exactly what they need and are willing to pay for.

Focus makes your marketing much cheaper. There is far less waste.

When you start advertising, you can use a laser rather than a flood light. You can select your exact market rather than the entire marketplace.

It is similar for your sponsors. Spreading the message of a manufacturer of golf clubs in a podcast for golfers is much better than running an ad in the NY Times. The message matches the market perfectly in the podcast. The message in the newspaper is reaching everyone, many of which will never play golf.

When the message is laser focused, the conversion rate is much higher. The cost is lower, because audience is smaller and easier to reach.

When you have defined your “why”, your actions and plan are much more efficient as well. You know exactly what you are doing and why you are doing it. Everything else can be put to the side.

Take time this week and define your “why”. You will be surprised how energized you become.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Structure Your Podcast – PTC 261

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

So many people feel structure will take away the opportunity to create and be spontaneous. My degree in architecture and career in radio proves that many people are very creative within a framework and structure. The framework actually gives your creativity focus. Focus is exactly how a show clock for your podcast benefits you.

A show clock is basically where your elements will fall during the episode.

LATE NIGHT

Think of a late night talk show. They have the opening skit. It is followed by the show open. The host is introduced and he does his monologue. That might be followed by some sort of skit or short. The host then interviews two or three guests. Maybe a band plays to close the show. Finally, the credits roll.

That format would be a show clock. Now, on each episode, the team simply fills in the parts. What is in the monologue? Do we have a skit or bit tonight? Who are the guests? Who is the band? Do we need to make room for anything else?

The show clock and grid provides the continuity and comfort for the viewer or listener while still allowing the host and team to be creative.

We need a skit on the show tonight. Is it going to be viewer letters, karoke or man-on-the-street? Maybe Dan wrote something new that we can add in. You have the framework. It is now up to you to design within that framework.

ARCHITECTURE & RADIO

When I tell people that I have a degree in architecture, but have spent my entire career in radio, they look at me like I have two heads. How does architecture turn into radio? They are nothing alike.

Actually, architecture and radio are quite similar. To be successful in either discipline, you need to be both creative and analytical at the same time. In architecture, you are given a set of requirements in which to use your creativity.

The architecture client might say, “We need a 2-story clubhouse for an exclusive golf course, along with 2 tennis courts, a pool, a dining room that seats 200 yet can be divided, and a garage to store the golf carts.” Now, go create.

The radio client might say, “We are opening a new location out west. We need to attract people there in the first two months. We need a commercial that stands out from the other stores in our industry.”

Or the boss might say, “We need to attract as many listeners to our morning show while still playing 8 songs an hour. You need 3 traffic reports, 10 minutes of commercials and 2 weather reports. Be funny.”

How do you get it all in? You create a framework that helps you focus on the important information that will move the needle and help you be successful.

If you have a podcast that is serving as a marketing tool for your business, you need to make sure you have carved out time to market your business while still entertaining the audience.

We are going to compare how four podcasters structure their show around their business. They entertain and provide useful, valuable information while still attracting clients to their business.

SCHOOL OF PODCASTING

Dave Jackson – School of Podcasting – Sells podcast consulting and a membership – podcast is 43 minutes.

:00 – Episode tease

:15 – Recorded open jingle

:23 – Dave introduction of the podcast

:58 – Dave episode introduction

1:30 – Promote the deal at the website

2:00 – Topic 1

20:00 – Question of the month

25:00 – Membership promo

25:15 – Book recommendation

26:00 – Final answer to question of the month

27:45 – Next question of the month question

30:00 – Topic 3

37:09 – Topic 4

41:25 – Tease for next episode

42:30 – Show close

42:45 – Outtakes

NATURAL BORN COACHES

Marc Mawhinny – Natural Born Coaches – Sells consulting for coaches – Podcast is 29 minutes.

:00 – Before we start the show – 10 Clients in 90 Days program

:30 – Recording intro to the show

1:00 – Marc’s introduction of the episode and guest

1:45 – interview begins

26:00 – Where can people find the guest?

26:50 – Recap of the guest

27:05 – Recorded close

ARMANI TALKS

Armani Chowdhury – Armani Talks – Sells soft skills coaching – Podcast is 8 minutes.

:00 – Armani introduction of the podcast

:20 – Today’s episode introduction

1:00 – Topic 1

7:40 – Lesson from today

8:05 – Call-to-action

8:25 – Show close

READING WITH YOUR KIDS

Jedli – Reading With Your Kids – Sells marketing services for children’s books – Podcast is 33 minutes.

:00 – Recorded introduction

:05 – Jedlie’s podcast introduction

:40 – Jedlie’s show introduction

:45 – RWYK Certified Great Read promo

1:45 – Guest introduction

2:00 – Interview

29:25 – Plug guest’s contact information

30:10 – Interview wrap

30:30 – Tease of next episode

30:45 – RWYK Certified Great Read promo & plug

32:08 – Thank of people that make the show possible

32:26 – Host show close

32:40 – Recorded close

YOUR CLOCK

Whether your show is 8 minutes long or 43 minutes long, it needs a show clock. You need to remind yourself to promote your business. You also need to schedule where and how that will happen.

That is where a show clock comes in. The clock helps you schedule the various parts of your show. My Podcast Talent Coach Show Clock Worksheet will help you put it all together.

Get my show clock worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/clock.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Podcast

Incorporate Your Podcast Into Your Business – PTC260

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your podcast allows you a great opportunity to demonstrate your authority while talking about a topic that you love. If you structure the focus of your show properly, your podcast can be an amazing tool to drive your business and generate revenue.

OSCAR’S PODCAST

When Oscar Trimboli came to me for coaching, he had the desire to strengthen the connection between his podcast and his consulting business.

Season one of his podcast consisted of interviews. He was headed into season two and wanted this season to be more about teaching his five levels of listening.

Oscar Trimboli is a mentor, leadership coach, speaker, author and podcaster. His podcast and book are both entitled “Deep Listening – Impact Beyond Words“.

OSCAR’S BUSINESS

Oscar Trimboli has 30 years experience in bringing out the best in senior executives and next generation leaders.

Leaders seek Oscar’s help when they feel frustrated with their organizations’ results and their own performance. They’re drowning in information and feel stressed, time poor and swamped by their day-to-day workload.

Past beliefs, assumptions and decisions are no longer serving these leaders. They need a different way to think, a fresh perspective, renewed focus and energy.

Leaders that work with Oscar say they soon learn to think with laser-sharp focus and clarity. They become more self-aware and experience greater personal alignment with who they really are. With that awareness, these leaders gain a clear perspective, deeper understanding and a true grasp of their purpose and legacy.

Clients say Oscar quickly takes them from feeling disoriented and confused, to feeling energized and ready to create their legacy.

THE PODCAST & BUSINESS CONNECTION

As Oscar and I worked together, our challenge was to bring that power and authority to Oscar’s podcast.

Our goal was to create engagement with his audience and demonstrate his authority in the space. Over time, this would help him grow his consultancy.

In order to reach Oscar’s goals, he needed to start asking for feedback in order to get feedback. This would help drive engagement.

Oscar also created a Facebook group to begin building community for each level of listening and interact with his audience.

To build his authority in his space, I suggested that Oscar interject himself more into the episodes, so listeners get to know him.

PODCAST EVALUATION

In this episode, we review examples of what Oscar is doing today on his show to connect with his potential clients. We look at specific clips of his show where he in incorporating, explaining and promoting his business within his content.

Oscar Trimboli is now the author of 3 books. He also offers the “Deep Listening – Impact Beyond Words” playing cards set that helps improve your skills as a listener.

Over the last 7 years, Oscar has coached, mentored and advised people in a wide range of roles from founders, CEOs and CFOs to a variety of other leadership roles in financial services, technology, professional services, education and not for profits.

He has been asked to speak to leadership teams and their organizations about the importance of clarity to create change, how to embrace the digital economy and the role values play in the achievement of your purpose.

People who have worked with Oscar have a few things in common. They want to bring alignment to their work and life.

Once they have personal congruence, they very quickly accelerate their business and personal impact. Their energy and passions are now focused and they feel alive rather than distracted and frustrated. As a result, they achieve high impact outcomes aligned to their passions.

His podcast is now focused on the same material. He demonstrates his authority in and mastery of the space. This allows potential clients to experience what his coaching, mentoring and consulting is all about.

YOUR BUSINESS

If you would like some guidance refining the focus of your show and creating a plan to build a business around your podcast, grab my free show focus worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/focus.

This worksheet will help you gain some focus on your goal and strategy. It will help you start with the end in mind and then work backward into your content.

Download it today and let me know how I can help.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.